Produced by Chris Curnow, Diane Monico, and the Online
Distributed Proofreading Team at http://www.pgdp.net (This
file was produced from images generously made available
by The Internet Archive)











THE WONDER BOOK OF

VOLCANOES AND EARTHQUAKES

[Illustration: MOUNT VESUVIUS IN ERUPTION]




THE
WONDER BOOK
OF
VOLCANOES AND EARTHQUAKES

BY
Professor EDWIN J. HOUSTON, Ph.D.

NEW YORK
FREDERICK A. STOKES COMPANY
Publishers




Copyright, 1907, by
FREDERICK A. STOKES COMPANY

_All rights reserved_

_October, 1907_




ACKNOWLEDGMENTS


We take this opportunity of acknowledging the courtesy of the
following publishers, who have helped us in connection with the
illustrations of this book:--

Henry Holt and Company ("Physiography," by Rollin D. Salisbury).

D. Appleton and Company (Figs. 13, 35, 39, 40, 41, 42, 43, 44, 45 and
46, "Volcanoes: What They Are and What They Teach," by J. W. Judd;
Fig. 15, "Principles of Geology," by Sir C. Lyell).

The American Book Company ("Manual of Geology," by James Dwight Dana).

G. P. Putnam's Sons ("Earthquakes in the Light of the New Seismology,"
by C. E. Dutton).

The Clarendon Press ("Geology: Chemical, Physical, and
Stratigraphical," by Joseph Prestwich).

            THE PUBLISHERS.




CONTENTS


CHAPTER                                                      PAGE

I. THE VOLCANIC ERUPTION OF KRAKATOA IN 1883                    1

II. SOME EFFECTS OF THE ERUPTION OF KRAKATOA                   12

III. THE VOLCANIC ISLAND OF HAWAII                             26

IV. THE VOLCANIC ISLAND OF ICELAND                             46

V. VESUVIUS                                                    58

VI. OTHER VOLCANOES OF THE MEDITERRANEAN                       73

VII. ORIZABA, POPOCATEPETL, IXTACCIHUATL, AND
     OTHER VOLCANOES OF MEXICO                                 85

VIII. COSEGUINA AND OTHER VOLCANOES OF CENTRAL AMERICA         91

IX. THE VOLCANIC MOUNTAINS OF SOUTH AMERICA                    97

X. VOLCANOES OF THE UNITED STATES                             105

XI. THE CATASTROPHE OF MARTINIQUE AND THE VOLCANIC
    ISLANDS OF THE LESSER ANTILLES                            117

XII. SOME OTHER NOTED VOLCANIC MOUNTAINS                      125

XIII. JORULLO, A YOUNG VOLCANIC MOUNTAIN                      130

XIV. MID-OCEAN VOLCANIC ISLANDS                               137

XV. SUBMARINE VOLCANOES                                       141

XVI. DISTRIBUTION OF THE EARTH'S VOLCANOES                    148

XVII. VOLCANOES OF THE GEOLOGICAL PAST                        153

XVIII. LAPLACE'S NEBULAR HYPOTHESIS                           157

XIX. THE EARTH'S HEATED INTERIOR, THE CAUSE OF VOLCANOES      165

XX. SOME FORMS OF LAVA                                        178

XXI. MUD VOLCANOES AND HOT SPRINGS                            193

XXII. THE VOLCANOES OF THE MOON                               207

XXIII. EARTHQUAKES                                            219

XXIV. SOME OF THE PHENOMENA OF EARTHQUAKES                    231

XXV. THE EARTHQUAKE OF CALABRIA IN 1783                       245

XXVI. THE GREAT LISBON EARTHQUAKE OF 1755                     252

XXVII. THE EARTHQUAKE OF CUTCH, INDIA, IN 1819                257

XXVIII. THE SAN FRANCISCO EARTHQUAKE OF APRIL 18, 1906        262

XXIX. SOME OTHER NOTABLE EARTHQUAKES                          269

XXX. SODOM AND GOMORRAH AND THE CITIES OF THE PLAIN           281

XXXI. INSTRUMENTS FOR RECORDING AND MEASURING EARTHQUAKE
      SHOCKS                                                  290

XXXII. SEAQUAKES                                              296

XXXIII. THE DISTRIBUTION OF EARTHQUAKES                       303

XXXIV. THE CAUSES OF EARTHQUAKES                              308

XXXV. EARTHQUAKES OF THE GEOLOGICAL PAST--CATACLYSMS          319

XXXVI. THE KIMBERLY DIAMOND FIELDS AND THEIR VOLCANIC
       ORIGIN                                                 326

XXXVII. THE FABLED CONTINENT OF ATLANTIS                      335

XXXVIII. PLATO'S ACCOUNT OF ATLANTIS                          344

XXXIX. NATURE'S WARNING OF COMING EARTHQUAKES                 364




FULL PAGE ILLUSTRATIONS


                                                             PAGE

MT. VESUVIUS IN ERUPTION                             Frontispiece

STONES AND LAVA THROWN UPWARDS--ERUPTION OF
  MOKUAWEOWEO, HAWAII, JULY 4-21, 1899                    fac. 36

COTOPAXI                                                      102

THE LAVA FLOW OF THE CRATER OF KILAUEA, HAWAIIAN ISLANDS      184

A SAN FRANCISCO PAVEMENT TORN BY THE EARTHQUAKE               266




ILLUSTRATIONS IN TEXT


FIG.                                                         PAGE

1. THE SUNDA ISLANDS                                            3

2. KRAKATOA BEFORE THE ERUPTION                                 4

3. KRAKATOA AFTER THE ERUPTION                                  4

4. VOLCANIC DUST AS IT APPEARS UNDER THE MICROSCOPE            19

5. THE HAWAIIAN ISLANDS                                        27

6. HAWAII                                                      29

7. PANORAMA OF MOKUAWEOWEO                                     35

8. VIEW OF THE CRATER OF KILAUEA FROM THE VOLCANO HOUSE        35

9. CRATER OF KILAUEA                                           40

10. SECTIONS OF KILAUEA AT DIFFERENT PERIODS                   42

11. ICELAND                                                    47

12. THE MEDITERRANEAN                                          59

13. THE VOLCANIC DISTRICT AROUND VESUVIUS                      60

14. MT. ETNA                                                   77

15. STROMBOLI, VIEWED FROM THE NORTHWEST, APRIL, 1874          79

16. MEXICO AND CENTRAL AMERICA                                 86

17. SOUTH AMERICA                                              98

18. THE UNITED STATES                                         106

19. PANORAMA FROM THE MESA AT THE EDGE OF MT. TAYLOR          110

20. VOLCANIC NECKS, EDGE OF MESA AT MT. TAYLOR                111

21. THE LESSER ANTILLES                                       118

22. GRAHAM'S ISLAND--A RECENT VOLCANIC ISLAND                 143

23. ALEUTIAN ISLANDS                                          146

24. MAP OF THE WORLD, SHOWING LOCATION OF ACTIVE AND
    RECENTLY EXTINCT VOLCANOES                                 150

25. VOLCANIC VESICLES                                         183

26. THREAD-LACE SCORIÆ FROM KILAUEA                           185

27. THREAD-LACE SCORIÆ FROM KILAUEA                           185

28. FROST-LIKE LAVA CRYSTALS                                  187

29. FROST-LIKE LAVA CRYSTALS                                  187

30. BASALTIC COLUMNS, ISLE OF CYCLOPS, ITALY                  188

31. COLUMNAR AND NON-COLUMNAR BASALT                          189

32, 33. DRIBLET CONES                                         190

34. LAVA STALACTITES                                          191

35. CRATER OF THE GREAT GEYSER OF ICELAND                     202

36. GIANT GEYSER                                              203

37. BEE HIVE                                                  203

38. BEE HIVE GEYSER OF ICELAND                                205

39. HEAVY STONE OBELISKS TWISTED BY CALABRIAN EARTHQUAKE
    OF 1783                                                   229

40. CIRCULAR HOLLOW FORMED BY CALABRIAN EARTHQUAKE            239

41. SECTION OF CIRCULAR HOLLOW FORMED BY CALABRIAN
    EARTHQUAKE                                                239

42. MAP OF THE CALABRIAN EARTHQUAKE OF 1783                   246

43. FISSURES CAUSED BY THE CALABRIAN EARTHQUAKE               249

44. MAP SHOWING DISTRICT VISITED BY THE EARTHQUAKE OF
    CUTCH OF 1819                                             258

45. SINDREE BEFORE THE EARTHQUAKE OF 1819                     259

46. SINDREE AFTER THE EARTHQUAKE OF 1819                      260

47. MAP OF WESTERN COAST OF CALIFORNIA SHOWING POSITION
    OF SAN FRANCISCO                                          263

48. NEW ZEALAND                                               274

49. MAP SHOWING REGION AFFECTED BY THE CHARLESTON
    EARTHQUAKE OF 1886                                        277

50. SYRIA                                                     282

51. COMPLEX RECORD OF SEISMOGRAPH                             293

52. LONG DISTANCE SEISMOGRAM                                  293

53. VICENTINI VERTICAL PENDULUM                               294

54. VICENTINI PENDULUM AND RECORDER                           295

55. DAVISON'S EARTHQUAKE MAP OF JAPAN                         306




THE WONDER BOOK OF

VOLCANOES AND EARTHQUAKES




THE WONDER BOOK OF VOLCANOES

AND EARTHQUAKES




CHAPTER I

THE VOLCANIC ERUPTION OF KRAKATOA IN 1883


Krakatoa is a little island in the Straits of Sunda, about thirty
miles west of the island of Java, and nearly the same distance east
of the island of Sumatra. It is uninhabited and very small, measuring
about five miles in length and less than three miles in width. Its
total area is only thirteen square miles. This little piece of land
made itself famous by what took place on it during the month of
August, 1883.

Krakatoa is one of the many islands that form the large island chain
known as the Sunda Islands. The most important islands of this chain
are Sumatra, Java, Sumbawa, Flores, and Ceram. Between Sumatra and
Java, the largest two of these islands, there is a channel called the
Straits of Sunda that connects the waters of the Indian Ocean with
those of the Pacific Ocean. The Straits of Sunda is an important piece
of water that forms one of the great highways to the East. Shipping
is, therefore, always to be found in its waters.

As can be seen by the map, Krakatoa is not far from the Equator,
being situated in lat. 6° 7' S. and long. 105° 26' E. from Greenwich.
Since there are about sixty-nine miles in every degree of latitude,
Krakatoa is about 420 miles south of the Equator, and is about
twenty-five miles from Java. Java is part of the Dutch East Indies,
which includes Java, Celebes, the Spice Islands, and parts of Borneo
and Sumatra. Batavia, the principal seaport of Java, near the
northwest coast, is a great shipping centre, visited by vessels from
nearly all parts of the world. It has, however, no harbor, but is
approached from the ocean by means of a canal two miles in length, the
sides of which are provided with massive brick walls. Besides Batavia,
which is situated about one hundred English miles east of Krakatoa,
there are many smaller towns or villages, the most important of which
is Anjer, a thriving seaport town, where sailing vessels obtain their
supplies of food and fresh water. Before the eruption of Krakatoa,
Anjer was provided with a strong, stone lighthouse.

Java is especially noted for its production of coffee, in which it is
second only to Brazil. Its area is about the same as that of the State
of New York. Java is one of the most densely populated parts of the
world, containing nearly four times as many people as the whole State
of New York.

These facts about the situation and surroundings of Krakatoa are
necessary to an understanding of the wonderful thing that happened on
it during the month of August, 1883. In that month Krakatoa suffered a
most tremendous explosive volcanic eruption, for it is a volcano.

[Illustration: FIG. 1. THE SUNDA ISLANDS]

A volcano is a mountain or hill, generally conical in shape, having
at the top a nearly central opening, called a _crater_, from which
at times melted rock and lava, vapor and gases escape. The lava
either flows down the side of the mountain in a liquid condition, or
is thrown upwards into the air. If the distance the lava is thrown
upwards is sufficiently great the melted matter solidifies before it
falls to the earth. In such cases the largest fragments form what are
called _volcanic cinders_, the smaller pieces, _volcanic ashes_, and
the extremely small particles, _volcanic dust_. If, however, the lava
is thrown to a comparatively small height, it is still melted when it
falls, and is then known as _volcanic drops_ or _driblets_.

[Illustration: FIG. 2. KRAKATOA BEFORE THE ERUPTION]

It is not surprising that Krakatoa is a volcanic island, since it lies
in one of the most active belts of volcanic islands in the world, and
near the coasts of the most active of these islands; i. e., Java.
This belt, as shown in the map, includes, besides the Sunda Island
chain, parts of Gilolo, Celebes, Mindanao and the Philippine Islands.
These islands lie between Asia on the northwest and Australia on the
southeast.

[Illustration: FIG. 3. KRAKATOA AFTER THE ERUPTION]

There is no other part of the world with, perhaps, the single
exception of Japan, where so many active volcanoes are crowded in
so small a space. The island of Java, small as it is, has nearly
fifty volcanoes, of which at least twenty-eight are active. They are
situated in a lofty range running from east to west, some of the
peaks of which are more than 10,000 feet above the level of the sea.
Volcanic eruptions are so frequent that the island is seldom free from
them.

As will be seen from the map shown in Fig. 2, Krakatoa consists of
three groups of volcanic mountains, the southern group giving the name
of Krakatoa to the island. Strictly speaking, this mountain was called
_Rakata_, but as it is now generally known as Krakatoa, it would be
unwise to attempt to call it by any other name. The central mountain
or group of mountains is known as Danan, and consists largely of part
of an old crater. The group of mountains which lies near the northern
end of the island was known as Perboawatan. From the centre of this
latter group of mountains are several old lava streams consisting
of a variety of lava resembling a dark-colored glass, known to
mineralogists as _obsidian_, or _volcanic glass_.

Although Krakatoa was always a volcano, yet between the years 1680 and
1883, it was in the condition of a sleeping or extinct volcano. There
had been a severe explosive eruption in the year 1680, that caused
great loss of life and property, but ever since that time all activity
had ceased and it seemed that the volcano would never again burst out.
In other words, it was generally regarded as a trustworthy, sedate,
quiet, inoffensive and perfectly safe volcano, that had become extinct.

The long continued quiet of Krakatoa was broken on the 20th of May,
1883, when the inhabitants of Batavia on the island of Java were
terrified by noises like the firing of great guns, that were first
heard between ten and eleven o'clock in the morning. These noises
were accompanied by the shaking of the ground and buildings. The
sleeping volcano of Krakatoa was evidently growing restless, but no
great damage was done and soon all was again quiet. The disturbances
were merely the forerunner of the terrible eruption soon to follow,
and confidence was soon restored. But suddenly, on Sunday, August
26th, 1883, almost without any further warnings, Krakatoa burst into
terrible activity and began an explosive eruption that has never been
equalled in severity in the memory of man.

That memorable Sunday of August 26th, 1883, came during a season of
the year known as the _dry monsoon_, a name given the season of the
periodical winds from the Indian Ocean. Batavia, and the surrounding
country, greatly needed rain, for in this part of the world it seldom
rains from April to October, although the air is very moist and damp.
For this reason the beginning of the wet season is always welcomed.
When, therefore, the rumbling sounds of the approaching catastrophe of
Krakatoa were heard in Batavia, the people, believing that the noises
were due to peals of thunder, rejoiced, for all thought they heralded
an earlier setting in of the wet monsoon. But when the rumbling
sounds increased and reports were heard like heavy artillery, it was
clear that the sounds were the beginning of a volcanic eruption, a
phenomenon with which they were only too well acquainted, but, as
volcanic eruptions were far from being uncommon in Java, no one was
very greatly frightened.

But this time the noises increased to such an extent that the people
became alarmed. Throughout the night the appalling sounds continued
and were accompanied by shakings of the earth sufficiently strong to
shake the houses violently. Sleep was out of the question. Many of
the people left their houses and remained all night in the open air,
fearing the shocks would bring the houses down over their heads.

The morning instead of heralding the dawn of a beautiful tropical day,
with its bright, cheerful sunlight, brought with it skies covered
with gray clouds that completely hid the sun. The rumbling sounds,
however, had decreased, and the people were beginning to congratulate
themselves that the dangers were over, when suddenly, the sky grew
darker, and there began a shower of ashes that soon covered the
streets and houses of the city. About seven o'clock on the morning of
August 27th, a most tremendous crash was heard. The sky rapidly became
so dark that it was soon necessary to light the lamps in the houses
of Batavia, and some of the neighboring towns in the western part of
Java. In addition to this the air was filled with vapor, while every
now and then earthquake shocks were again felt. These shocks were
accompanied by terrific noises like those produced by the explosion of
heavy artillery. The noises rapidly increased in number and intensity
until they produced a nearly continuous roar, the nature of which it
is almost impossible to describe since it is probable that such sounds
had never been heard before by man. It is a curious fact, which, I
believe, has never been satisfactorily explained, that in most cases
the people in the immediate neighborhood of the volcano, as, for
example, those on board vessels in the Straits of Sunda, did not hear
the terrific noises at all. Possibly they were too loud and simply
gave a single inward impetus to the drum of the ear and then held it
in position.

Probably some of my readers may remember that witty description given
by Dr. Oliver Wendell Holmes of an alleged effort made by all the
people of the world to find out whether or not there is a man in the
moon. This wonderful plan was as follows:

Careful calculations were made to ascertain when it would be the same
time over all the earth so that all the people of the earth could
simultaneously shout at the top of their voices. In this way it was
hoped that the man in the moon, if there were such a person, would
notice the noise.

The story goes on to tell how when the time approached for the great
experiment, and all were ready to shout as loud as they could, that
each person reasoning to himself or herself, that amid so great a
noise no one could notice whether his or her voice was omitted,
determined to remain silent, so as to be able to hear the noise and
the better to observe what the man in the moon would do when the sound
reached him. The result was that every person on the earth remained
silent and simply listened, so that the earth was never so quiet
before.

Had Oliver Wendell Holmes, or any other person conceiving the witty
idea, lived during the time of the great explosive eruption of
Krakatoa, on that memorable August 27th, 1883, he might have taken
the opportunity of observing the man in the moon, had he not been
frightened by what was occurring, for certainly never before were
such tremendous or terrifying sounds produced, for these sounds, as
we shall see shortly, were actually heard for distances of more than
3,000 miles from the volcano.

There were two different kinds of waves produced in the air by the
tremendous forces at work in the eruption of Krakatoa; namely,
atmospheric waves and sound waves.

The atmospheric waves showed their presence in the air by means of
changes produced in the atmospheric pressure. Now, while these
changes cannot readily be felt by man, yet their presence can be
easily shown by the use of instruments called _barometers_.

There are in different parts of the world, buildings called
_meteorological observatories_, that are provided, among other
instruments, with recording barometers. These instruments caught
the great atmospheric waves that were produced by the eruption of
Krakatoa. In this manner, the astounding fact was learned that the
waves starting from the volcano travelled no less than seven times
around the world. When we say astounding, it must not be understood
that the formation of such waves was at all contrary to the known laws
of physics. On the contrary, provided the force of the eruption was
sufficiently great, such waves must have been produced in the great
ærial ocean. The astonishing, or wonderful thing, was that the force
setting up these waves was so great that it caused them to move seven
times around the globe.

The atmospheric waves were so powerful that it will be worth our while
to describe them in detail. Starting from the volcano of Krakatoa,
as a centre, these waves moved outwards in all directions, becoming
gradually larger and larger until they reached a point halfway round
the globe, or 180° from Krakatoa. The waves did not, however, stop
here, but continued moving onward, now growing smaller and smaller
until they reached a point in North America, immediately opposite
Krakatoa. Such a point on a globe is called an _antipodal point_.[1]
The waves did not stop at this point, but again advanced moving toward
Krakatoa, growing larger and larger until they again reached a point
halfway around the globe, or 180° from Krakatoa, when they again
continued moving but now continually growing smaller and smaller,
until they reached Krakatoa. Here they again began moving completely
around the globe, and this was continued for as many as seven times.
It must not be supposed that the waves ceased on the seventh time
around. On the contrary, they, probably, kept on moving for many
additional times, but they were then so feeble that even the sensitive
recording barometers were unable to detect their presence.

There was another kind of waves in the atmosphere that did not require
barometers for their detection. These were the sound waves, and can
readily be detected by the human ear.

Now, in the case of the great eruption of Krakatoa, the intensity of
the sounds was so great that the sounds could be heard distinctly at
distances of several thousand miles from Krakatoa.

The sound waves so closely resembled the explosion of artillery that
at Acheen, a port on the northern coast of Sumatra, 1,073 miles from
Krakatoa, the authorities, believing that an attack was being made on
the port, placed all their troops under arms to repel the invaders.
The sounds were also distinctly heard at Bangkok, in Siam, a distance
of 1,413 miles from the volcano. They were also heard at the Chagos
Islands, a group of islands situated in the Indian Ocean about 2,267
miles from Krakatoa.

Two steamers at Singapore, 522 miles distant, were despatched to find
the vessel that was believed to be firing guns as distress signals.

The sounds were distinctly heard in parts of South Australia, 2,100
miles distant, and in Western Australia, at 1,700 miles distance.

But it will be unnecessary to give any further details of the great
distances at which these sounds were actually heard. It will suffice
to say that they were heard as far off as about 3,000 miles.

It is difficult to picture to one's self such great distances.
Assuming the greatest distances to be in the neighborhood of 3,000
miles, it would be as if a sound produced, say, in Boston, New York,
or Philadelphia, was so loud that it could be heard in Amsterdam,
London, or Paris.

Some idea of the intensity of these sounds can be had from the fact
that in Batavia, when, in accordance with usage, a gun was fired from
one of the forts at eight o'clock in the morning, two hours before the
greatest intensity of the sounds had been reached, the sound of the
gun could scarcely be heard above the continuous roar.

While, of course, the principal reason the sound waves were carried
so far was the great force causing the eruption, yet these distances
were increased by the fact that the explosion occurred in a region
almost entirely surrounded by great bodies of water. The waves could,
therefore, be readily carried along the surface of the sea. Had there
been a high mountain wall, like the Andes of South America, on one
side of the volcano they would probably have been shut off in this
direction a short distance from where they were produced.




CHAPTER II

SOME EFFECTS OF THE ERUPTION OF KRAKATOA


Besides the sound waves in the air, there were waves in the waters of
the ocean. Suddenly, without any warning, the people of Batavia were
surprised by a huge wave that, crossing the Straits of Sunda, entered
the ship canal before referred to as connecting the city with the
ocean, and, rising above the brick wall, poured over the surrounding
country.

Although Batavia was 100 English miles from Krakatoa, yet after
travelling this distance the wave was sufficiently strong to enter
the city and flood its streets with water to a depth of several feet.
Fortunately, the loss of life was small in the city of Batavia, but
very great in the surrounding towns and villages.

The ocean waves varied in height at different times of the eruption.
The greatest were from fifty to eighty feet high. Just imagine the
effect of a wave twice the height of an ordinary house. The waves
caused great damage to the shipping in the neighborhood. In one
instance, a vessel was carried one and a half miles inland and left on
dry land thirty feet above the level of the sea.

The total loss of life by the waves has been estimated at 35,000
people; besides this, of course, there was a great amount of property
destroyed. The greatest loss was in the immediate neighborhood of
Krakatoa. Gigantic waves swept over the lowlands lying near the
shores of Sumatra and Java, where over areas several miles in width
nearly everything was destroyed, the houses, trees, and people being
swept away and the surface of the land greatly changed. The towns of
Karang and Anjer, as well as numerous smaller villages, were almost
completely destroyed.

The seaport town of Anjer, by far the most important of the above
towns, was almost completely swept away. The heavy stone lighthouse
was so completely obliterated that no traces of its heavy stone
foundations could afterwards be found. The Rev. Phillip Neale,
formerly a British chaplain at Batavia, from whose account of the
eruption of Krakatoa some of the above facts have been taken, tells
of the brave action of the keeper of the lighthouse at Anjer. Besides
his work as lighthouse keeper, to see that the light was constantly
burning during the night, he was charged with telegraphing to Batavia
the names of all passing vessels. On the fateful morning of the great
catastrophe, observing that the sun did not rise, he kept the light of
the lighthouse burning, and, notwithstanding the danger to which he
was exposed, continued at his post in order to send word to Batavia of
the passing of an English steamer. While doing this the lighthouse was
swept away and the brave man perished.

The following verbal account of the destruction of the port of Anjer
was given by a Dutch pilot stationed at Anjer. This description is
quoted by the Rev. Mr. Neale from an article prepared by him for
publication in "The Leisure Hour."

      "I have lived in Anjer all my life, and little thought the
      old town would have been destroyed in the way it has. I am
      getting on in years, and quite expected to have laid my
      bones in the little cemetery near the shore, but not even
      that has escaped and some of the bodies have actually been
      washed out of their graves and carried out to sea. The
      whole town has been swept away, and I have lost everything
      except my life. The wonder is that I escaped at all. I can
      never be too thankful for such a miraculous escape as I had.

      "The eruption began on the Sunday afternoon. We did
      not take much notice at first, until the reports grew
      very loud. Then we noticed that Krakatoa was completely
      enveloped in smoke. Afterwards came on the thick darkness,
      so black and intense that I could not see my hand before
      my eyes. It was about this time that a message came
      from Batavia inquiring as to explosive shocks, and the
      last telegram sent off from us was telling you about
      the darkness and smoke. Towards night everything became
      worse. The reports became deafening, the natives cowered
      down panic-stricken, and a red, fiery glare was visible
      in the sky above the burning mountain. Although Krakatoa
      was twenty-five miles away, the concussion and vibration
      from the constantly repeated shocks were most terrifying.
      Many of the houses shook so much that we feared every
      minute would bring them down. There was little sleep for
      any of us that dreadful night. Before daybreak on Monday,
      on going out of doors, I found the shower of ashes had
      commenced, and this gradually increased in force until at
      length large pieces of pumice stone kept falling around.
      About six A. M. I was walking along the beach.
      There was no sign of the sun, as usual, and the sky had a
      dull, depressing look. Some of the darkness of the previous
      day had cleared off, but it was not very light even then.
      Looking out to sea I noticed a dark, black object through
      the gloom, travelling towards the shore.

      "At first sight it seemed like a low range of hills rising
      out of the water, but I knew there was nothing of the kind
      in that part of the Sunda Strait. A second glance--and a
      very hurried one it was--convinced me that it was a lofty
      ridge of water many feet high, and worse still, that it
      would soon break upon the coast near the town. There was
      no time to give any warning, and so I turned and ran for
      my life. My running days have long gone by, but you may
      be sure that I did my best. In a few minutes I heard the
      water with a loud roar break upon the shore. Everything
      was engulfed. Another glance around showed the houses
      being swept away and the trees thrown down on every side.
      Breathless and exhausted I still pressed on. As I heard
      the rushing waters behind me, I knew that it was a race
      for life. Struggling on, a few yards more brought me to
      some rising ground, and here the torrent of water overtook
      me. I gave up all for lost, as I saw with dismay how high
      the wave still was. I was soon taken off my feet and borne
      inland by the force of the resistless mass. I remember
      nothing more until a violent blow aroused me. Some hard,
      firm substance seemed within my reach, and clutching it,
      I found I had gained a place of safety. The waters swept
      past, and I found myself clinging to a cocoanut palm-tree.
      Most of the trees near the town were uprooted and thrown
      down for miles, but this one fortunately had escaped and
      myself with it.

      "The huge wave rolled on, gradually decreasing in height
      and strength until the mountain slopes at the back of
      Anjer were reached, and then, its fury spent, the water
      gradually receded and flowed back into the sea. The sight
      of those receding waters haunts me still. As I clung to
      the palm-tree, wet and exhausted, there floated past the
      dead bodies of many a friend and neighbor. Only a mere
      handful of the population escaped. Houses and streets were
      completely destroyed, and scarcely a trace remains of where
      the once busy, thriving town originally stood. Unless you
      go yourself to see the ruin you will never believe how
      completely the place has been swept away. Dead bodies,
      fallen trees, wrecked houses, an immense muddy morass and
      great pools of water, are all that is left of the town
      where my life has been spent. My home and all my belongings
      of course perished--even the clothes I am wearing are
      borrowed--but I am thankful enough to have escaped with my
      life and to be none the worse for all that I have passed
      through."

As is common in cases of earthquake waves a great depression in the
level of the sea occurred at places great distances from Krakatoa. For
example, at the harbor of Ceylon, the water receded so far that for
about three minutes the boats were left high and dry, and then a huge
wave carried them with it as it rushed over the land.

Perhaps one of the best evidences of the immense power of ocean waves
is to be seen in the massive blocks of white coral rock that were
washed up by the waves, on parts of the coast of Java for distances of
from two to three miles from the ocean. Many of these blocks weighed
from twenty to thirty tons. Indeed, some of them reached the weight of
from forty to fifty tons.

It is probable that the island of Krakatoa and its neighboring smaller
islands formed portions of a huge cone about eight miles in diameter,
that has been broken up at some very remote but unknown time by,
perhaps, a greater catastrophe than that of August, 1883.

In the Straits of Sunda the water was raised fifty feet to eighty
feet above the ordinary level, and produced tremendous destruction
especially on the coasts of Java and Sumatra, sweeping away many
villages and drowning many thousands of people. The wave had a
velocity of progression of nearly 400 miles per hour, or eight times
faster than an ordinary express train.

When it is said that the _velocity of progression of the wave_ was
nearly 400 miles per hour, it is not meant that a body floating on
the ocean, such, for example, as a ship, would have been carried
forward at this high velocity, but would merely rise and fall in a
to-and-fro swing to about the height of the wave; that is, fifty to
eighty feet according to what may have been the height. As in the
case of the sound waves these motions of water covered or passed over
nearly all the waters of the earth. The waves progressing toward the
west, crossed the Indian Ocean reaching to the coast of Hindostan, and
Madagascar, and sweeping around the southern part of Africa, finally
reached the coasts of France and England, as well as the eastern part
of North and South America. Sweeping towards the east, they reached
the coasts of Australia, New Zealand, and crossing the vast Pacific
Ocean were felt at Alaska and the western coasts of North and South
America.

But besides the enormous waves caused by the eruption, there were
marked changes in the level of the land. Large portions of the coast
of Sumatra and Java were almost annihilated, much of the original
surface near the coast being submerged, and places that were formerly
dry land are now covered with water to a depth of from 600 to 900 feet.

The enormous amount of material thrown into the air by the forces
of the eruption is especially characteristic of this phenomenon.
Such quantities of pumice stone and ashes fell from the clouds that,
sinking in the water and collecting on the bed of the channel, they
changed the depth of the water, so as to render navigation dangerous.
Indeed, the Sebesi Channel, lying on the north of the island of
Krakatoa was completely blocked by a huge bank of volcanic material,
portions of which projected above the water, forming two smaller
islands. These, however, have since been washed away by the waves.

We will not attempt to give at present any explanations as to the
causes of this great volcanic eruption, since the different theories
as to the cause of volcanoes will be better understood when other
volcanic eruptions have been described. It is sufficient here to say
that if a large quantity of water should have suddenly reached a
great mass of molten rock, frightful explosive eruptions would have
occurred, and if the island was resting on a submerged crater its
sudden disappearance may be explained.

Another great wonder connected with the explosive eruption of Krakatoa
was the enormous heights to which the fine dust was thrown up into
the air. It has been asserted that during the most intense of these
eruptions the particles reached elevations of perhaps more than
twenty-five miles above the level of the sea. Carried by the winds,
the fine particles remained suspended in the air for many months,
and gave rise to magnificent sunlight effects, such as early dawn,
lengthened twilights, lurid skies, and gorgeous sunsets of a reddish
tint. There were also caused curious haloes, as well as green and blue
moons.

The fine dust particles consisted of minute crystals of feldspar and
other minerals, and when examined under the microscope presented the
appearance shown in Fig. 4.

These mineral substances permitted a portion of the light to pass
through them, thus producing wonderful optical effects in the
atmosphere either because they acted like minute prisms and so
produced rainbow colors, or because they turned the rays of light out
of their course as to produce what is called interference by color
effects of a nature similar to the colors seen in mother-of-pearl,
rainbow coal, or in the wing cases of many beetles. The explanations
of these phenomena are too difficult for a book of this character.

An explosive volcanic eruption is a very terrifying and wonderful
phenomenon. Frightful roaring sounds are suddenly heard, the earth
shakes for many miles around, when suddenly a vast quantity of molten
rock, and sometimes huge stones, are thrown out of the crater high up
into the air. So great is the force that throws these materials out
of the opening that heavy masses of rocks often are ejected very much
faster than the projectiles from the largest guns that are used in any
of the navies of the world.

[Illustration: FIG. 4. VOLCANIC DUST AS IT APPEARS UNDER THE
MICROSCOPE]

As the molten lava cools and falls in the form of prodigious clouds
of ashes, cinders and dust, for many miles around the volcano, even
the light of the sun is obscured, and one cannot see the hand before
the face. Some of the materials in these clouds are so light that they
remain suspended in the air for many hours, often indeed for many
days, and sometimes even for years. The heavier particles, however,
soon begin to fall, and before long the earth's surface both around
the volcano, and often at considerable distances from it, is covered
with a thick layer of ashes.

The sounds accompanying a volcanic eruption are often terrifying. Amid
shakings and tremblings of the earth's crust, known as earthquakes,
there are occasionally heard noises like the explosion of huge guns.
Sometimes these sounds follow one another so rapidly that they produce
an almost continuous roar. Through the roar of the explosion a
curious crackling noise can be heard, due to the fragments of stone
hurled out of the crater striking against one another, especially as
the stones which are thrown out of the crater and have commenced to
fall back again to the earth, are struck by others that are still
rising.

Immense quantities of ashes, stones, vapor and gases are thrown
upwards for great distances into the air, while, at the same time, a
lava stream pours over the lowest side of the crater. As the column
of ashes and cinders reaches its greatest height in the air, it
begins to spread outward on all sides, rapidly growing like a huge
dark mushroom. This soon shuts out the light of the sun, and from it
showers of red hot ashes and cinders fall to the earth.

It would be extremely dangerous to be on the side of the volcanic
mountain during an explosive eruption; for, even should you escape
falling into an opening in the side of the mountain, you might be
killed by the huge stones that are constantly falling on all sides
around the opening, or might be buried under the vast showers of red
hot ashes that are poured down from the dense clouds overhanging the
mountain, or suffocated by clouds of sulphur vapor that rush down its
sides.

When at a safe distance the sight is certainly magnificent. There is
no light from the sun. All would be in pitch darkness but for the
reddish glare thrown upwards by the red hot lava, by the glowing
showers of ashes that are being rained down on the sides of the
mountain, or by terrific lightning flashes, due to the discharge of
the immense quantities of electricity produced by the forces of the
eruption.

Naturally a great volcanic eruption can cause a considerable loss of
life and property. When a large lava stream begins to flow down the
sides of the mountain, it cannot be stopped, and should it flow toward
a village or town it is likely to destroy the town completely. Besides
this, the vegetation of the country for many miles around is destroyed
by the showers of red hot ashes that fall from the sky. The houses of
neighboring cities are similarly ruined by the great conflagrations
thus set up. Further destruction is also caused by large streams of
mud that rush down the slopes of the mountain, or by huge waves set
up in the ocean. If the volcano is situated, as most volcanoes are,
near the coast, the showers of ashes and falling stones may set fire
to vessels in the neighborhood, or the progress of such vessels may be
seriously retarded by layers of ashes or pumice stone that float on
the surface. Sometimes these layers are so thick as actually to bring
ships to a complete standstill.

It must not be supposed that volcanoes are in a constant state of
eruption. On the contrary, nearly all volcanoes, after an eruption,
become _quiet_ or _inactive_. The air soon clears by the ashes
settling, and the sunlight again appears. A crust forms over the
surface of the lava, which rapidly becomes hard enough to permit one
to walk over it safely. The vegetation, which has been destroyed by
the hot ashes, again springs up, and, if the volcano happens to be
situated within the tropics, where there is an abundance of moisture,
the land soon again becomes covered by a luxuriant vegetation. Most of
the people, who have escaped sudden death during the eruption, return
to the ruins of their houses; for it is a curious fact that no matter
how great has been a volcanic eruption, or how far-reaching the ruin,
the survivors, as a rule, do not appear to hesitate to return to their
old neighborhood. In a few years the fields are re-cultivated, the
villages are rebuilt, and the people apparently forget they are living
over a slumbering volcano, which may at any time again burst forth in
a dangerous eruption.

A volcano that throws out molten rock, vapor and gases is known as an
_active volcano_. An active volcano, however, is only correctly said
to be in a state of eruption when the quantity of the molten rock,
lava or vapor it throws out is greatly in excess of the ordinary
amount.

Sometimes the volcanic activity so greatly decreases that the molten
rock or lava no longer rises in the crater, but, on the contrary,
begins to sink, so that the top of the lava in the crater is often
at a considerable distance below its edges. The lava then begins to
harden on the surface, and, if the time is sufficient, the hardened
part extends for a considerable distance downward. In this way the
opening connecting the crater with the molten lava below becomes
gradually closed, the volcano being thus shut up, or corked, just as a
bottle is tightly closed by means of a cork driven into the opening at
its top so as to prevent the escape of the liquid it contains.

It may sound queer to say that a volcano has its crater so corked up
as to prevent the escape of the lava, but the idea is nevertheless
correct and helpful. To realize the size of these huge volcanic corks
one must remember that the craters of some volcanoes are several miles
across. A volcano thus choked or corked up is said to be _extinct_.

When we speak of an extinct volcano we do not mean that the volcano
will never again become active. A volcano does not cease to erupt
because there are no more molten materials in the earth to escape, but
simply because its cork or crust of hardened lava has been driven in
so tightly that the chances of its ever being loosened again seem to
be very small. But small as the chances may seem we must not forget
that the volcano may at any time become active, or go into its old
business of throwing out materials through its crater. A volcano in
an extinct condition is not unlike a steam boiler, the safety valve
of which has been firmly fixed in place. If the steam continues to be
generated in the boiler, it is only a matter of time when the boiler
will blow up, and the explosion will be all the greater because the
safety valve did not allow the steam to escape earlier.

Sometimes an intermediate class of volcanoes called _dormant_ is
introduced between active volcanoes on the one hand and extinct
volcanoes on the other. The name dormant volcano, or, as the word
means, _sleeping volcano_, is objectionable, since it might lead one
to think that an extinct volcano is not sleeping but dead, and this is
wrong.

Since the plug of hardened lava in the volcanic crater is generally at
a much lower level than the top of the crater, the crater will soon
become filled to a greater or less depth with water, produced either
by the rain, or by the melting of the snow that falls on the top of
the mountain. Crater lakes, often of very great depths, are common in
extinct volcanoes.

Of course, when an extinct volcano again becomes active, two things
must happen if the eruption is explosive. In the first place, the
force of the explosion must be sufficiently great to loosen the
stopper or plug of hardened lava which stops it. In doing this the
mass is broken into a number of fragments that are thrown forcibly
upwards into the air. After rising often for great heights they soon
fall again on the sides of the mountain.

But besides the breaking up of the stopper, the lake in the crater of
the volcano is thrown out along with the cinders or ashes, producing
very destructive flows of what are called aqueous lava or mud streams.
These streams flow down the sides of the mountain, carrying with them
immense quantities of both the ashes thrown out during the eruption,
or those that have collected around the sides of the crater during
previous eruptions. Very frequently, these streams of aqueous lava
produce greater destruction than the molten lava.

If you have ever watched common ants at work clearing out or enlarging
their underground homes, in a piece of smooth gravel walk in your
garden, you can form some idea why the mountain immediately around a
volcanic crater is conical in shape. If the colony of ants happens
to be fairly large, you can see an almost unbroken stream of these
industrious little animals, each bearing in its mandibles a small
grain of sand or gravel brought up from some place below the surface.

Carrying it a short distance from the opening, it throws it on the
ground, rapidly returning for another load. In this way there is
heaped up around all sides of the opening a pile of sand or gravel,
the outward slopes of which gives the pile a conical form. You have,
probably, noticed that the steepness of the slopes depends on the size
of the grains; for the larger these grains the sharper or steeper the
slopes, the very fine grains producing flat mounds or cones.

It is the same with a volcanic cone. The materials that are thrown
upwards into the air, falling again on the mountain, collect around
the crater on all sides, thus giving it the characteristic cone-like
shape of the volcanic mountain. Where nothing occurs to disturb
the formation of the cone its height above the level of the sea
will gradually increase. Very frequently, however, during explosive
eruptions, a large part of this cone will be blown away by the
force of the eruption only to be again built up during some later
eruption. Indeed, in the case of volcanic islands, the force of a
great volcanic eruption is sometimes so great that not only is a large
volcanic mountain blown entirely away, but a hole is left, where it
had been standing, that extends further downwards below the level
of the sea than the top of the mountain extended previously above
it. The above are some, but by no means all, the wonders attending
volcanic eruptions. We shall refer to others in subsequent chapters in
describing particular eruptions.




CHAPTER III

THE VOLCANIC ISLAND OF HAWAII


The volcanic island of Hawaii, the largest of the Sandwich Island
chain, is situated in the mid Pacific, south of the Tropic of
Cancer. As shown in Fig. 5, this island chain consists of Hawaii,
Maui, Molokai, Oahu, Kauai, Nihau, and about eight large islands,
together with numerous small islands, extending in a general northwest
direction from Hawaii to Nihau, a distance of about 400 miles. Like
most volcanic islands they lie in more or less straight lines,
probably along fissures, in this case in two nearly parallel lines.
The island of Nihau, however, is an exception, the direction of the
greatest length being almost straight across the two parallel lines.

The Sandwich Islands lie 2,000 miles from San Francisco in deep water,
between 2,000 and 3,000 fathoms, or between 12,000 and 18,000 feet in
depth. This island chain consists of great volcanic mountains, that
had, at one time, fifteen active volcanoes of the first class. These
are now all extinct but three, and all of these are on the island of
Hawaii.

In his report to the United States Geological Survey for 1882-83,
Dutton states that the summit of Mt. Haleakala on East Maui is 10,350
feet above the sea level. Oahu has peaks on its eastern side 2,900
feet high, and peaks on the western side 3,850 feet high. The summit
of Kauai is probably 6,200 feet above the sea.

[Illustration: FIG. 5. THE HAWAIIAN ISLANDS _From U. S.
Geological Survey_]

It can be shown by deep-sea soundings that all these volcanic piles
are the summits of a gigantic mountain mass that rises abruptly from
the bed of the Pacific. There are reasons for believing that this
submarine chain continues for many hundreds of miles in the same
direction beyond Kauai.

The extinct volcano, Haleakala, on East Maui appears to have been in
eruption at a much later day than Mt. Kea, which is also an extinct
volcano. But the natives have no traditions of any eruptions.

The volcanoes on the other islands have been extinct for a very long
time judging from the extent of their erosion. Dutton is of the
opinion that the western islands of the chain have been extinct for
much longer times than the remaining islands.

The Sandwich Islands, also known as the Hawaiian Islands, are one of
the colonial possessions of the United States. The island of Hawaii is
about 2,000 miles from San Francisco. Honolulu, on the island of Oahu,
the principal seaport of the chain, has a pleasant climate, and is an
important coaling station for warships, commercial vessels, whalers,
and trading ships generally.

The principal product of the island is sugar cane.

The island of Hawaii, as shown in map, Fig. 6, consists of five
volcanic mountains and some small coral reefs. These mountains are:
Mt. Kea, on the north, 13,805 feet in height; Mt. Haulalai, in the
west central part of the island, 8,273 feet in height; Mt. Loa, in the
south central part of the island, 13,675 feet in height; Mt. Kilauea,
twenty miles east of the crater of Loa, 4,040 feet high at the Volcano
House, and 4,158 feet on the highest point on the west, and Kohala,
5,505 feet in height, running through the northwestern part of the
island, and the Kohala mountains in the northwestern part.

[Illustration: FIG. 6. HAWAII _From Dana's Manual of
Geology_]

Of these mountains, Mt. Loa and Kilauea are the only active volcanoes,
and are in frequent eruption. Mt. Haulalai was in eruption during
1804. Mt. Kea has not been active during historical times, while Mt.
Kohala has been inactive for so long a time that its slopes are deeply
gullied wherever the rivers flow down them.

As you can see from the map, Hawaii is very large. It has a length of
ninety-three miles from north to south, and a breadth of eighty miles
from east to west, its area is about 6,500 square miles. With the
exception of small patches of coral reefs, Hawaii is formed entirely
of lava, and is the largest pile of lava in the world with the single
exception of Iceland.

Where the islands of the Hawaiian chain have coral reefs extending
off their coasts, excellent harbors are found in the deep waters
between the islands and the reefs. Hawaii, however, has no extended
reefs of this character, and, consequently, no first-class harbors.
Hilo, on the eastern coast, is the best harbor, and is, therefore, the
principal settlement.

A very brief examination of the map of Hawaii will show you that there
are no rivers on the island, except on the sides exposed to the wind,
that is, on the northern and northeastern slopes. Since the yearly
rainfall on Hawaii is large, being in the neighborhood of a hundred
inches, you will understand that considerable rain water falls on the
island. In those parts of the island where it does not run off the
surface it must drain downward through the loose piles of broken rocks
or cinders. A rainfall of one hundred inches a year means that if all
the rain which falls on each square foot of surface was collected
in a flat vessel one foot square with vertical sides it would fill
the vessel to the depth of one hundred inches, or over eight feet.
The drainage of the rainwater downwards through these parts of the
island, must, therefore, be large.

Another curious fact you can notice on the map, is that the lava
streams of the past fifty years from Mt. Loa indicated by heavy
dotted lines, in no cases begin at the crater, but start at fairly
considerable distances from it. Later on in this chapter we shall
explain the reason for this curious fact.

Since practically the whole of Hawaii has been formed from the streams
of lava that have flowed at one time or another, you can understand
how great these flows must have been. But to do this fully you must
not only take into consideration the portions of the island that
lie above the ocean and reach into the air at its greatest height
to 13,805 feet above its surface, you must also remember that this
mountain rises from a deep ocean, so that if all the water were
removed, you would see Hawaii towering up above the former level
of the sea to the height of about 31,000 feet, or higher than Mt.
Everest, the highest point on the earth above the present sea level.
This would be, approximately, five and eight-tenths miles. You can
understand, therefore, how great the flow of lava must have been.

We shall begin the description of Hawaii with the active volcano of
Mt. Loa, or, as it is sometimes called in Hawaii, "The White Mountain."

You will remember that the eruption of Krakatoa was of the explosive
type. Practically no melted rock or lava escaped from the crater.
Indeed, if it had escaped it would not have been seen; for, not only
the cone near the crater, but also much of the mountain itself was
blown completely out of sight and covered by the waters of the ocean.

The eruptions of Mt. Loa are of an entirely different type. In Loa
there are no explosions, the eruptions being what are called the
non-explosive or quiet volcanic eruption type. It will be necessary to
explain some of the peculiarities of this kind of eruptions.

There is a great difference in the liquidity or the ease with which
different kinds of lava flow. Some lava is very thick or viscid,
or is sticky like thick molasses or tar, and therefore flows very
sluggishly. Other lava is thin or mobile, more closely resembling
water in the ease with which it flows. Now, in the case of a volcanic
mountain of fairly considerable height, where the lava possesses
marked liquidity, the lava as it rises from great depths in the tube
of the volcano seldom flows over the top or rim of the crater. This is
not because the force that brings the lava up is unable to carry it
a few thousand feet higher, so that it can run over the brim of the
crater, but because the walls of the volcanic mountains are unable to
stand the great pressure which the mass of liquid lava exerts against
their sides.

It can be shown that a column of liquid lava 500 feet high, will exert
a pressure on the walls of the crater of about 625 pounds to the
square inch. Therefore, in very high volcanic mountains, long before
the lava can reach the edge of the crater and overflow, the pressure
becomes so great, that cracks or fissures are made in the sides of
the mountain, through which the lava is quietly discharged; when, of
course, the level of the lava in the crater falls considerably. In
volcanoes of the explosive type, no matter what may be the condition
of lava, should a large quantity of water suddenly find an entrance to
a large body of molten lava at some distance below the surface, the
lava would be suddenly thrown explosively into the air, where being
chilled, it would afterwards descend in showers of ashes, cinders, or
volcanic dust.

In some volcanic mountains such as Mt. Loa, the crater, instead
of being situated at the top of a conical pass of ashes or other
material, consists of a pit-like depression, generally occupying a
level tract or plain at the top of the mountain. This pit is known
as a _caldera_, or _caldron_, or what you might, perhaps, call a
huge kettle or boiler. The pit has more or less vertical sides that
extend downwards for unknown depths to the place from which the lava
comes. The vertical walls of the caldera are not, however, smooth, but
exhibit numerous horizontal ledges, that mark places where portions of
the floor of the caldera were situated at different times.

At the bottom of the large pit or caldera on the summit of Mt. Loa
can be seen the level floor formed of hardened lava. This floor is
surrounded by vertical walls on which can be seen the broken edges of
the old lake bed.

Captain Dutton, in a paper on Hawaiian volcanoes, prepared for the
United States Geological Survey, and published in its Fourth Annual
Report for 1882-83, thus describes the appearance at the great crater
as it was in 1882.

      "The summit of Mauna Loa (Mt. Loa), is a broad and large
      platform about five miles in length and four miles in
      width, within which is sunken the great caldera called
      Mokuaweoweo. The distance from the point where we first
      reach the summit to the brink of the pit is about a mile
      and a half. The surface of the platform is much more rugged
      than the slopes just ascended. It is riven with cracks, and
      small faults,[2] and piles of shattered rock are seen on
      every hand. Nowhere is there to be seen the semblance of
      a cinder cone. Doubtless many eruptions have broken forth
      from the various fissures on this summit, but only here
      and there can insignificant traces of such catastrophes
      be definitely distinguished. The absence of fragmental
      ejecta (broken rock that are thrown out) is extraordinary.
      The shattered blocks, slabs, and spalls (chips) which
      everywhere cumber the surface appear to have resulted from
      the spontaneous shivering and shattering of the lava sheets
      by their own internal tensions as they cooled.

Fig. 7, taken from Dutton's report, gives the general shape of this
great caldera. Dutton's description of the same is as follows:

      "The length of the main caldera is a little less than
      three miles and its width about a mile and three-quarters.
      Its floor, viewed from above, appears to be composed of a
      series of flat surfaces occupying two distinct levels, the
      higher upon the surface of the black ledge, the lower lying
      within the ledge. Upon the western side is a small cinder
      cone standing close upon the border of the black ledge.
      It is the only one visible, either within the caldera or
      upon the surrounding summit. Its height is about 125 or 130
      feet. It was seen in operation, throwing up steam, clots of
      lava, and lapilli (some of the larger pieces of fragmentary
      lava) in the year 1878. The only other diversifications of
      the floor are many cracks which traverse it, the larger of
      which are distinctly visible from above. Some of them are
      considerably faulted. There is no difficulty in recognizing
      the fact that the whole floor has been produced by the
      sinkage of the lava beds which once continued over the
      entire extent of the depression, their undersides having
      been melted off most probably by the fires beneath. The
      lava beds in the immediate vicinity of the brink upon the
      summit platform wear the aspect of some antiquity. They
      have become brown and carious by weathering, and, although
      no soil is generated, little drifts of gravel are seen
      here and there mixed with pumice. Since the caldera was
      formed there is no indication that the lavas have anywhere
      overflowed its rim. And yet it is a very strange fact that
      within a half mile, and again within a mile to a mile and
      a half, lavas have been repeatedly erupted within the last
      forty years from the summit platform, and have outflowed
      at points situated from 700 to 900 feet above the level of
      the lava lake within. Traces may also be seen, at varying
      distances back of the rim, of very many eruptions in which
      the rocks betoken great recency, although no dates can be
      assigned to their occurrence."

[Illustration: FIG. 7. PANORAMA OF MOKUAWEOWEO _From U. S.
Geological Survey_]

[Illustration: FIG. 8. VIEW OF THE CRATER OF KILAUEA FROM THE
VOLCANO HOUSE _From U. S. Geological Survey_]

During his visit to this great pit, Captain Dutton succeeded in
climbing down the almost vertical walls on the side of the crater,
and, reaching the surface of the hardened lake, walked over it. It
must have required no little courage to thus venture on the thin
floor of a lake which he knew was filled to great depths with red hot
boiling lava, for he was walking over the surface of a slumbering
volcano, that might at almost any moment awaken, and opening, swallow
him and his companions. Through enormous cracks in the floor, he could
feel the heat from the molten mass, while, through the same openings
came suggestive whiffs of sulphur vapor.

During the eruption of this mountain, on January 23d, 1859, the light
from the glowing lava streams was bright enough to read fine print at
Hilo, a distance of thirty-five miles.

During the eruption of 1852, a stream of white-hot lava was thrown up
into the air from one of the fissures to a height of from 300 to 400
feet.

[Illustration: STONES AND LAVA THROWN UPWARDS--ERUPTION OF
MOKUAWEOWEO, HAWAII, JULY 4-21, 1899 _From a Stereograph,
Copyright, by Underwood & Underwood_]

When an eruption takes place in Mt. Loa the column of lava slowly
rises in the crater, threatening to overflow its lowest edges, but
before this can take place the pressure becomes so great that some
portion of the mountain below the crater is fractured and the lava
quietly escapes.

During some conditions of the mountain every fifteen or twenty minutes
a column of highly glowing lava is shot upwards like a fountain to
a height of 500 feet and over, falling back into the lake in fiery
spray. Unusual heights of these streams are generally followed by an
eruption.

These curious jets of molten rock certainly cannot be due to the
pressure of higher columns of lava, since the crater itself is near
the top of a high plain. They are believed to be due to steam formed
by the penetration of the rain water that falls on this part of the
mountain.

You can now understand why the lava streams escaping from Mt. Loa as
shown on the map, in Fig. 6, do not begin at the level of the crater;
for the discharge of the lava does not take place over the rim of
the crater, but through the cracks or fissures formed further down
the sides of the mountains. It must not be supposed, however, that
the fissures are limited to the sides of the mountain where they can
be seen. They probably occur in many places below the surface of the
water on some part of the bed of the ocean.

The crevices that are formed in this manner in the sides of the
mountain vary greatly in size, some being so narrow that the lava
scarcely flows through them at all but simply fills up the crevice,
hardens on cooling, and mends the cracks in the mountains, in the way
that a crack is mended in a piece of china by the use of glue or in
a wall of masonry by mortar. Through the largest crevices or cracks,
however, large lava streams may continue to flow often for several
weeks, or even longer.

Sometimes, especially towards the close of the eruptive flow, the
lava may escape disruptively, so that small cones are formed along
the lines of the fissures. Cones of this character are called lateral
cones, and in the case of a volcanic island, where the lava flows out
below the level of the water, the lateral cones sometimes project
above the water and form volcanic islands or dangerous shoals that
impede navigation.

When the lava pours out of a crevice in the side of the mountain, a
river of molten rock rushes down the slopes, at first like a torrent,
but on reaching the more nearly level ground, it spreads out in great
lava lakes or fields, the surface of which takes on the characteristic
black appearance of basalt, a certain kind of glass, for the lavas of
Mt. Loa are generally basaltic. After an eruption the hardened floor
of lava in the caldera, being no longer supported by the liquid mass
formerly below it, falls in, leaving a large cavity with only the
edges of the old floor clinging to the sides of the pit.

It will be interesting to give a short account of some of the great
lava streams that have been poured out at different times from Mt. Loa.

In the great eruption of August 11th, 1855, the lava escaped through
fissures from two to thirty inches in width. Then, flowing in a
continuous stream, it did not stop until it was within five miles of
Hilo.

In the eruption of January 23d, 1859, the lava stream flowed towards
the northwest on the east side of Haulalai, reaching the sea in eight
days.

The eruption of March 27th, 1868, was characterized by severe
earthquake shocks, one of which, occurring on the second of April,
destroyed many houses and produced huge fissures in the earth. These
shocks produced great earthquake waves that reached distant coasts.

Mt. Kilauea, lies at a lower level towards the east. This crater is
situated at 4,040 feet above the level of the sea, and is nearly 6,000
feet below the caldera on the top of Mt. Loa.

Fig. 8, taken from the United States Geological Survey, Fourth
Annual Report, for 1882-83, shows a view of Kilauea from the Volcano
House. Dutton gives the following description of the appearance of
Halemaumau, the pit crater or caldera of Kilauea.

      "In front of us and right beneath our feet, over the crest
      of a nearly vertical wall, more than 700 feet below, is
      outspread the broad floor of the far-famed Kilauea. It
      is a pit about three and a half miles in length, and two
      and a half miles in width, nearly elliptical in plan and
      surrounded with cliffs, for the most part inaccessible to
      human foot, and varying in altitude from a little more than
      300 feet to a little more than 700 feet. The altitude of
      the point on which we stand is about 4,200 feet above the
      sea....

      "The object upon which the attention is instantly fixed
      is a large chaotic pile of rocks, situated in the centre
      of the amphitheatre, rising to a height which by an
      eye estimate appears to be about 350 to 400 feet. From
      innumerable places in its mass volumes of steam are poured
      forth and borne away to the leeward by the trade wind. The
      color of the pile is intensely black....

      "Around it spreads out the slightly undulated floor of the
      amphitheatre, as black as midnight. To the left of the
      steaming pile is an opening in the floor of the crater,
      within which we behold the ruddy gleams of boiling lava.
      From numerous points in the surrounding floor clouds of
      steam issue forth and melt away in the steady flow of the
      wind. The vapors issue most copiously from an area situated
      to the right of the central pile, and in the southern
      portion of the amphitheatre. Desolation and horror reign
      supreme. The engirdling walls everywhere hedge it in. But
      upon their summits, and upon the receiving platform beyond,
      are all the wealth and luxuriance of tropical vegetation
      heightening the contrast of the desolation below...."

[Illustration: FIG. 9. CRATER OF KILAUEA _From Dana's Manual
of Geology_]

Fig. 9 represents the pit-like crater of Kilauea as it appeared after
the eruption of 1886. Here, as will be seen, there are several lakes
of lava, the largest of which is known as Halemaumau. The eruption of
1886, like all the eruptions of Kilauea, consisted of the escape of
the lava from an opening on the side of the mountain below the crater,
and a sinking in of the hardened floor of the crater. The figure also
shows the position of the New Lake that lies east of Halemaumau. The
extent and appearance of each of these lakes are constantly changing,
both as to height and area.

Dutton gives the following description of the appearance of the lake
of lava, and some curious phenomena that occur on its surface. He is
describing the general appearance of the pool of molten lava covered
as it is with a hardened black crust:

      "The surface of the lake is covered over with a black
      solidified crust showing a rim of fire all around its edge.
      At numerous points at the edge of the crust jets of fire
      are seen spouting upwards, throwing up a spray of glowing
      lava drops, and emitting a dull, simmering sound. The heat
      for the time being is not intense. Now and then a fountain
      breaks out in the middle of the lake and boils freely for a
      few minutes. It then becomes quiet, but only to renew the
      operation at some other point. Gradually the spurting and
      fretting at the edges augment. A belch of lava is thrown
      up here and there to the height of five or six feet, and
      falls back upon the crust. Presently, near the edge, a
      cake of the crust cracks off, and one edge of it bending
      downwards descends beneath the lava, and the whole cake
      disappears, disclosing a naked surface of liquid fire.
      Again it coats over and turns black. This operation is
      repeated edgewise at some other part of the lake. Suddenly
      a network of cracks shoots through the entire crust. Piece
      after piece of it turns its edge downwards and sinks with
      a grand commotion, leaving the whole pool a single expanse
      of liquid lava. The lake surges feebly for awhile, but soon
      comes to rest. The heat is now insupportable, and for a
      time it is necessary to withdraw from the immediate brink."

It is very curious to think of cakes of hardened lava floating on the
surface of molten lava, but, of course, this is just as natural as
cakes of ice floating on the surface of water; for a cake of hardened
lava is, as you will understand, only a cake of frozen lava, and,
being lighter than the molten lava, must, of course, float on its
surface.

The disappearance of these cakes of frozen lava and their remelting is
still more curious, and can be explained as follows: The frozen or
solidified mass of black basalt is a trifle lighter than the lava on
which it is floating only while its temperature is high, and therefore
expanded by heat. As soon as it cools, its density increases, and when
it becomes a little greater than that of the liquid lava, it begins to
sink and soon disappears.

[Illustration: FIG. 10. SECTIONS OF KILAUEA AT DIFFERENT
PERIODS _From Dana's Manual of Geology_]

Professor Dana, who has made a careful study of the phenomena of
Kilauea, shows in Fig. 10, a cross section of Kilauea at different
times. Before the eruption of 1823, the depth of the crater was from
800 to 1,000 feet. At the eruption the bottom 600 to 800 feet, making
the depth of Kilauea over this deeper central part about 1,500 feet.
The varying depths at different dates are clearly marked on the
drawing.

The eruptions of Kilauea generally occur as follows:

First there is a slow rising of the lava in the crater. This rising
continues until the pressure is so great that the mountain is ruptured
at some lower place. Next a discharge of the lava and a sinking to a
level in the conduit that will depend on the position of the crevice.
Then a gradual falling in of the hardened floor of the lake, a portion
of the horizontal walls remaining on the sides of the caldera.

The eruption of Kilauea, however, has not always been of the quiet
type. There was an eruption in the year 1789 that would appear to
have been of the explosive variety. The following account is given by
Dana as taken from a history of the Sandwich Islands by the Rev. I.
Dibble, published in 1843:

"The army of Keoua, a Hawaiian chief, being pursued by Kamehamoha,
were at the time near Kilauea. For two preceding nights there had
been eruptions, with ejections of stones and cinders. The army of
Keoua set out on their way in three different companies. The company
in advance had not proceeded far before the ground began to shake and
rock beneath their feet, and it became quite impossible to stand.
Soon a dense cloud of darkness was seen to rise out of the crater,
and, almost at the same instant, the thunder began to roar in the
heavens and the lightning to flash. It continued to ascend and spread
around until the whole region was enveloped, and the light of day
was entirely excluded. The darkness was the more terrific, being
made visible by an awful glare from streams of red and blue light,
variously combined through the action of the fires of the pit and the
flashes of lightning above. Soon followed an immense volume of sand
and cinders, which were thrown to a great height, and came down in a
destructive shower for many miles around. A few of the forward company
were burned to death by the sand, and all of them experienced a
suffocating sensation. The rear company, which was nearest the volcano
at the time, suffered little injury, and after the earthquake and
shower of sand had passed over, hastened on to greet their comrades
ahead on their escape from so imminent a peril. But what was their
surprise and consternation to find the centre company a collection
of corpses! Some were lying down, and others were sitting upright,
clasping with dying grasp their wives and children, and joining noses
(the mode of expressing affection) as in the act of taking leave. So
much like life they looked that at first they supposed them merely
at rest, and it was not until they had come up to them and handled
them that they could detect their mistake." Mr. Dibble adds: "A blast
of sulphurous gas, a shower of heated embers, or a volume of heated
steam would sufficiently account for this sudden death. Some of the
narrators who saw the corpses, affirm that though in no place deeply
burnt, yet they were thoroughly scorched." As you will see in Chapter
XI, this sudden and awful death due to highly heated air and dust
particles, caused even a greater loss of life in the catastrophic
eruption of Pelée, in Martinique on May 8, 1902.

By reason of its situation at a lower level on the slopes of Mt. Loa,
Kilauea was at one time thought to be one of the craters lower down
on the slopes of Loa. This was the opinion of Professor Dana when he
examined the district in 1840. Since this time the region has been
more carefully studied, and Mt. Loa and Kilauea, are now generally
regarded as separate and independent volcanoes, neither of which acts
as a safety valve for the other.

We shall not attempt in this chapter to say anything concerning the
sources or places from where these great supplies of lava have been
drawn. This will be left to some subsequent chapter, after we have
described still other volcanoes.

The outlines of mountains like Mt. Loa or Kilauea differ greatly from
mountains like Vesuvius; their slopes, like the slopes of all other
Hawaii volcanoes, have an inclination which does not exceed 10°.
The lava streams, therefore, as they flow down the mountains, move
more slowly than they would were the slopes more precipitous, as in
mountains like Vesuvius.

There have been many eruptions of Kilauea. That which occurred in the
year 1840, was of great magnitude (see map, Fig. 6), and began in a
fissure southwest of the crater. The principal eruption, however,
broke out about twelve miles from the sea coast, and about twenty-five
miles east of Kilauea. Here an enormous mass of lava forming a stream
nearly three miles wide reached the ocean at Nanawale.

When an eruption takes place on Mt. Loa through a fissure at the
height of 10,000 to 13,000 feet the length of the lava streams is
frequently as great as twenty-five to thirty miles. Often the lava
though hardening at the surface will continue to flow underneath
through huge tunnels, of which the top and sides are composed of
solidified parts of the same lava stream. After the flow has ceased
long hollow tunnels often remain. If the lower end of such a tunnel
containing molten lava is momentarily closed, the pressure of the
lava above may not only burst through the obstruction, but may even
throw the lava upwards in jets 300 to 700 feet high. Probably most of
you have seen illumined fountains where jets of water are beautifully
lighted up by different colored electric lights placed below them.
Such fountains, however, can but poorly compare either in beauty or
grandeur with these wonderful lava fountains, common on the slopes of
Mt. Loa during an eruption.




CHAPTER IV

THE VOLCANIC ISLAND OF ICELAND


The island of Iceland consists of a number of volcanic mountains some
of which are still active. As can be seen from the map, shown in
Fig. 11, Iceland lies in the North Atlantic Ocean, immediately below
the Arctic Circle, about 250 miles east of Greenland, and 600 miles
west of Norway. Its length from east to west is about 300 miles, and
its breadth about 200 miles, its total area, including the adjacent
islands, being more than 40,000 square miles.

Were all the water removed from the North Atlantic Ocean, it would be
seen that Iceland rests on the bed of the Atlantic, on a submarine
plateau or highland; for, in this part of the ocean the water is only
from 1,500 to 3,000 feet deep. This submarine plateau extends as far
as Norway on the east, Greenland on the north, and the island of Jan
Mayen on the northeast. Immediately north of the plateau the ocean
suddenly drops to a depth of 12,000 to 15,000 feet.

[Illustration: FIG. 11. ICELAND]

Toward the south the plateau extends with but few interruptions
through the middle of the ocean to a shoal known as the _Dolphin
Shoal_, as far as lat. 25° N. This part of the ocean, which can only
relatively be called a shoal, is not generally deeper than 9,600 feet,
although in some places the water is more than 12,000 feet deep. On
each side of the Dolphin Shoal the water is much deeper, being in
places 15,000 feet on the east, while on the west there are depths
as great as from 17,000 to 21,000 feet.

This sunken plateau, possibly including the shallower plateau on the
north, is believed by some to be the remains of the fabled continent
of _Atlantis_, to which we shall refer in another part of this book.

The coast line of Iceland is unbroken on the southeast, but the
remainder of the coast is deeply indented with bays or fiords in which
are many excellent harbors.

Iceland is liable to frequent earthquake shocks and volcanic
eruptions. From careful records that have been preserved in the
history of the island, we learn that since the beginning of the
twelfth century there have practically never been intervals longer
than forty years, and more generally not longer than twenty years,
in which there has not been a great earthquake or a great volcanic
eruption. These volcanic eruptions are often very protracted. For
example, one eruption of the volcano Hecla continued for six years
without ceasing. Sir Charles Lyell, the great English geologist,
writes as follows about Iceland:

      "Earthquakes have often shaken the whole island at once,
      causing great changes in the interior, such as the sinking
      down of hills, the rending of mountains, the desertion of
      rivers by their channels, and the appearance of new lakes.
      New islands have often been thrown up near the coast, some
      of which still exist, while others have disappeared, either
      by subsidences or the action of the waves.

      "In the interval between eruptions innumerable hot springs
      afford vent to the subterranean heat, and solfataras
      discharge copious streams of inflammable matter. The
      volcanoes in different parts of the island are observed,
      like those of the Phlegræan Fields, Italy, to be in
      activity by turns, one vent often serving for a time as a
      safety valve for the rest. Many cones are often thrown
      up in one eruption and in this case they take a linear
      direction, running generally from southeast to northwest."

The volcanic eruptions of Iceland belong for the greater part to the
fissure type. During a volcanic eruption in Iceland the ground is
split in fissures or cracks, generally parallel to each other, and
varying in width from a few inches to several yards. These fissures
extend for great distances across the country. The lava quietly wells
out along the fissures not unlike the way quiet spring waters flow
from their reservoirs.

According to Dr. Th. Thoroddsen, the Icelandic geologist, there are
two systems of fissures extending through Iceland, from southwest to
northeast in the southern part of the island, and from north to south
in the northern part. Where two lines of fissures cross each other the
points of intersection may be especially active.

Dr. Th. Thoroddsen arranges the volcanoes of Iceland under three
heads, i. e., _cone-shaped volcanoes_; _lava cones_; and _chains of
craters_, the last being the commonest. Out of 107 volcanoes examined
by him in Iceland, eight were of the Vesuvian type, or were built up
of layers of lava and volcanic ashes; sixteen were of the lava-cone
type, similar to Mt. Loa, of the Hawaiian Islands, and the remaining
eighty-three were of the type of crater chains.

The volcano of Snaefell Jökul, 4,710 feet above the level of the
ocean, is built up of alternate layers of lava and hardened volcanic
mud. It is not, however, a true cone-shaped mountain.

The largest volcano in Iceland, the Dyngjufköll, with its immense
crater of Askja, has an area of some twenty-five square miles. In its
form it resembles Snaefell.

Volcanoes of the lava-cone type have been built up entirely of lava
and have a slight angle of inclination. These volcanoes range in size
from small hillocks to the largest mountains on the island. Their
cones generally stand on a base of wide circumference and frequently
rise to great heights, the top being occupied by a caldera, or pit
crater like that on Mt. Loa or Kilauea.

Volcanoes of the type of chain-craters follow the natural fissures in
the crust. These craters are generally low, seldom being more than 350
feet high.

There are also seen in Iceland caldron-shaped depressions that have
been formed by explosive eruptions. One of the best instances of such
craters is Viti, on the side of Mt. Krafla. This crater was formed by
the sudden eruption of May 17th, 1724.

The lava sometimes quietly runs out of the entire length of the
fissure without forming any cone. This was the case of a great fissure
known as the Eldgja Chasm. Here three lava streams covered an area of
270 square miles.

As the lava comes out of the fissures, it generally produces long
ramparts of slags, and blocks of lava that are piled up on either side
of the fissure. Sometimes a line of low cones is built up. These cones
consist of heaps of slag, cinders, and blocks of lava. Their craters
are not rounded as in the case of volcanoes of the Vesuvian type, but
are oblong, or have their greatest diameter extending in a direction
of the fissure.

Icelandic lava as it escapes from the fissures is peculiar in that
it is very viscid or plastic and can be readily drawn out into long
threads that can be spun into ropes. When such lava runs down the
sides of a steep slope, it often splits on cooling into separate
blocks. Where it runs over flat, level ground, however, it spreads
uniformly on all sides, producing vast level lava deserts that are as
flat as the surface of a well built floor.

There are many rivers in the north and the west of Iceland. Now, as
the lava streams flow out of the fissures they enter the channels of
the rivers so that the streams of water must find new paths to the
sea, and this operation may be repeated again and again. Often the
time between eruptions is long enough to give the rivers opportunity
to cut deep channels or gorges in their new channels; but on the next
escape of the lava these gorges and valleys are again filled with the
molten rock, and the rivers must begin their channel cutting all over.

You will note the frequent use of the word Jökul, as Snaefell Jökul,
Skaptar Jökul, Orefa Jökul, etc. The name Jökul means a large mass of
ice, or a mountain that is continually covered with snow, for example,
Snaefell Jökul, is a beautifully shaped, snow-covered mountain
situated on a point of land on the western coast of the island,
extending out nearly fifty miles into the sea, between the Faxa Fiord
and the Briela Fiord. It is a very conspicuous object, being visible
to passing ships at considerable distances from the island. Orefa
Jökul is the highest mountain in Iceland. Skaptar Jökul is one of the
active volcanoes of Iceland.

There can be no doubt that Iceland has been formed entirely by lava
thrown up from the bottom of a submarine plateau, until it extended
above the surface of the waters. To make an island entirely of lava
with an area of 40,000 square miles, must, of course, have required
many cones or craters that continued to pour forth lava for periods of
time much longer than those during which man has lived on the earth.

The surface of Iceland is far from attractive. The interior is
practically a vast lava desert, covered with snow-clad mountains or
Jökuls. There is no plant life except in marshy lands near the coasts,
and even here scarcely enough grass is raised to feed the few cattle
and horses owned by the inhabitants. There is no agriculture, owing
to the very short summers, so that all grain is brought from Europe.
Every now and then the grass crop is destroyed by accumulation of
Polar ice on the northern and western coasts. Such failures are always
attended by great famines, when many of the people die.

Should you ever visit Iceland you would probably be surprised to hear
the people speaking about their forests. You might go over all the
coasts of the island without seeing anything larger than a birch bush,
not much higher than six feet. These are what the Icelanders like to
speak of as their forest trees, and I suppose there is no harm done,
if one only understands just what they mean by "trees."

While, however, Iceland has practically no trees, yet it has no
difficulty in obtaining a plentiful supply of timber, since in the
deep fiords or bays on the western and southern coasts there can
always be found much drift timber brought there by the ocean currents
from the forests of America.

The principal town or settlement in Iceland is Reykjavik, the capital
of the island, on the southwestern coast; this is the chief trading
place on the island. Thingvalla is also an important town.

The lavas that form the entire mass of Iceland were thrown out both
before and since the glacial age. It is the opinion of Geikie that
these outflows have continued uninterruptedly since that age to the
present time. It is known that the lavas of Iceland were thrown out
both before and after the glacial age, because during the glacial age,
deep cuttings or groovings were made on the surface of the earth by
the glaciers as they slowly moved over it. Now lava beds containing
the glacial scratches have been found and resting on them are other
lava streams. The scratched lavas must, therefore, have been thrown
out before the glacial age, and the second lavas after that age.

Let us now examine some of the more active volcanoes of Iceland and
their eruptions. We will begin with the well-known volcano of Skaptar
Jökul.

The following description of this volcano has been taken from a book
on Iceland by E. Henderson, published in Boston, 1831. Skaptar Jökul
lies in the south central part of Iceland about forty odd miles from
the coast. It takes its name from the Skaptar River, down whose
channel the lava flowed its entire distance of forty miles from the
ocean. Skaptar Jökul consists of about twenty conical hills lying
along one of the fissures that extends from northeast to southwest.

It appears from Henderson's account that people living in the
neighborhood of Skaptar Jökul were greatly alarmed by repeated
earthquakes that were felt at different times from the first to the
eighth of June, 1783. These earthquake shocks increased in number and
violence, so that the people left their homes and awaited in terror
the coming catastrophe. On the morning of the eighth a prodigious
cloud of dense smoke darkened the air, and the surrounding land soon
became covered with ashes, pumice, and brimstone. As is common with
eruptions in Iceland, that have been preceded by long periods of rest,
the heat produced by the escaping lava and the sulphurous gases,
melted such quantities of ice that great floods were produced in the
rivers.

On the 10th of June vast torrents of lava that had been escaping
from the craters entered the valley of the Skaptar River, and
commenced flowing through its channel. Immense quantities of steam
were produced, and, in less than twenty-four hours, the river was
completely dried up, for the lava had collected in the channel,
which in many places flows between high rocks from 400 to 600 feet
in height and nearly 200 feet in breadth, and had not only filled
the river to its brink, but had overflowed the adjacent fields to a
considerable extent, and flowing along the cultivated banks of the
river destroyed all the farms in its path.

On gaining the outlet, where the channel of the Skaptar emerged
into the plain, it might have been supposed that the burning flood
would have at once spread over the low fields, which lay immediately
before it, but, contrary to all expectations, this flow was for a
time stopped by an immense unfathomed abyss in the river's bed, into
which it emptied itself with great noise. When this chasm was at
last filled, the lava increased by fresh flows, rose to a prodigious
height, and breaking over the cooled mass, proceeded south towards the
plain.

In the meantime the thunder and lightning, together with subterranean
roars, continued with little or no intermission.

On the 18th of June, 1783, another dreadful eruption of red hot lava
came from the volcano. This flowed with great velocity and force over
the surface of the cooling stream that had been thrown out principally
on the tenth of the month. Floating islands consisting of masses of
flaming rock were seen on the surface of the lava stream, and the
water that had been banked up on both sides of the stream was thrown
into violent boiling.

In the meantime people living along the Hverfisfloit, the next largest
river to the east of the Skaptar, had not yet been visited by the
lava streams. It is true that their vegetation had been destroyed by
showers of red hot stone and ashes, and that both atmosphere and water
were filled with poisonous substances. The land had also been plunged
in utter darkness, so that it was scarcely possible at noonday to
distinguish a sheet of white paper held up at the window from the
blackness of the wall on either side. But the molten lava streams had
not yet reached the people of this valley and they hoped that the
eruption would soon be over, and that the lava flow would continue to
follow the Skaptar. On the 3d of August, however, they were alarmed by
seeing steam escaping from the River Hverfisfloit, and soon all its
water was dried up, and a fresh lava flow poured down upon them. As in
the case of the Skaptar, the melted rock completely filled the empty
channel to the brink, and then overflowing, covered the low grounds on
both sides, so that by the ninth of August it had reached the open and
level country near its mouth and in the course of a few hours spread
itself for a distance of nearly six miles across the plain. This flow
continued after the end of August, and, indeed, even as late as the
month of February, 1784, when a new eruption took place in this part
of the country.

Hecla, another well-known volcano in Iceland, situated about thirty
miles from the southern coast, consists of three peaks, the central of
which is the highest. Its craters form vast hollows on the sides of
these peaks, and at the time of the eruption in 1766 were covered with
snow. Hecla is believed to have been an active volcano long before
Iceland was inhabited. No less than twenty-three eruptions have been
recorded between A. D. 1004 and the great eruption of 1766-68.

Volcanic history frequently repeats itself. There had been no great
eruption of Hecla for a period of about twelve years, and the people
living in the neighborhood were congratulating themselves on the
belief that the mountain was becoming actually extinct, and that
therefore they need not trouble themselves about eruptions. Others,
however, more farseeing, pointed out the fact that the lakes and
rivers in the vicinity did not freeze, and that the amount of water
they contained was greatly decreased.

The following description of the great eruption of Hecla that was
remarkable both for its violence, as well as for the time during which
it continued, is taken from Symington's "Sketches of Faroe Islands and
Iceland":

      "On the 4th of April, 1766, there were some slight shocks
      of an earthquake, and early next morning a pillar of sand,
      mingled with fire and red hot stones, burst with a loud
      thundering noise from its summit. Masses of pumice, six
      feet in circumference, were thrown to the distance of ten
      or fifteen miles, together with heavy magnetic stones,
      one of which, eight pounds weight, fell fourteen miles
      off, and sank into ground still hardened by the frost. The
      sand was carried towards the northwest, covering the land,
      150 miles round, four inches deep, impeding the fishing
      boats along the coast, and darkening the air, so that at
      Thingore, 140 miles distant, it was impossible to know
      whether a sheet of paper was white or black. At Holum, 155
      miles to the north, some persons thought they saw the stars
      shining through the sand-cloud. About mid-day, the wind
      veering round to the southeast, conveyed the dust into the
      central desert, and prevented it from totally destroying
      the pastures. On the 9th of April, the lava first appeared,
      spreading about five miles towards the southwest, and on
      the 23d of May, a column of water was seen shooting up in
      the midst of the sand. The last violent eruption was on the
      5th of July, the mountains, in the interval, often ceasing
      to eject any matter; and the large stones thrown into the
      air were compared to a swarm of bees clustering around the
      mountain-top; the noise was heard like loud thunder forty
      miles distant, and the accompanying earthquakes were more
      severe at Krisuvik, eighty miles westward, than at half the
      distance on the opposite side. The eruptions are said to
      be in general more violent during a north or west wind than
      when it blows from the south or east, and on this occasion
      more matter was thrown out in mild than in stormy weather.
      Where the ashes were not too thick, it was observed that
      they increased the fertility of the grass fields, and
      some of them were carried even to the Orkney Islands, the
      inhabitants of which were at first terrified by what they
      considered showers of black snow."

The largest volcano in Iceland is Dyngjufjoll. This has on its summit
the gigantic crater of Askja, some twenty-five square miles in area.
This crater is of the intermediate form; the most general form of
volcanoes on the island consisting of a number of craters that closely
follow fissures.

Professor Johnstrup, in a report to the Danish Government, on this
volcano, states that the valley of Askja has been gradually filled
by repeated flows of lava from enormous craters on the edge of the
mountain. In many places the surface of the earth is covered with
bright red pumice stone that was thrown out during an eruption March
29th, 1875. Some of these craters are filled with steam that escapes
with an almost deafening roar. The surprising feature of this eruption
was the immense quantity of pumice stone that escaped.

The volcanoes in the Nyvatus Oraefi are entirely different. This
barren plain is thirty-five miles in length and thirteen miles in
breadth. Suddenly on the 18th of February, 1875, a volcano appeared in
the centre, and four other craters were formed at subsequent dates.
The mass of lava that was thrown out of these openings has been
estimated at 10,000,000,000,000 cubic feet, or eighteen times the
estimated mass of lava that has been emitted from Vesuvius between
1794 and 1855. This lava is basalt.




CHAPTER V

VESUVIUS


The old Greeks and Romans had but little knowledge of volcanoes. They
only knew the volcanic mountains in the Mediterranean Sea. Here there
are three volcanic regions:--one in the neighborhood of Naples; one
including Sicily and the neighboring islands, and the other that of
the Grecian Archipelago.

Some idea can be had of these three regions from a map of the
Mediterranean shown in Fig. 12. The principal volcanoes are Vesuvius,
Etna, Stromboli, and Vulcano, a mountain, by the way, that gave its
name to all volcanic mountains. In this chapter we will describe the
volcano of Vesuvius, the most active, though by no means the largest
of the volcanoes of the Mediterranean.

But, before doing this, it will be well first to describe briefly the
volcanic districts surrounding Vesuvius.

As shown in Fig. 13, this district includes Vesuvius, Procida, and
Ischia.

[Illustration: FIG. 12. THE MEDITERRANEAN]

Ischia is a small island measuring about five miles from east to west,
and three miles from north to south. There were such terrific volcanic
eruptions on this island long before the Christian Era, that several
Greek colonies were forced to abandon it. A colony established long
afterwards, about 380 B. C., by the king of Syracuse also
had to depart. Strabo, the Grecian geographer (born about 63 B.
C.), states that, according to tradition, terrific earthquakes
occurred on the island a little before his time, and its principal
mountain threw out large quantities of molten rock, which flowed into
the sea. At the time of this eruption there were earthquake waves in
the sea, the waters of which slowly receded, leaving large portions
of the bottom uncovered, and rushing, afterwards, violently over
the land, caused great destruction. It was during this disturbance,
so Strabo asserts, that the island of Procida was formed by being
violently torn from Ischia.

[Illustration: FIG. 13. THE VOLCANIC DISTRICT AROUND VESUVIUS]

The Phlegræan Fields was a name given by the ancients to some of the
lowlands in the neighborhood of Naples; they were believed to be under
the special protection of the Roman gods. When the frequent earthquake
shocks shook these fields, the Roman people believed that conflicts
were taking place between their gods and slumbering giants confined in
the regions below the surface.

It is more than probable that Mt. Vesuvius has always been the centre
of these volcanic disturbances. Long before the Christian Era,
however, Vesuvius, or Somma, the name given to the old crater that
then occupied the summit of the mountain, had been an extinct crater.
Indeed, it had been so quiet that the people who lived on its slopes
did not appear to know they were living on the slopes of a slumbering
volcano. Their knowledge of volcanic mountains must have been very
limited, for this mountain with the huge pit at its summit had all
the appearance of a volcanic crater. When they climbed to the top of
the mountain, which, of course, they frequently did to look after the
vineyards they were cultivating on the slopes, and looked down into
the deep pit from the rocks on its edge, they could see at the bottom
of a great central pit three miles in diameter, a lake, with room here
and there to enable one to walk along its borders. The walls of the
precipice were covered with luxuriant vines.

When we say that none of the people even suspected that Vesuvius had
ever been in a state of eruption, we must except some of their learned
men. For both Diodorus Siculus, a native of Sicily, who lived about
10 B. C., and wrote an Universal History, containing some
forty volumes, of which only about one-third remain, and Strabo, the
Geographer, pointed out in a general manner, that Vesuvius, and much
of the surrounding country, looked as if it had been eaten by fire.
Then, too, a Roman philosopher who lived between A. D. 1 and
A. D. 64, spoke of Vesuvius being "a channel for the eternal
fire!"

Let us now endeavor to obtain some idea of the appearance of this
region a short time before A. D. 79, when Vesuvius burst
forth in a terrific eruption. The slopes of the mountain were covered
with the rich vegetation that characterizes this part of Italy.
When most volcanic ashes and lava have been exposed for some time to
the atmosphere they make a very fertile soil. Now, this soil on the
slopes of Vesuvius made the vineyards that covered the mountain slopes
and the fields for miles around its base, bear very plentifully,
so that the people lived very comfortably. Here and there on the
slopes of the mountain large towns like Herculaneum and Pompeii had
long been established, while, in the distance, was the large city of
Naples. Besides these there were numerous populous towns and villages
scattered here and there over the plain or on the lower mountain slope.

You have all probably read of the Roman gladiator, Spartacus.
Spartacus was a Thracian by birth, and while a shepherd had been taken
prisoner by the Romans and sold to a trainer of gladiators at Capua.
Chaffing under the tyranny of the Romans, who forced him to fight in
the arena with men and beasts, he revolted against his masters, and
with a band of some seventy followers, fled to a mountain fastness in
the crater of Vesuvius. Proud Rome sent a few men to recapture him,
with scourges for his punishment, but they were beaten by Spartacus.
Every day dissatisfied men like himself escaped from the Romans and
joined his ranks. Rome sent a larger body of men against Spartacus,
but they also were beaten. At last, recognizing the gravity of the
position, the Roman Prætor, Clodius, was sent against Spartacus with
an army of some three thousand men. Clodius caught Spartacus in the
crater and guarded the only space by which it seemed possible for
Spartacus to escape. Using the vines that covered the precipitous
walls of the crater, Spartacus did escape, and falling unexpectedly
on the armies of Clodius, routed them. After this victory, Spartacus
with an army of over 100,000 men overran southern Italy, and sacked
many of the cities of the Roman Campania. During this time Spartacus
defeated one Roman army after another, until finally, in the year 71
B. C., Crassus was sent against him and vainly endeavored
to conquer him. Being unsuccessful, Crassus urged the Roman Senate
to recall Lucullis from Asia and Pompey from Spain, and finally poor
Spartacus was cut down in a fight he made against Crassus and Lucullis.

But let us come to the great eruption of Vesuvius in A. D.
79. The people living on the slopes of Vesuvius were not without
plenty of warnings of the dreadful catastrophe that was coming. As
early as A. D. 63 there was a great earthquake that shook the
country far beyond Naples. In Pompeii, then a flourishing city, the
Temple of Isis was so much damaged that it had to be rebuilt.

Even if the earthquake shocks had not foretold the coming eruption,
there were other signs. The height of water in the wells decreased.
Springs that had never before been known to fail, dried up completely.
These changes, as we well know, were due to the red hot lava being
slowly forced up from great depths into the tube connected with the
crater.

The earthquake shocks continued at irregular intervals for sixteen
years, until, on the 25th of August, A. D. 79, about one
o'clock in the afternoon, Vesuvius burst forth in the terrible
eruption that destroyed the towns of Pompeii and Herculaneum. Pompeii
was a seaport town situated near the mouth of the River Sarno,
about fifteen miles southeast of Naples. It was a beautiful place,
containing many splendid temples. Its people for the greater part
lived luxuriously, for Pompeii was the summer resort of the richer
people of Naples, some of whom lived there during the hottest months
of the year.

Herculaneum, the other town, was nearer Naples, only five miles from
the city. It was also, like Pompeii, a beautiful town, and contained
many splendid buildings. In each town there were magnificent baths and
a large theatre. The inhabitants spent so much of their time in the
open air, or in the baths, that it was not necessary for them to build
very large houses. The houses, however, were well built, and though
generally consisting of practically a single story, were provided with
all the luxuries that great wealth could command.

On August 25th, A. D. 79, severe earthquake shocks again
visited this part of the world and Vesuvius suddenly threw up from
its crater an immense column of black smoke, which, rising high in
the air, spread out in the form of a huge mushroom, or, perhaps, more
like the umbrella pine tree of the neighborhood. Rapidly spreading on
all sides, the smoke soon completely shut out the light of the sun,
and wrapped the earth in an inky darkness, except for a red glare from
columns of molten rock that rushed out of the crater.

From the dark cloud immense quantities of red hot stones, pumice, and
volcanic ashes descended on the earth. At the same time there fell
a deluge of rain, caused by the sudden condensation of the enormous
amount of water vapor that was thrown out from the crater during the
eruption. Fortunately, very few of the people were killed in either of
the cities of Pompeii and Herculaneum, although some bodies were found
in the ruins. Most of the people escaped through the darkness and
gloom, continuing to flee from the city for at least three days.

Both cities were covered so deep with ashes or mud that the tops of
the tallest buildings were no longer visible. Pompeii was buried by
showers of ashes or volcanic cinders, and Herculaneum mainly by vast
floods of aqueous lava.

So completely were these cities covered that their very existence was
at last forgotten. It is true that Titus, who was then Emperor of
Rome, endeavored to clear away the ashes and rebuild Pompeii, but the
task was so great that he finally abandoned it.

During the year 1592, the architect Fontana, while superintending the
building of an aqueduct, came across some ancient buildings. At a much
later date, in 1713, some workmen, while digging a well in the village
of Portici, uncovered three marvellously beautiful marble statues. In
the year 1738, the same well was dug deeper, when traces of the old
theatre of Herculaneum were discovered. Some effort was then made to
excavate the city and many of the public buildings and private houses
were uncovered, and statues, mosaics, wall paintings, and charred
manuscripts of papyrus were found. A few of these have been unrolled
and deciphered, but owing to the difficulty of doing this, without
destroying them, the greatest number still remain unread.

In 1860, the Italian Government began a systematic excavation of the
buried cities, and now both Pompeii and Herculaneum are thrown open to
the sunlight so that one can walk through the old streets, and look
into the houses, in which, before A. D. 79, the people lived
so happily.

Many interesting stories are told about the discoveries that were
made during the government excavations. The skeleton of one of the
inhabitants was found grasping a money bag. He might have escaped,
but had gone back to get his money. He got it, but remained with it.
In another place, the skeletons of a number of people were found in
an underground room or cellar of a house, where were also found some
mouldy bread and empty water flasks. Instead of leaving the city,
which they might have done, they had retreated to the underground
room for safety, but the fine volcanic dust drifted in and suffocated
them.

The younger Pliny, the historian, has given an excellent account of
some features of this great eruption. It appears that his uncle was
stationed with the Roman fleet, in the Bay of Naples, at the time of
the eruption. He describes the dark cloud of ashes that was formed
over Vesuvius. He refers to the rapidity with which it spread, and
to the showers of ashes, cinders, and stones that it rained down on
the earth. His uncle, the elder Pliny, landed on the coast, and was
afterwards killed by a cloud of sulphurous vapor that swept down the
side of the mountain.

The following letter from the younger Pliny, describing his flight
with his mother from Misenum, is quoted from Dana's "Characteristics
of Volcanoes."

      "It was now seven o'clock [on the morning of August 25th],
      but the light was still faint and doubtful. The surrounding
      buildings had been badly shaken, and although we were in
      an open spot [a little yard between his uncle's house and
      the sea], the space was so small that the danger of a
      catastrophe from falling walls was great and certain. Not
      till then did we make up our minds to go from the town....
      When we were free from the buildings we stopped. There we
      saw many wonders and endured many terrors. The vehicles we
      had ordered to be brought out kept running backward and
      forward, though on level ground; and even when blocked
      with stones they would not keep still. Besides this, we
      saw the sea sucked down and, as it were, driven back by
      the earthquake. There can be no doubt that the shore had
      advanced on the sea, and many marine animals were left high
      and dry. On the other side was a dark and dreadful cloud,
      which was broken by zigzag and rapidly vibrating flashes of
      fire, and yawning showed long shapes of flame. These were
      like lightning, only of greater extent....

      "Pretty soon the cloud began to descend over the earth
      and cover the sea. It enfolded Capreæ and hid also the
      promontory of Misenum." ... The flight was continued.
      "Ashes now fell, yet still in small amount. I looked
      back. A thick mist was close at our heels, which followed
      us, spreading out over the country, like an inundation."
      ... Turning from the roar in order to avoid the fleeing,
      terror-stricken throng, they rested. "Hardly had we sat
      down when night was over us--not such a night as when there
      is no moon and clouds cover the sky, but such darkness as
      one finds in close-shut rooms. One heard the screams of
      women, the fretting cries of babes, and shouts of men....

      "Little by little it grew light again. We did not think
      it the light of day, but a proof that the fire was coming
      nearer. It was indeed fire, but it stopped afar off; and
      then there was darkness again, and again a rain of ashes,
      abundant and heavy, and again we rose and shook them off,
      else we had been covered and even crushed by the weight....
      At last the murky vapor rolled away, in disappearing smoke
      or fog. Soon the real daylight appeared; the sun shone out,
      of a lurid hue, to be sure, as in an eclipse. The whole
      world which met our frightened eyes was transformed. It was
      covered with ashes white as snow."

Young Pliny and his mother returned to Misenum, and survived the
perils to which they were exposed.

It was during this eruption that a large part of the old crater was
blown off the mountain by the tremendous force at work.

There have been many eruptions of Vesuvius since the great eruption
of A. D. 79. One of these occurred during the reign of Severus,
A. D. 203. It was during this eruption that an additional part of the
old crater of Somma was blown away.

Another great eruption occurred A. D. 472. Then great
quantities of volcanic dust were thrown up into the air, and falling,
covered practically all parts of Europe, producing darkening of the
sun and great fear as far as the city of Constantinople.

But what was perhaps a still greater eruption occurred during December
of 1631. This eruption spread great quantities of ashes over the
country for hundreds of miles around, and great streams of mud rushed
down the slopes of the mountain. Buccini gives the following account
of this eruption:

      "The crater was five miles in circumference, and about
      1,000 paces deep. Its sides were covered with brushwood,
      and at the bottom there was a plain on which cattle grazed.
      In the woody parts wild boars frequently harbored. In one
      part of the plain, covered with ashes, were three small
      pools, one filled with hot but bitter water; another with
      water saltier than the sea, and a third with water that
      was hot but tasteless. But at length these forests and
      grassy plains were consumed, being suddenly blown into the
      air and their ashes scattered to the winds. In December,
      1631, seven streams of lava poured at once from the crater
      and overflowed several villages, on its flanks, and at the
      foot of the mountain. Reisna, partly built over the ancient
      city of Herculaneum, was consumed by the fiery torrent.
      Great floods of mud were as destructive as lava. This is
      no unusual occurrence during these catastrophes for such
      is the violence of the rains produced by the evolution of
      aqueous vapors that torrents of water descend the cone and
      become charged with impalpable volcanic dust, and rolling
      among ashes, acquire sufficient consistency to deserve the
      ordinary appellation of aqueous lava."

Of course, you will understand that we have given only a few of
the most notable of the eruptions of Mt. Vesuvius. Since the yea
A. D. 1500 there have been no less than fifty-six recorded
eruptions, that of the year 1857 being especially violent.

Omitting these eruptions we at last come to the great recent eruption
of 1872.

Fortunately, the eruption of 1872, as well as still more recent
eruptions that have occurred, have been more accurately described than
have most volcanic eruptions, for the Italian Government, recognizing
the value to the natives of Italy of a knowledge of what was going on
at the crater of Vesuvius, has maintained for the past thirty years
an observatory on the western part of the mountain. This observatory
has been placed in charge of Prof. Luigi Palmieri, a well-known
student of volcanoes and earthquakes. At this place records are kept
of the behavior of the volcano, of all earthquake disturbances, as
well as other phenomena. At the same time, by the use of photography,
excellent pictures have been obtained showing the appearance of the
sky during an eruption.

Vesuvius had been in a quiet state from November, 1848, to the year
1871, when small quantities of lava flowed continuously for several
months. Again, early in 1872, other quiet eruptions of lava continued
for weeks at a time. Finally, on April 26th, of that year, a violent
explosive eruption occurred. The following account has been taken from
Palmieri's report, entitled, "The Eruption of Vesuvius in 1872."

On April 23d the recording earthquake instruments, the seismographs,
were greatly affected. On the evening of the 24th lava streams flowed
down the cone in various directions. These streams were continued
on the 25th and the 26th, so that on the night of the 26th the
observatory lay between two streams of molten lava that threw out so
much heat that the glass windows in the observatory were cracked,
and a scorching smell was quite perceptible in the rooms. The cone
of the mountain was deeply fissured, lava escaping freely from all
the fissures, so that the molten rock appeared to ooze from over its
entire surface, or as Palmieri expressed it, "Vesuvius sweated fire."

This great cracking or fissuring of the cone was accompanied by the
opening of two large craters at the summit, that discharged, with a
great noise, immense clouds of steam, dust, lapilli, and volcanic
bombs. These latter are very curious and consist of masses of soft
lava that are thrown high into the air by the outrushing columns of
steam. Being rotated or spun, as they rise in the air, they assume a
spherical shape. Some of these volcanic bombs were thrown to a height
estimated by Palmieri to have been nearly 4,000 feet above the top of
the mountain. When the height of a projectile is known, the velocity
with which it left the opening from which it was projected or thrown
can be estimated, so that the volcanic bombs must have left the crater
at a velocity of about 600 feet per second.

On the 27th, in the evening, the lava streams ceased flowing, but the
dust and lapilli continued to fall during the 28th and the 29th. On
the 30th the detonations decreased and by the 1st of May the eruption
was entirely over.

Palmieri calculated that the quantity of molten rock thrown out during
this eruption was sufficient to cover an area of about 1.8 square
miles to an average depth of about thirteen feet.

As we can see from the above descriptions, the volcanic activity of
Vesuvius is characterized by long periods of rest followed by periods
of activity. The periods of rest are measured by years, and often by
centuries; the periods of activity by days or hours.

But Vesuvius was not to have a long period of rest after its eruption
of 1872. On the contrary, shortly after the great disaster of
Martinique in 1906, it again became active, and on the 5th of April,
1906, began throwing large blocks of lava out of its central cone, and
on the next day began to throw out large streams of lava, which, on
April 7th, destroyed a village in the neighborhood. At the same time
rumbling sounds were heard, and violent earthquake shocks shattered
the windows of the houses.

Professor Matteucci, the present director of the Vesuvius Observatory,
made the following report on April the 8th.

      "The eruption of Vesuvius has assumed extraordinary
      proportions. Yesterday and last night the activity of the
      crater was terrific, and is increasing. The neighborhood
      of the observatory is completely covered with lava.
      Incandescent rocks are being thrown up by the thousands, to
      a height of 2,400 feet or even 3,000 feet, and falling back
      form a large cone. Another stream of lava has appeared....
      The noise of the explosion and of the rocks striking
      together is deafening. The ground is shaken by strong and
      continuous seismic movements, and the seismic instruments
      [instruments employed to record the time, direction, and
      intensity of earthquake movements] threaten to break. It
      will probably be necessary to abandon the observatory,
      which is very much exposed to the shocks. The telegraph is
      interrupted, and it is believed the Funicular railroad has
      been destroyed."

On April 9th Matteucci made the following report:

      "The explosive activity of Vesuvius, which was so great
      yesterday, and was accompanied by very powerful electric
      discharges, diminished yesterday afternoon. During the
      night the expulsion of rocks ceased, but the emission of
      sand increased, completely enveloping me and forming a
      red mass from six to ten centimeters deep, which carried
      desolation into these elevated regions. Masses of sand
      gliding along the earth, created complete darkness until
      seven o'clock. Several blocks of stone broke windows in the
      observatory. Last night the earthquake shocks were stronger
      and more frequent than yesterday, and displaced the seismic
      apparatus. Yesterday afternoon and this morning, torrents
      of sand fell."

On April 10th Matteucci sent the following report:

      "Last night was calm, except for a few explosions of
      considerable force from time to time. At four o'clock this
      morning the explosions became more violent. The seismic
      instruments recorded strong disturbances."

The eruption of Vesuvius of 1906 was especially noted for the great
quantities of sand and ashes thrown out of the crater. The amount
of sand that fell on the roof of the market house at Monti Olivetto
was so great that the roof fell in. In this eruption there were some
six lava streams that poured down the mountain. The most formidable
of these was that which descended towards Torre Annunziata. Here it
stopped just short of the wall of the cemetery outside of the town.

During this eruption of Vesuvius, as in previous eruptions, clouds of
volcanic dust collected in the air, shutting off the light of the sun.
Naples was in a state of semi-darkness. The roofs of the houses were
covered to a depth of several inches with an exceedingly fine reddish
dust. In some places this dust had drifted into heaps fully a yard in
depth.




CHAPTER VI

OTHER VOLCANOES OF THE MEDITERRANEAN


The relative positions of the other volcanic mountains of the
Mediterranean Sea; i. e., Etna, Stromboli, and the volcanoes of the
Santorin group of the Grecian Archipelago, are shown in the map, Fig.
12.

We will begin with the volcanic mountain of Etna, under which,
according to mythology, the angry gods had buried the rebellious
Typhoon.

Etna is situated on the island of Sicily, immediately southwest of
Italy. It is a much larger mountain than Vesuvius, rising, as it
does, from a circular base about eighty-seven miles around, to a
height of 10,840 feet above the level of the Mediterranean. It forms
a conspicuous object when seen either from the Mediterranean, or from
distant parts of Italy.

The height of Etna is so great that its slopes can be divided into
three distinct climatic zones or belts. The lowest of these lies
between the sea and a height of 2,500 feet. In this zone the mountain
slopes are covered with cultivated fields, olive groves, orchards,
and vineyards. The middle zone lies between 2,500 feet and 6,270
feet. This zone is covered with forests of chestnuts, oaks, beeches,
and cork trees. The third and highest zone includes the rest of the
mountain, and may be called the desert zone, since it is a sterile
region, covered with huge blocks of lava and scoriæ, and terminating,
in the higher portions, in a snow-covered plain, from which the
central cone rises.

Etna is continually sending up columns of steam and sulphur vapor.
Every now and then it starts in eruption, throwing out large
quantities of lava either from the crater on its summit, or from
some of the 200 smaller cones or craters that occupy portions of its
slopes. On account, probably, of its height the eruptions are most
frequently on the sides. Etna affords a magnificent example of a huge
volcanic pile of the Vesuvian type, which has been slowly built up
by the gradual accumulation of materials that have escaped from its
craters.

One of the most interesting features of the higher regions of Etna is
an immense chasm rent in a side of the cone near the summit, and known
as the Val del Bove. This chasm forms a vast amphitheater.

The great force that removed such an immense mass of matter from
the cone could not have been the eroding power of water, since the
materials of the cone are too porous to permit streams of any size to
rush down the slopes. The force is most probably to be found in some
explosive eruption of the mountain, when a portion of the crater was
suddenly blown off, just as was done in Vesuvius when a large part of
the old crater of Somma was blown away. What is especially interesting
about the Val del Bove is the opportunity it affords for studying the
interior structure of the mountain, for it practically enables one to
enter to almost the heart of this great volcano.

The Val del Bove has the shape of a great pit five miles in diameter.
It has almost vertical walls, the height of which varies with their
position. Those which reach highest up the mountain vary from 3,000 to
4,000 feet in height.

Like Vesuvius, Etna has been split or fissured into great crevices
that have been filled with lava during the many eruptions of its
central crater. On hardening, these lava streams form what are known
as dikes. As the sides of the mountain are worn away by erosion, the
dikes, being harder than the rest of the cone, project from its sides
like huge walls. An excellent opportunity for seeing them is afforded
in the walls of the Val del Bove.

Sir Charles Lyell, the English geologist, who has carefully studied
Mt. Etna, asserts that this mountain began to be formed during a
geological period known as the Tertiary Age, through a crater that
opened on the floor of the Mediterranean Sea. The material thus
thrown out, collected around the crater and produced a mountainous
pile that gradually emerged above the level of the sea, and on fresh
materials continuing to be thrown out, at length reached its present
height. It would appear that at some former time in its history, there
were two vents near the top of the mountain, the second crater being
formed immediately under the Val del Bove. Soon, however, the second
and lower crater was closed, the upper one alone remaining active.
The mountain, therefore, continued to be slowly raised in the air by
the materials brought out through this opening. Then came the great
explosive eruption during which the side of the mountain was blown off
to form the great chasm of the Val del Bove.

Because of its almost constant activity, Mt. Etna must have been
well known to the ancients, who described some of its most violent
eruptions. The following brief notes concerning these eruptions have
been taken from Lyell.

According to Diodorus Siculus, an eruption that occurred before the
Trojan war, caused the people living in districts near the mountain to
seek new homes. Thucididies, the Greek historian, states that in the
sixth year of the Peloponnesian war, which would be about the spring
of 425 B. C., a lava stream caused great destruction in the
neighborhood of Campania, this being the third eruption that had
occurred in Sicily since it had been settled by the Greeks.

Seneca, during the first century of the Christian Era, calls the
attention of Lucullus to the fact that during his time Mt. Etna had
lost so much of its height that it could no longer be seen by boatmen
from points at which it had before been readily visible.

But passing by these very early eruptions of Etna we come to the great
eruption of 1669. This eruption was preceded by an earthquake that
destroyed many houses in a town situated in the lower part of the
forest zone, about twenty-five miles below the summit of the mountain,
and ten miles from the sea at Catania. During this eruption two deep
fissures were opened near Catania. From these such quantities of sand
and scoriæ were thrown out, that, in the course of three or four
months, a double cone was formed 450 feet high, which is now known as
Monte Rosso. But what was most curious was the sudden opening, with
a loud crash, of a fissure six feet broad reaching down to unknown
depths that extended in a somewhat crooked course to within a mile
of the summit of Etna. This great fissure was twelve miles in length
and emitted a most vivid light. Five other parallel fissures of
considerable length opened, one after another, throwing out vapor,
and emitting bellowing sounds which were heard at a distance of forty
miles. These fissures were afterwards filled with molten rock, and in
this manner were formed the long dikes of porphyry and other rocks
that are seen to be passing through some of the older lavas of Mt.
Etna.

[Illustration: FIG. 14. MT. ETNA _From Map of State and
Government_]

The great lava streams which flowed down the side of the mountain
during this eruption, destroyed fourteen towns and villages, and
at length reached Catania. A great wall had been raised around this
city to prevent the lava from entering it. The molten rock, however,
accumulated, until it rose to the top of the wall, which was sixty
feet high, and then pouring over it in a fiery cascade, overwhelmed
part of the city. It is said that during the first part of its
journey, the lava streams moved over thirteen miles in twenty days,
or at the rate of 162 feet an hour. Beyond this, after the lava had
thickened by cooling, it had a velocity of only twenty-two feet per
hour.

Fig. 14 represents a plan of Mt. Etna reduced from a map by the
Italian Government. During the eruption of 1865, a rent was made in
the mountain extending from Mount Frumento (B in the preceding map)
for one and one-half miles, and six cones from 300 to 350 feet in
height were formed along the fissure.

During the eruption of 1874, great fissures three miles in length were
formed in the mountain.

There exists on the slopes of Mt. Etna vast subterranean grottoes
formed by the sudden conversion into steam of great quantities of
water that were overwhelmed by the molten mass. These immense volumes
of steam produced enormous bubbles in the molten lava. When the lava
hardened irregular grottoes were left. Lyell describes one of these as
follows:

      "Near Nicolosi, not far from Monte Rosso, one of these
      great openings may be seen, called the _Fossa della
      Palomba_, 625 feet in circumference at its mouth and
      seventy-eight deep. After reaching the bottom of this, we
      enter another dark cavity, and then others in succession,
      sometimes descending precipices by means of ladders. At
      length, the vaults terminate in a great gallery ninety feet
      long, and from fifteen to fifty broad, beyond which there
      is still a passage, never yet explored, so that the extent
      of these caverns remains unknown. The walls and roofs of
      these great vaults are composed of rough bristling scoriæ
      of the most fantastic forms."

Besides the eruptions mentioned there have been many others, such as
those of 1811, 1819, and 1852. The last of these was greater than any
eruption except that of 1669. It began in August, 1852, and continued
until May, 1853, and was remarkable for the immense quantity of lava
thrown out.

[Illustration: FIG. 15. STROMBOLI, VIEWED FROM THE NORTHWEST,
APRIL, 1874]

We come now to the volcano of Stromboli. Stromboli, one of the Lipari
islands, is situated about sixteen miles west of the Straits of
Messina. Its general appearance is shown in Fig. 15. The form of the
mountain is that of an irregular four-sided pyramid, which rises about
3,090 feet above the level of the Mediterranean, and stands on the
bottom of the sea in water about 3,000 feet deep.

If you carefully examine the appearance of Stromboli, as shown in the
preceding figure, you will notice that the flat cloud which hangs over
the island is made up of a number of globular masses of vapor, formed
during the peculiar action of the volcano.

When examined by night Stromboli presents a still more curious
appearance. Since the mountain stands alone, its height permits it to
be seen readily at sea for distances of at least a hundred miles. At
night a curious glow of red light may be seen on the lower surfaces of
the cloud. This light is not continuous, but increases in intensity
from a faint glow to a fairly bright red light, then gradually
decreases, and finally dies away completely. After awhile the light
again appears, again gradually decreases, and disappears, and this
continues until the rising sun prevents the red glow from being any
longer visible. Stromboli, therefore, acts not unlike the flashing
lighthouses so common on the sea coasts of all parts of the world.
Indeed, it is actually used by sailors in the Mediterranean for the
purpose of showing them their direction. For this reason Stromboli is
commonly called "The Lighthouse of the Mediterranean."

As Judd remarks, from whom much of the information concerning some of
the volcanic districts of the Mediterranean has been obtained, the
flashing light of Stromboli differs from that of the ordinary flashing
light in two important respects; viz., in the intervals that elapse
between the successive flashes, and in the intensity of the light
emitted. As you know, it is necessary that the different lighthouses
placed near one another on a coast must have their lights of such a
nature that they can be readily distinguished. In order to do this,
the flashing light has been devised. In flashing lighthouses, the
lights only appear at intervals, one lighthouse being distinguished
from another in its neighborhood by the intervals between successive
flashes, or, sometimes, indeed, by the color of some of the flashes.
Now, in the case of Stromboli, the intervals between the successive
glowings of the red lights are very irregular, varying between one and
twenty flashes per second. Moreover, the intensity of the light also
varies greatly from time to time.

You naturally inquire as to the cause of these flashes of light that
are emitted by Stromboli. If, as Judd suggests, you should climb to
the summit of the mountain, during the daytime, and look down the
inside of the crater, you could see its black slag bottom crossed by
many cracks and fissures. From most of the smaller fissures the vapor
of water is quietly escaping. This vapor rises in the air in which it
soon disappears. There are, however, larger cracks on the bottom of
the crater from which, at more or less regular intervals, masses of
steam are emitted with loud snorting puffs not unlike those produced
by a locomotive. From some of the openings molten matter is seen
slowly oozing out, collecting in parts of the crater and moving up and
down in a heaving motion. Every now and then a bubble is formed on
the surface of this liquid. The bubble swells to a gigantic size, and
suddenly bursts. The steam it contained escapes, carrying fragments of
scum which are thrown high into the air. The masses of steam, formed
below the surface of the sticky, boiling, lava, in endeavoring to
escape, force their way through the mass, blow huge bubbles, which,
on bursting, produce the roaring sounds that are heard, and throwing
great columns of vapor in the air, produce the rounded masses of
clouds you can see floating high up in the air over the mountain. At
the same time the scum is partially removed from the red hot surface,
its light illumines the lower surface of the overhanging cloud, which
flings it back again to the earth. With the bursting of each bubble,
and the clearing of the scum from the surface of the red hot mass,
the light begins, increases in intensity, and then as the scum again
begins to collect on the surface, decreases, and finally disappears,
and not until the bursting of the next bubble is it again visible.

But let us make a study of some of the peculiarities of Vulcano,
another of the Lipari islands, which lies north of Sicily.

Vulcano affords a curious example of a volcano that has been harnessed
by man, or made to do work for him. All volcanoes bring from inside
of the earth different kinds of chemical substances, in the form of
vapors, gases, or molten materials. Now, these materials acting on
one another, produce chemical substances some of which, such as sal
ammoniac, sulphur, and boracic acid, possess commercial value. This is
especially true in the case of Vulcano, and since the eruptions are
not generally violent, a chemical works has actually been erected by
a Scotch firm on the side of the mountain, where the materials are
collected from the crevices.

This effort to harness a volcano was for a time so successful that
the same people contemplated the building of great leaden chambers
over the principal fissure at the bottom of the crater, so that the
large volumes of ejected vapors might be condensed and collected. But
Vulcano, like all other volcanoes, could not be relied on continually
to keep the peace. One day it suddenly burst forth more fiercely than
usual, so that the workmen were compelled to abandon the factory and
fly down the mountain for their lives, but not, however, before some
of them were severely injured by the explosions.

Vulcano is an instance of a volcano in an almost exhausted or dormant
condition. It has had, however, many eruptions during the past few
centuries, some of which have been very violent, for example, that of
1783, and that of 1786.

There still remains to be considered the volcanic region of the
Santorin group of the Grecian Archipelago. The island of Santorin
or Thera, is the southernmost of the Cyclades. It is an exceedingly
curious island, being a submerged volcano, with most of the top of the
crater remaining above the waters, so that the entire island has the
shape of an irregular circle or crescent broken at several points.
Its formation is, probably, due to the gradual sinking of a volcanic
mountain until its crater has been almost completely submerged, only
the higher parts of the edges of the crater being left above the
surface of the waters. Suppose, for example, a mountain like Vesuvius
at the time the crater Somma existed, was sunk below the level of the
Mediterranean until only the highest parts of the crater remained
above the waters. If, now, one or more volcanic eruptions occurred,
producing craters or volcanic islands inside the submerged rim, you
would have a condition of affairs seen in the island of Santorin.




CHAPTER VII

ORIZABA, POPOCATEPETL, IXTACCIHUATL, AND OTHER VOLCANOES OF MEXICO


While some of the volcanoes of Mexico are still in an active
condition, most of them are either only slightly active or are dormant
or extinct. Humboldt, the celebrated traveller and geographer, states
that there are only four active volcanic mountains in Mexico; namely,
Popocatepetl, Tuxtula, Colima, and Jorullo. But there are many others,
among which may be mentioned Orizaba, Ixtaccihuatl, Xinantecatl,
Tuxtula, Cofre de Perote, and Colima.

Of course, you can understand that, since extinct volcanoes may at any
time become active, in parts of the world where communication with the
interior is not good, many volcanic mountains that have been regarded
as extinct may have broken out temporarily, during historical times,
without their eruptions having been recorded.

It was at one time thought that Popocatepetl was the highest mountain
in North America. More recent measurements, however, have shown that
there are at least three other mountains in this part of the world,
that are much higher. One of these is the active volcano of Orizaba
that we will now briefly describe.

[Illustration: FIG. 16. MEXICO AND CENTRAL AMERICA]

Orizaba is situated in the north central part of Mexico, about
seventy-five miles west of Vera Cruz. Its ancient Aztec name was
Cittaltepetl, or _Star Mountain_. The height of the mountain is
18,200 feet. Like all high tropical mountains whose summits are
snow-clad, one would pass through the same changes in climate, in
going from its base to its summit, as in going along the earth's
surface from the equator to the poles. Near the base of the mountain
will be found a tropical climate, above that a temperate climate,
while in still higher regions, the climate of the Arctic region.

According to Russell, from whose work on the volcanoes of North
America much of the information concerning the volcanoes of Mexico
and Central America has been condensed, Orizaba has three craters on
its summit. The last recorded eruption took place about the middle of
the Eighteenth Century. The mountain is now in a dormant or extinct
condition, as may be seen from the fact that its three craters are for
the greater part filled with snow.

Orizaba, like Etna, and many other volcanoes, has deep fissures
extending through its sides. Through these, lava streams have flowed
during times when it was active. There are also found on the slopes
of this mountain many cones of a type known as _parasitic cones_.
These cones are not caused by materials that have been brought to the
surface during an eruption, but have been formed by the steam passing
through lava streams that have come out of the crater during other
eruptions.

Popocatepetl, or, as the word means, _The Smoking Mountain_, is the
second highest mountain in Mexico. According to recent measurements
made by the Mexican Government, its height is 17,876 feet.
Popocatepetl is situated on the edge of the great plateau of Mexico,
forty miles southeast of the City of Mexico. It is a conical mountain,
and is a magnificent object when seen from the City of Mexico, rising,
as it does, fully 10,000 feet from the elevation of the city, while on
the east it towers for nearly 18,000 feet above the level of the sea.
This splendid mountain is poetically described by Russell:

      "Seen from the basal plains, it sweeps up in one grand
      curve to nearly its full height,--a collossus of three and
      a quarter miles in elevation, white with everlasting frost
      on its summit, and bathed in the green of palms, bananas,
      oranges, and mangoes, at its base. Evergreen oaks and
      pines encircle its middle height, and above them, before
      the ice itself is reached, occur broad areas of loose sand
      into which the lavas have been changed by weathering. Soft
      wreaths of sulphurous vapor may at times be seen curling
      over the crest of the summit crater,--gentle reminders that
      the days of volcanic activity are not yet necessarily over."

Popocatepetl takes its name, _The Smoking Mountain_ from the fact that
gases and vapor are continually being emitted from its summit crater.
It has a conical peak with a depression or crater on its summit.
The bottom of the crater is crossed by fissures from which small
quantities of steam escape, not, however, sufficient to melt all the
snow which covers the slopes of the mountain to a depth of from eight
to ten feet. A small lake of hot water has collected in the crater
from the water derived from the melting snow. This water, sinking
through the porous materials in the cone, is the source of a great
number of large hot springs that occur around the base of the mountain.

Reclus states that the first to climb to the top of Popocatepetl was
one of Cortez' officers, 1519.

Another snow-capped volcano, which rising from the plain of Mexico is
in clear view of the city, is Ixtaccihuatl (Ets-tak'-se-wat-el), or as
the word means in the ancient Aztec, _The White Woman_. This mountain,
as measured by Heilprin, is 16,960 feet in height. Ixtaccihuatl is
now in so dormant a condition that many who have climbed to the top
assert that it is not a volcano at all, since they find no crater on
its summit. Nor are there any signs of volcanic heat, the summit being
snow clad during summer. The conical form of the mountain, however,
and the fact that the entire mountain is formed of volcanic rocks,
show beyond doubt that it is an extinct volcano, whose crater has most
probably been completely filled in by the washing away of its sides.

Xinantecatl is another extinct volcanic mountain situated about forty
miles southwest of the City of Mexico. It is about 16,500 feet high.
Its name means in the ancient Aztec language, _The Naked Lord_. It is
also sometimes known as the Nevado de Toluca, or _The Snow of Toluca_.
On the top of the peak are two craters filled with lakes of fresh
water. Russell states that the larger of these lakes is about thirty
feet in depth and contain a peculiar species of fish.

Tuxtula is another volcano of Mexico, situated on the western coast
of the Gulf of Mexico, about eighty miles southeast of Vera Cruz. It
was an active volcano in 1664, when it threw out molten lava. It then
became dormant until March, 1793, when its long rest was broken by one
of the grandest explosive eruptions of modern times. This eruption
rivalled in energy the great explosive eruption which blew off the
summit of Coseguina, in Central America, in 1835. As is common in the
case of explosive eruptions, volcanic dust and scoriæ were blown high
into the air, and, being carried by the winds, fell on the roofs of
houses and on the land at a distance of 150 miles.

There have been a number of less violent eruptions of Tuxtula since
1835. Tuxtula is a comparatively low mountain, being only 4,960 feet
high, because much of the mountain was blown away by the eruption of
1793.

As Russell points out, it is not safe to infer that because an eroded
mountain is not lofty it cannot be young or energetic, since the very
energy of some of its eruptions may, as in the case of Tuxtula, blow
away a large part of the mountain. A low mountain, with an unusually
large crater, generally means a mountain that has been visited by a
great explosive eruption.

Another extinct volcano known as the Cofre de Perote is situated on
the eastern coast of Mexico, east of Ixtaccihuatl, about thirty miles
north of Orizaba. It takes its name Cofre de Perote which means the
Coffin of Perote, from its peculiar box-like shape. It was called in
the Aztec language "Nauhcampatepetl," or the _Four-Ridged Mountain_.
Cofre de Perote is in a dormant or extinct condition.

We will conclude this brief description of the volcanoes of Mexico
with the volcano of Colima, a mountain about 5,500 feet high situated
on the western coast of Mexico.

Colima has been active of recent years, eruptions having occurred in
1869, 1872, 1873, and 1885. During these eruptions lava escaped from
lateral openings in the sides of the mountain, these openings being
termed by the natives the _Sons of Colima_.




CHAPTER VIII

COSEGUINA AND OTHER VOLCANOES OF CENTRAL AMERICA


Central America has a great number of volcanoes extending along nearly
all its western coast, or on the Pacific side of the country.

Central America consists of a high plain or table-land sloping gently
towards the northeast, but terminating abruptly on the southwest. In
the opinion of geologists this table-land consists of the surface of a
huge tilted block of the earth's crust, or, perhaps, more probably, of
a series of such blocks, that are limited on the southwest by a narrow
belt of intersecting fractures. It is in these fractures that scores
of volcanoes are situated, together with active craters, solfataras,
and hot springs. The volcanoes are mainly of the Vesuvian type. There
are so many volcanoes in this part of the world that it will be
possible to describe but a few of them.

We will begin with the volcano of Coseguina, situated on the Pacific
coast of Nicaragua. Its appearance is that of a conical mountain with
the top cut off, and suggests that it is most probably an explosive
volcano which has had the top blown away during some of its great
eruptions.

Coseguina is celebrated by reason of its tremendous eruption of 1835.
Before the still more tremendous explosive eruption of Krakatoa in
1883, described in the first two chapters of this book, Coseguina
shared with Sombawa, on the island of Sumatra, as being the foremost
of explosive volcanoes.

It had been estimated that before its eruption of 1835, Coseguina had
a height of perhaps 10,000 feet, but so much of it was blown away by
this eruption that it now is a little less than 4,000 feet.

The following description of the great eruption of Coseguina in 1835
has been condensed from an account prepared by Squier, published in
1850.

You will note in reading this brief account how closely many of the
phenomena resemble those that occurred during the eruption of Krakatoa
in 1833.

The eruption of Coseguina was heralded on the morning of January 20th,
1835, by several loud explosions that were heard for a distance of
some 300 miles around the crater of the volcano. Then followed an ink
black cloud formed directly over the mountain, which gradually spread
on all sides shutting off the light of the sun, except for a sickly
yellowish light. Fine sand was thrown from this cloud, which made it
both difficult and painful to breathe. For two whole days the cloud
continued to grow denser, the explosions louder and more frequent,
and the rain of sand thicker. On the third day the explosions were
strongest and the darkness greatest.

The amount of sand that fell from the cloud was so great that people
left their houses, fearing the roofs would be crushed in by the great
weight. This sand fell in large quantities over an area more than
1,500 miles in diameter, or, quoting the language of Squier:

      "The noise of the explosions was heard nearly as far"
      (1,500 miles). "And the Superintendent of Belize, eight
      hundred miles distant, mustered his troops, under the
      impression that there was a naval action off the harbor.
      All nature seemed overawed; the birds deserted the
      air, and the wild beasts their fastnesses, crouching,
      terror-stricken and harmless, in the dwellings of men.
      The people for a hundred leagues grouped, dumb with
      terror, amidst the thick darkness, bearing crosses on
      their shoulders and stones on their heads in penitential
      abasement and dismay. Many believed that the day of doom
      had come, and crowded in the tottering churches, where, in
      the pauses of the explosions, the voices of the priests
      were heard in solemn invocation to Heaven. The brightest
      lights were invisible at the distance of a few feet; and
      to heighten the terror of the scene, occasional lightnings
      traversed the darkness, shedding a lurid glare over the
      earth. This continued for forty-three hours, and then
      gradually passed away."

It appears that the eruption of Coseguina was followed by violent
earthquake shocks and other evidences of volcanic energy over extended
regions. For example, there were fearful earthquakes along the Andes,
the worst of which occurred on February 20th, and continued at the
rate of three or four a day up to March 6th, and, less frequently,
to March 17th. It was during one of these earthquakes that the city
of Concepcion, Chile, was so completely destroyed, that but a single
house remained.

The same brilliant sunsets and sunrises occurred in different parts
of the world after the eruption of Coseguina, due to the presence of
large quantities of volcanic dust that followed the great eruption of
Krakatoa.

The cause of this great explosive eruption of Coseguina was most
probably the same as that which is believed to have caused the
eruption of Krakatoa, namely, a large volume of water suddenly gaining
access to a mass of liquid lava.

Volcán del Fuego is another of the many volcanoes of Central America.
It is situated as one of a group of volcanoes on the highest summit
of the Isthmus. This volcanic mountain has a regular cone with
regular slopes on all sides, except on the north, where a table-like
projection, about 1,000 feet below the summit, is all that remains of
a vast cone, the summit of which was blown away, according to Russell,
in prehistoric times, just as was the crater of Somma on Vesuvius.

There have been in Central America, since the time of the Spanish
conquest, some fifty volcanic eruptions sufficiently great to have
been recorded. Some idea of the activity of Fuego during this time
may be had from the fact that of all these eruptions some twenty were
those of Fuego. At the present time, however, the volcano is dormant
and apparently almost extinct.

The recorded eruptions of Fuego are nearly all of the explosive type.
Among the most violent were those that occurred during 1526, 1541,
and 1581. During 1582, 1585, and 1586, there were eruptions nearly
every month, the most terrible being near Christmas day in 1586. Other
memorable eruptions occurred in 1614, 1623, 1686, and 1705, and at
other dates down to August 17th, 1860, from which date to the present
time the volcano has been quiet.

We will conclude this brief description of the volcanoes of Central
America with that of Volcán de Agua, or, as the word means, _The Water
Volcano_. It is situated in Guatemala near the coast, and is one of
the mountains that occupies the plateau on which Fuego is situated.

The Volcán de Agua is one of the most remarkable volcanoes in Central
America, standing, as it does, nearly alone, and rising to an
elevation of 3,350 metres (10,988 ft.), above the level of the sea. It
has been extinct for a long time.

It has been supposed by some, from its name, that this is a volcano
that throws out water. Others believe that the name comes from the
water produced by the melting of the snow that is collected on the
sides of the mountain. Now there almost always escapes from the
craters of volcanoes during violent eruptions immense quantities of
water vapor, which, condensing, fall as vast showers of rain that
often deluge the surrounding country. In snow-clad mountains, the
escape of lava is often attended by floods caused by the rapid melting
of the snow. The water volcano did not, however, take its name from
either of these facts, but rather because at the time of the Spanish
invasion, the crater of the mountain was occupied by a large lake, and
that during an earthquake in 1541 the wall of the crater was broken,
when the lake was poured as an immense stream of water down the side
of the mountain, overwhelming a village which was situated on this
slope. That this was the correct origin of the same may be seen from
the fact that the crater at the present time still shows the remains
of its former lake basin, and that on the sides of the broken rim an
immense ravine can be seen through which the water poured down on the
village below.

Daubeny describes this volcano as follows:

      "The Volcán de Agua (Water-Volcano) is of enormous height,
      being covered with eternal snow, in the latitude of 14°.
      Captain Basil Hall estimates it at more than 14,000 feet,
      but a recent traveller states it at 12,600. It has the form
      of a blunted cone clothed with perpetual verdure to its
      summit. The crater is from forty to sixty yards in depth,
      and about 150 in diameter,--the sides and bottom strewed
      with masses of rock, apparently showing the effects of
      boiling water or of fire.

      "By a deluge of water from this volcano in 1527, the
      original city of Guatemala was overwhelmed; and the next
      built, called the Old City, _La Antiqua_, was ruined by an
      earthquake in 1773. The present capital is situated at a
      distance of eight leagues from the mountain."

Another volcano in this part of the country is described by Daubeny as
follows:

      "Massaya, near the lake of that name, was one of the most
      active vents at the time of the first discovery of the
      country. Its flames were visible twenty-five miles off. Its
      crater was only twenty or thirty paces in diameter; but
      the melted lava 'seethed and rolled in waves as high as
      towers.' A story is told of a Dominican who imagined the
      fluid lava was melted gold, and descended into the crater
      with an iron ladle to carry some away; but the ladle, it is
      said, melted, and the monk escaped with difficulty."




CHAPTER IX

THE VOLCANIC MOUNTAINS OF SOUTH AMERICA


The volcanoes of South America are limited to the Andes Mountain
System that stretches like a huge wall along the entire western side
of the continent. The names of the more important of these volcanoes
are marked on the map of South America, shown in Fig. 17. As will be
seen, this huge mountain wall reaches from Patagonia on the south to
the Isthmus of Panama on the north. The arrangement of the volcanoes
in South America is of the linear type. The craters follow one another
in more or less straight lines, or are situated along the lines of
great fissures that lie near the ocean. You must not, however, suppose
that there is a continuous chain of active volcanic mountains from the
Isthmus of Panama to the southern part of the continent. According to
Lyell, from lat. 2° N., or from the north of Quito, to lat. 43° S. or
south of Chile, a total distance including 45° of latitude, there is a
succession of districts with active and extinct volcanoes, or at least
with volcanoes that have been quiet during the last three centuries.

[Illustration: FIG. 17. SOUTH AMERICA]

Lyell traces the volcanoes of South America as follows:

      "The principal line of active vents which have been seen in
      eruption in the Andes extends from lat. 43° 28' S., ... to
      lat. 30° S.; to these thirteen degrees of latitude succeed
      more than eight degrees, in which no recent volcanic
      eruptions have been observed. We then come to the volcanoes
      of Bolivia and Peru, extending six degrees from S. to N.,
      or from lat. 21° S. to lat. 15° S. Between the Peruvian
      volcanoes and those of Quito another space intervenes of no
      less than fourteen degrees of latitude, in which there is
      said to be but few active volcanoes as far as is yet known.
      The volcanoes of Quito then succeed, beginning about 100
      geographical miles south of the equator, and continuing
      for about 150 miles north of it, when there occurs another
      undisturbed region of more than six degrees of latitude,
      after which we arrive at the volcanoes of Guatemala, or
      Central America, north of the Isthmus of Panama."

Of course, you must not understand that there are no extinct volcanoes
in these gaps. On the contrary, according to Daubeny, we find,
beginning on the north in the United States of Colombia, the lofty
volcano of Tolima. According to Daubeny's book published in 1848,
Tolima was then constantly emitting steam and sulphur gases from its
summit. Tolima is situated in the easternmost of the three mountain
ranges that extend through this section of the country. It is,
therefore, at a comparatively great distance from the ocean. Tolima
was in eruption in 1595. It again burst out in 1826.

Coming now to Ecuador we find that this, the smallest of the South
American Republics, contains numerous great volcanic mountains.

Some of the principal volcanic mountains are Chimborazo, 20,498 feet
above the sea; Antisana, 18,880 feet; Cotopaxi, 19,660 feet; Pichincha
(17,644 feet in 1848, Daubeny), El Altar, 16,383 feet.

These all lie in South America on the plateau of Quito. As Baron
Alexander von Humboldt has pointed out, the volcanic mountains of
Quito are arranged in two parallel chains that extend side by side
for a distance of over 500 miles north into the State of Colombia,
including between them the high plateaus of Quito and Lacumbia.
According to Whymper, however, who has recently studied this part of
South America, there is a succession of basins between the mountains,
but there is no such thing as a single valley in the interior of
Ecuador. The extinct volcanoes of Cayamba, Antisana, and Chimborazo
are the most important. On all three mountains there are old lava
streams on their sides. Although no craters can be seen on their
summits, yet it is almost certain they once had craters. There is
plenty of room on the summit of Antisana for a cone as great as that
of Cotopaxi. Whymper is of the opinion that the snow domes that form
the summit of Chimborazo were at one time two of the highest points of
the rim of the old crater.

Nearly due south of Quito is the great volcanic cone of El Altar.
Like all the peaks of this high plateau, El Altar rises to a great
height above the sea, being at the present time 16,383 feet above the
sea. This mountain has an enormous crater that appears to be dormant
or extinct, and is covered with snow. According to the traditions of
Indians, El Altar, or, as they call it, _Capac Urcu_ or _The Chief_,
was the highest mountain near the equator, being much higher than
Chimborazo. But during a prodigious eruption that occurred before the
discovery of America, and continued uninterruptedly for eight years,
the height of the mountain was considerably reduced. According to
Boussingault, the fragments of the cone of this celebrated mountain
are now spread for great distances around the mountain on the
surrounding lowlands.

Pichincha in Ecuador, an extinct volcano, is situated almost
immediately on the equator. It has a height as measured by Whymper by
the barometer, of 15,918 feet above the Pacific. The summit is covered
by blocks of pumice. Several species of lichens are found at this
elevation. According to Daubeny, Pichincha was extinct prior to 1539,
when it became active. There were also eruptions in 1577, 1587, and
1668. It was also in activity during 1831.

Cayamba, another volcanic mountain of Ecuador, lies to the east of
Pichincha, a short distance north of the equator. Its height is 19,186
feet. It is nearly extinct.

Cotopaxi, 19,680 feet, is another volcanic mountain of the high
plateau of Quito. Cotopaxi is still active. Its slopes are covered
with snow down to a height of about 14,800 feet. Between the lower
edge of this snow line and the lower slopes of the mountain, there
lies a zone of naked rock.

According to Whymper, the eruption of Cotopaxi, in 1877, was preceded
by an unusual degree of activity in the earlier parts of the year.
This, however, did not cause any alarm until June 25th, 1877, when,
shortly after midday, an eruption, attended by tremendous subterranean
roars, began, and an immense black column shot up into the air for
about twice the height of the cone. This eruption was clearly visible
at Quito, for the wind blew the ashes towards the Pacific. At this
time the summit had not changed its appearance, but towards 6:30
A. M., on the next day, another enormous column of ashes
rose from the crater. The ashes and cinders were first carried due
north by the winds, and then, spreading out in all directions, were
subsequently distributed through the air all over the country. At
Quito, as early as 8 A. M., the sky assumed the appearance it
generally has at twilight, and the darkness increased until midday,
when it became as dark as at midnight. Indeed, it was so dark that one
could not see his hand before his face.

During this eruption, as is very common in the eruptions of the
snow-clad mountains of South America, a flood of water, due to the
rapid melting of the snow and ice on the summit, rushed down the
mountain slopes at 10 o'clock A. M., on the 26th of the
month, almost immediately after the appearance of a stream of lava
that began to flow down the mountain. In a few moments the mountain
was completely shut off from view by immense columns of steam and
smoke. At first, a low, moaning sound was heard, which rapidly
increased to a roar, when a deluge of mud, mingled with huge blocks of
ice and stones, swept down the mountain, leaving a desert in its path.
It is estimated that at some places this stream moved with a velocity
of fifty miles per hour.

The general appearance of Cotopaxi is shown in the accompanying
reproduction from the painting by Frederick E. Church in the Lenox
Library, New York.

According to Whymper, who made an ascent of Cotopaxi in 1880, the
crater on the summit has the form of an immense amphitheatre, 2,300
feet across from north to south, and 1,650 feet from east to west.
Its crest is irregular and notched. The crater is surrounded by
perpendicular cliffs. The western side of the volcano is irregular.
Barometric measurements gave the height of this volcano at 19,498
feet. Its height as taken by La Condamine, during the early parts of
the last century, was 19,605 feet, so that, according to Whymper,
assuming as would seem probable, that this difference in height has
not all been due to errors in measurements, the volcano has grown or
increased in height during the last century and a half.

Chimborazo, 20,498 feet, is another lofty mountain on the plateau of
Quito. This volcano is situated in lat. 1° 30' S., and is not at the
present time in an active condition. It is, however, formed entirely
of volcanic material. Its upper portions are covered with a layer of
snow to a level of some 2,600 feet below the summit.

[Illustration: COTOPAXI _From a Painting by Frederick E.
Church in the Lenox Collection of the New York Public Library. By
Permission_]

Chimborazo has an enormous volcanic summit, which, when seen from the
Pacific, when the air is especially clear after the long rains of
winter, is a most splendid sight. Whymper, who ascended the mountain,
says:

      "When the transparency of the air is increased and its
      enormous circular summit is seen projected upon the deep
      azure of blue of the Equatorial sky, it represents a
      magnificent sight. The great rarity of the air through
      which the top of the Andes is seen adds much to the
      splendor."

Whymper says, that as far as records are concerned, there have been no
eruptions of Chimborazo, which has apparently been an extinct volcano
for many years. Its crater has been completely buried by a thick cap
of ice on its summit, while what lava streams exist on the mountain
are either covered by large glaciers, or have been removed by erosion,
or hidden by vegetation.

Chimborazo possesses less of the conical outline than Cotopaxi. There
are steep cliffs towards the summit that have been named by Whymper
"the northern and southern walls." They seem to him to have been
formed by the violent upheavals of the explosive eruptions that have
blown away portions of the cone.

There are other volcanoes in this district, but the above are all we
have space for describing.

According to Lyell, the volcano of Rancagua, in Chile, lat. 34° 15'
S., is continually throwing up ashes and vapors like Stromboli.
Indeed, a year seldom passes in Chile without some earthquake shocks.
Of these shocks those which came from the side nearest the sea are
most violent. The town of Copiapo was laid waste by these shocks
during the years 1773, 1796, and 1819, in both instances after
intervals of twenty-three years.

Since the volcanic mountains of South America are snow-covered the
occurrences of volcanic eruptions are apt to be attended by great
floods caused by the rapid melting of the snow, as well as sometimes
by the breaking of huge subterranean cavities that are filled with
water.

According to Lyell, the volcanoes of Peru rise from a plateau from
17,000 to 20,000 feet above the sea. One of the principal volcanoes
of Peru is Arequipa, whose summit is 18,877 feet above the level of
the sea. The mountain takes its name from the city of Arequipa, which
is situated not far from its base. It is an active volcano. Another
volcano, Viejo, is found in lat. 16° 55' S.

According to Lyell, there are active vents extending through Chile to
the island of Chiloe to lat. 30° N.

Aconcagua, west of Valparaiso, in lat. 32° 39' S., 23,000 feet in
height, the highest mountain in South America, is still in an active
condition. According to Scrope, when the city of Mendoza was destroyed
by an earthquake, that killed 10,000 people, in March, 1861, it is
probable that Aconcagua was in eruption.

There are many other active volcanoes in Chile, extending as far south
as the volcanoes of Patagonia, north of the Straits of Magellan as
well as others of Tierra del Fuego.




CHAPTER X

VOLCANOES OF THE UNITED STATES


For some readers this may be a surprising chapter heading, for it is a
general impression that there are no volcanoes in the United States.
It is true that practically all of the volcanoes of this country are
dormant or extinct. They have, however, at one time been exceedingly
active, and, if reports are correct, some of them were active during
comparatively recent times.

Nearly all of the volcanoes of the United States lie west of the
meridian of Denver. These volcanoes belong to two distinct types,
either the Vesuvian type with built up cones, or the plateau or
fissure type already referred to.

The following brief description of the volcanoes of the United States
has been collated, for the greater part, from Wallace's excellent book
on the volcanoes of North America.

Crossing the United States on the Southern Pacific Railroad one's
attention is caught, in Arizona, by a magnificent group of mountains
known as the San Francisco Mountains. The highest peak of these
mountains reaches 12,562 feet above the level of the sea, and 5,700
feet above the surface of the plateau on which the mountains stand.

[Illustration: FIG. 18. THE UNITED STATES]

According to G. K. Gilbert, the San Francisco Mountain group is formed
of a variety of lava known as trachyte, that is of comparatively
recent ejection, possibly of a geological age called the Tertiary. The
lava forming the mountains escaped through a number of crater cones,
some of which can still be seen in the neighborhood. Some of these
craters are now in almost as perfect a condition as the day they were
formed. Indeed, to one looking at them from a neighboring elevation,
they appear so fresh, and so little affected by the climate, that one
might almost believe that the lava had just flowed out of the craters,
and has not yet hardened. Nevertheless, geologists are sure they have
been formed long before man appeared on the earth. In one of these
craters a lake of fresh water has collected.

Another extinct volcano of the United States is Mt. Taylor in New
Mexico, nearly east of the San Francisco Mountains. This mountain
rises from the surface of a high table-land, or, as it is called
in this part of the world, a _mesa_. The surface of the plateau is
covered with a thick lava stream from which Mt. Taylor rises to
a height of 11,390 feet above the level of the ocean. This mesa,
or table-land, is forty-seven miles in length from northwest to
southeast, and about twenty-three miles in breadth. Its general
elevation is about 8,200 feet. The plateau rises about 2,000 feet
above the surface of the level land that surrounds it. All these
2,000 feet have been removed by erosion. The table-land from which
Mt. Taylor rises has not been eroded by the action of the rain,
rivers, and other weathering agencies like the surface of the country
surrounding it, because of a covering of lava that has been spread
over its surface to a depth of about 300 feet.

Mt. Taylor is formed almost entirely of lava that has escaped through
a single opening and has built up a high cone around it. The volcano
is now quite extinct, so that the original form of the mountain has
been greatly changed by erosion.

You will remember, when we were discussing the general subject of
volcanoes, in the beginning of this book, that we spoke of volcanic
mountains being bottled up after an eruption, by the hardening of
the lava which remained in the crater and the tube that connects the
crater with the place from which the lava had been derived. We then
spoke of this hardened mass being known as a _volcanic plug_, or
stopper, explaining how the volcano could never again erupt through
its old crater unless it could develop sufficient force to blow out or
remove this stopper.

Now besides the crater at the top of Mt. Taylor there were several
others in the eroded region surrounding the mesa, or high table-land,
from which Mt. Taylor rises. When, therefore, the erosion which
removed the 2,000 feet of rocks on all portions of the old mesa that
were not protected by the coating of lava, these old mountain plugs
were too hard to be worn away or eroded, and were, therefore, left
projecting into the air like vast pyramids.

If you should ever visit Mt. Taylor and should go to the eastern
border of this mesa, and look over the eroded plain, you would see in
the lowlands a part of the places from which the 2,000 feet of matter
have been slowly eroded. Dutton describes the beautiful panorama that
is to be seen as follows:

      "The edge of the mesa suddenly descends by a succession of
      ledges and slopes, nearly 2,000 feet into the rugged and
      highly diversified valley-plain below. The country beneath
      is a medley of low cliffs and bluffs, showing the browns
      and pale yellows of the Cretaceous sandstones and shales.
      Out of this confused patchwork of bright colors rise
      several objects of remarkable aspect. They are apparently
      inaccessible eyries of black rock, and at a rough guess, by
      comparison with the known altitudes of surrounding objects,
      their heights above the mean level of the adjoining plain
      may range from 800 to 1,500 feet. The blackness of their
      shade may be exaggerated by contrast with the brilliant
      colors of the rocks and soil out of which they rise, but
      their forms are even more striking."

These black piles are the _necks_ or lava plugs of extinct volcanoes.
They rise above the level of the plain because, being harder than
the surrounding rocks, they have resisted erosion. In some cases
these necks or plugs have been converted by shrinkage, on cooling,
into beautiful columns, somewhat of the type of the basaltic columns
of the Giant's Causeway. It would be difficult to count the number
of volcanic necks that can be seen near the edge of the mesa. One's
attention is at once attracted to some dozen of these piles, which are
especially striking on account of their great size, and ominous black
color, but the number is by no means limited to this dozen. There are
hundreds of them.

Fig. 19 gives some idea of a part of the view from the edge of the
mesa, and Fig. 20 the appearance of two of these volcanic necks.

But besides high volcanic mountains such as the San Francisco
Mountains and Mt. Taylor, there are, in different parts of the United
States, to be found fragments of huge craters from which, in the
geological past, immense quantities of lava have escaped. In some
instances these craters are but fragments of huge craters, that, like
the crater of Mt. Somma, in Vesuvius, have been nearly completely
blown away by some unrecorded explosion during the far past.

[Illustration: FIG. 19. PANORAMA FROM THE MESA AT THE EDGE OF MT.
TAYLOR _From U. S. Geological Survey_]

A crater of this type, known as Ice Springs Crater, is situated in the
desert valley west of the Wahsatch Mountains, some 125 miles south
of Salt Lake City, Utah. This crater is especially interesting from
the fact that it occupies a position on a plain that was formed by
the deposition of sediment in an immense lake that covered this part
of the United States very long before man lived on the earth. We
are alluding to Lake Bonneville, a lake that existed in a geological
time known as the Glacial Epoch. This lake occupied the territory now
filled by the Great Salt Lake of Utah, but towards the close of the
Glacial Epoch it was immensely larger than it is now. This can be
shown not only by the presence of shore lines, that are clearly marked
on the sides of the surrounding mountains, but also by the ancient
lake beaches, and deltas, that are common in the district, so that
instead of there being the comparatively limited area of Great Salt
Lake as marked on the maps of to-day there was a lake that had an area
of 19,750 square miles, that covered an area on which at least 200,000
people dwell.

[Illustration: FIG. 20. VOLCANIC NECKS, EDGE OF MESA AT MT.
TAYLOR _From U. S. Geological Survey_]

A similar lake, known as Lake Lehontan, existed at the same time,
covering large areas in the western parts of Nevada.

Coming now to Ice Springs Craters in Utah, we find here three small
craters formed of scoriæ and lapilli (volcanic ashes consisting of
small angular stony fragments). Near them lies a fragment of a much
larger crater known as the Crescent. In some respects this crater was
not unlike the crater of Somma that surrounded Mt. Vesuvius. It was
not, however, as large, having a diameter of only 2,200 feet. From
these craters streams of basalt flowed until they covered considerable
areas.

A still more recent crater known as Tabernacle Crater is situated
four miles south of the Ice Springs Crater. Tabernacle Crater takes
its name from the building known in Salt Lake City as the Tabernacle.
According to Gilbert, this crater was formed at a time when Lake
Bonneville stood at a comparatively low level, or when the water was
only from fifty to seventy-five feet above the bottom of the valley
on which the crater now stands. At that time an explosive volcanic
eruption occurred on the bottom of the lake, and the rim of the
crater, built up by this explosion, was gradually pushed above the
surface of the lake, so as to shut out its waters.

Extinct volcanic craters, not unlike those of Utah, occur also near
Ragtown, in Nevada, in a district known as the Carson Valley Desert,
in one of the broadest areas of what was once Lake Lahontan. Ragtown
is twenty-two miles southwest of Wadsworth on the Central Pacific
Railroad. At the present time there are two circular depressions or
volcanic craters filled with pools of strongly alkaline water known
as the Ragtown Pond, or Soda Lake. The large lake covers an area of
268-1/2 acres. Its greatest diameter is over 4,000 feet. Without going
into a detailed description it will suffice to say that the larger
crater probably was destroyed by an explosive volcanic eruption.

Another intensely alkaline lake that fills an extinct volcanic crater
is the Mono Lake, situated in Mono Valley in California at the eastern
base of the Sierra Nevadas. It has an area of about 200 square miles.
The centre of the lake has two small islands named Pacha and Negit.
Immediately south of Mono Lake are a number of craters that occupy
portions of what was once apparently a fissure extending in a general
north and south direction. The highest of these craters are in the
neighborhood of 2,500 feet.

But leaving these inconspicuous craters, let us briefly examine some
of the higher mountain peaks of the United States that are of volcanic
origin. One of the most conspicuous of these is Mt. Shasta. This
mountain is situated in California, at the northern end of the Sierra
Nevadas. It has a height of 14,350 feet. It is a snow-clad mountain of
a conical form, and is a conspicuous object in the landscape, because
it stands alone.

Mt. Shasta is a double-coned mountain. Besides the cone on its summit
there is a well-developed cone known as Shastina on the western side
of the mountain, 2,000 feet lower than the main summit.

There are well-defined lava streams on the slopes of Mt. Shasta. One
of these, which issued from the southern side of the mountain at
an elevation of 5,500 feet, divided into two streams. One of these
streams is twelve miles in length. The other entered the canyon of the
Sacramento River, thus displacing the water.

Coming now to the Cascade Mountains, in Oregon and Washington, we
will find in them a number of giant peaks of volcanic origin. The
most important of these are in regular order from south to north, as
follows: Mt. Pitt, 9,760 feet; Mt. Mazana, 8,223; Mt. Union, 7,881;
Mt. Scott, 7,123; Three Sisters, Mt. Jefferson, 10,200, and Mt. Hood,
11,225, in Oregon; Mt. Adams, 9,570; Mt. St. Helen's, 9,750; Mt.
Rainier, 14,525, and Mt. Baker in Washington, 10,877.

Nearly all these mountains have craters either on their summits or on
their sides. They are extinct volcanic mountains, that were, for the
most part, thrown up during the Tertiary Geological Period, so that
they have all been greatly affected by erosion.

One of the most remarkable of the above volcanic mountains is Mt.
Mazana, in Oregon. This mountain has on its summit an approximately
circular cavity from five to six miles in diameter, that is occupied
by a lake of water known as Crater Lake. This lake is 6,239 feet above
the level of the sea, and has a depth of 1,975 feet. It is surrounded
by nearly vertical walls ranging from 900 to 2,200 feet deep, so that
the vast caldera of which this great depression consists has a depth
of at least 4,000 feet.

Mt. Pitt, situated about sixty miles north of Mt. Shasta, in southern
Oregon, has a regularly shaped volcanic cone, and the remnant of a
crater at its summit. The Three Sisters and Mt. Jefferson lie to
the north of Mt. Pitt. Like the others they are ancient volcanic
mountains. But little is accurately known concerning them.

Mt. Hood, 11,225 feet high, rises from the crest of the Cascade
range in Northwest Oregon, about twenty-five miles south of the
Columbia River. Mt. Hood is an exceedingly majestic mountain. At its
summit there are only portions of the walls of the original crater.
When ascended in 1888, streams of sulphur vapor were escaping from
fumaroles on its northeastern slopes, at an elevation of 8,500 feet
above the sea.

Mt. Adams and Mt. St. Helen's lie to the north of Mt. Hood. Mt. Adams
about sixty miles to the north, and beyond this, Mt. St. Helen's.
Accurate information concerning the summit of Mt. Adams is still
lacking. Mt. St. Helen's in Washington has more of a conical summit.
Russell states that according to frontiersmen, St. Helen's has been
in a state of activity within the past fifty years. A French-Canadian
asserts that the mountain was in actual eruption during the winter of
1841-43, that at this date the light from the volcano was sufficiently
bright to enable one to see and pick up a pin in the grass at midnight
near his cabin some twenty miles distant. Mt. St. Helen's was ascended
in 1889, when fumaroles were found on the northeast side.

Mt. Rainier in Washington is plainly visible from Puget Sound. It is
a most magnificent mountain. The summit has a bowl-shaped crater, of
an almost perfectly circular form. The inside of the crater, when
last ascended, was filled to within thirty or thirty-five feet of its
rim with ice and snow. There was, however, evidences of heat, since
numerous jets of steam were seen issuing from its interior rim.

Mt. Baker, Washington, is the northernmost of the volcanoes of the
Cascade Mountains, south of the boundary line between the United
States and Canada. But little is known of this mountain. The summit
appears as a conical peak from Puget Sound, so that its form would
seem to show that it is of volcanic origin. According to Gibbs,
officers of the Hudson Bay Company, as well as the Indians, declared
that Mt. Baker was in eruption in 1843, when it broke out at the same
time as Mt. St. Helen's, covering the country with ashes.

There are but few volcanoes in the Rocky Mountains which extend from
north to south through the United States at a considerable distance to
the east of the Sierra Nevadas and Cascade Ranges. The Spanish Peaks,
situated in the southeastern part of Colorado about sixty miles south
of Pueblo, are the remains of ancient volcanoes. Two of the most
prominent of these peaks rise from 12,720 to 13,620 feet above the sea.

We shall make no effort to attempt to describe the volcanic mountains
that may exist in those portions of the Rocky Mountain Ranges or the
Cascade Range lying in Canada. Comparatively little is known of them,
but inasmuch as volcanic activity has been manifested in Alaska, it
would seem highly improbable, as Russell remarks, that volcanoes
should suddenly cease at the northern boundaries of the United States
and then begin again at the most southern part of Alaska. It will be
sufficient to say that Mt. Edgecome, situated on an island in the
neighborhood of Sitka, is of volcanic origin, and that the Aleutian
Islands, beginning at Alaska on the east at the head of Cook's Inlet,
extend westward through the Peninsula of Alaska to the Peninsula of
Kamtschatka for a distance of nearly 1,600 miles. This belt, which
is called by Russell "the Aleutian Volcanic Belt," contains numerous
volcanoes that are known to have been active in historical times.

Mt. Wrangell, on the Copper River, 200 miles northeast of the head
of Cook's Inlet, is a lofty volcanic mountain that is said to have
been in eruption in 1819, and at the time of last report was still
throwing out columns of steam. While much remains to be ascertained
about the volcanoes of the Aleutian Islands, it would appear that
there are active volcanoes on twenty-five of these islands, on which
some forty-eight craters have been found. Eruptions are common in the
district.




CHAPTER XI

THE CATASTROPHE OF MARTINIQUE AND THE VOLCANIC ISLANDS OF THE LESSER
ANTILLES


The West Indies Island chain consists of two groups of islands; i. e.,
the Greater Antilles, including Cuba, Jamaica, Hayti, and Porto Rico,
on the west, and the chain of the Lesser Antilles on the east.

The Lesser Antilles consists of two parallel chains, the westernmost
of which is for the greater part mountainous with peaks several
thousand feet in height. All these islands are volcanic. The chain
on the east consists of low, calcareous rocks, or rocks consisting
largely of lime.

In the western chain the islands beginning on the south are, Grenada,
St. Vincent, St. Lucia, Martinique, Dominica, Guadeloupe, Montserrat,
Nevis, and St. Eustace, while in the calcareous chain are found the
Tobago, Barbadoes, and others.

Prior to 1902, the greatest volcanic eruption in this part of the
world occurred on the island of St. Vincent, with the volcano of
Soufrière. Although the forces displayed were exceedingly great, yet
they become insignificant when compared with the appalling eruption
that took place in Martinique only a short time ago; namely, May the
8th, 1902, when the volcano of Mt. Pelée, situated on the northwestern
part of the island, burst into an eruption so terrible that in
destruction of life it far exceeded the eruption of Krakatoa, although
the amount of energy causing the eruption was much smaller.

[Illustration: FIG. 21. THE LESSER ANTILLES]

Heilprin, in a book called "Mt. Pelée and the Tragedy of Martinique,"
from whom most of the information of this chapter has been obtained,
calls attention to the fact that before the eruption of Pelée there
were plenty of warnings for those intelligent enough to note them. For
two or three weeks prior to May 8th, 1902, the volcanic activity of
Pelée had been rapidly increasing, the mountain throwing out clouds
of ashes and sulphurous vapors from its crater. By April 25th the
sulphurous vapors had so increased in quantity as to make breathing
difficult in St. Pierre. The ashes fell on the surrounding country and
by the 2d of May had so covered the streets of St. Pierre as to stop
traffic.

Three days later, May 6th, shortly before noon, an avalanche of mud
poured down the slopes of the mountain with the rapidity of an express
train. These torrents of mud and water deluged the towns and villages
in the neighborhood. The activity of Mt. Pelée increased until the
morning of May 8th, 1902, when, almost at exactly 8 A. M., an
eruption occurred, so terrible in its effects that in two minutes the
city of St. Pierre was almost completely destroyed.

St. Pierre, the principal town of Martinique, is situated on the
island of Martinique, on the northwestern coast, about ten miles
southwest of Mt. Pelée. St. Pierre was settled as far back as 1635. It
is situated on an open roadstead without any harbor.

That there were many points of resemblance between the position of St.
Pierre and the destroyed city of Pompeii will be recognized as the
description of the catastrophe is given.

St. Pierre was a beautiful city, and formed the natural outlet to one
of the richest districts in Martinique for the production of sugar
cane and cocoa. It contained many fine houses, the homes of planters,
wealthy bankers, merchants, and shippers, who, besides their regular
houses in the city, had constructed handsome villas on heights on the
outskirts of the city. The houses were to a great extent one or two
stories in height, and were in many cases surrounded by fine gardens.
The city extended along the coast for about two miles. The streets
were well lighted.

The eruption of Mt. Pelée on May 8th, 1902, was of a very unusual
character, containing a feature that--with the exception of a volcanic
eruption of Soufrière, a volcanic mountain on the neighboring island
of St. Vincent, and an eruption of Kilauea in Hawaii--so far as I am
aware, never before occurred. This was a blast of highly heated air,
mingled with white hot or incandescent dust, that swept down the side
of the mountain with a velocity of one or two miles per minute, or
possibly more.

Nearly all of the people in St. Pierre were killed. From the
appearance of the bodies it seemed that death was practically
instantaneous, and was due either to scorching or burning, or
asphyxiation by the breathing of highly heated air. The number of
people so killed, including almost the entire population of St.
Pierre, as well as a number of adjoining settlements, was not less
than 30,000.

The zone of absolute destruction was limited to an area the extent
of which did not greatly exceed eight or nine square miles. On the
outskirts of this zone the destruction, though considerable, was less
complete.

There was almost an entire absence of great earthquake shocks during
the eruption.

Following the terrible eruption of May 8th were a number of less
violent eruptions on May 20th, 26th, June 6th, July 9th, and August
31st. According to Heilprin these eruptions were of the same character
as that of May 8th.

There has been considerable discussion as to the exact causes of the
tornadic incandescent blast that caused the awful destruction of life.
Without entering this discussion it is sufficient to say that it is
now generally considered that the blast consisted of highly heated
air, and super-heated steam loaded with great quantities of finely
divided red hot or even white hot dust particles.

While, perhaps, the force producing the awful eruption of Mt. Pelée
was greatly excelled in the case of many other volcanic eruptions;
such as Papandayang, in 1772; Asamayama, in 1783; Skaptar Jökul, in
1783; Tomboro, in 1815; Coseguina, in 1835; and Krakatoa, in 1883;
yet, in the words of Heilprin, "in intensity and swiftness of its
death-dealing blast ... the eruption of May 8th, and of later dates,
stands unique in records of volcanic manifestations."

While the amount of ashes that accompanied the blast of white hot
steam and air was comparatively small, yet during the time between
this and the subsequent eruptions, the amount of ashes that were
thrown from the surface of Mt. Pelée was exceedingly great.

According to Russell, in a paper on the volcanic eruptions of
Martinique and St. Vincent, in 1902, the amount of ashes and solid
matter generally thrown out from the crater of Mt. Pelée would be
equal to 40,000,000 cubic feet every minute, or one and a half times
the sediments discharged by the Mississippi in the course of a whole
year.

According to Heilprin, however, the actual amount of dust thrown from
the crater of Mt. Pelée was, probably, 500 times greater than the
amount discharged by the Mississippi River in the course of a year,
and, consequently, considerably greater than that of all the rivers of
the world combined, or, as he says:

      "Mont Pelée has now been in a condition of forceful
      activity for upwards of two hundred days; can we assume
      that during this time it may have thrown out a mass of
      material whose cubical contents are hardly less than
      a quarter of the area of Martinique as it now appears
      above the waters? One is, indeed, almost appalled by the
      magnitude of this work, and yet the work may even be very
      much greater than is here stated. We ask ourselves the
      questions, what becomes of the void that is being formed in
      the interior? What form of new catastrophe does it invite?
      There can be no answer to a question of this kind--except
      in the future happening that may be associated with this
      special condition. But geologists must take count of the
      force as being one of greatest potential energy, whose
      relation to the modelling and the shaping of the destinies
      of the globe is of far greater significance than has
      generally been conceived."

A curious circumstance connected with the eruption of Mt. Pelée was
the most pronounced electric and magnetic disturbances. Moreover, as
in the case of the eruption of Krakatoa, there were the same after
glows or red sunsets and sunrises due to the presence of fine volcanic
dust in the higher regions of the air. These phenomena were observed
over widely separated areas.

It appears that this great eruption in Martinique was preceded by
severe earthquakes in the northern part of South America, especially
in Colombia and Venezuela. The most marked was the great earthquake
which on April 18th destroyed the city of Guatamaula; this was,
perhaps, the most destructive earthquake that has occurred in the
Western Hemisphere since the great earthquake of 1812, that destroyed
the city of Caracas. Indeed, Professor Milne suggests that it was this
earthquake that brought about the eruption of Mt. Pelée.

Soufrière, on the island of St. Vincent, had a great eruption on May
7th, 1902, one day before the awful eruption of Mt. Pelée. No lava
flowed during this eruption. There were, however, great discharges
of mud, due to a lake that before the eruption filled the top of
a depression known as the old crater which lay southwest of a new
crater, or the crater that was formed during the eruption of 1812. The
old crater was nine-tenths of a mile across from east to west, and
eight-tenths of a mile from north to south. The depth to the crater
floor was from 1,000 to 2,400 feet. The surface of the new and shallow
boiling lake which occupied the deepest part of the floor during the
latter part of May, and from June to August, was estimated to be
only 1,200 feet above the level of the sea. The sheet of water that
occupied it before the eruption being several hundred feet higher.

Soufrière did not fail to give warnings of its coming eruption.
Rumblings were heard two days before the explosion. On May 5th, 1902,
fishermen who crossed the lake noticed that the water was disturbed
and agitated. On the Tuesday following, May 6th, great clouds were
thrown out during the afternoon, and the volcano was illumined by a
reddish glare of fire. The first explosion was heard shortly before
two o'clock on the following day and the volcano burst into activity.
The explosions, together with great discharges of pumice, ashes, and
boulders, followed one another rapidly. A column of steam was shot up
into the air for a height of 30,000 feet. The severest paroxysm came
shortly after ten A. M., and was succeeded by others nearly
as violent during the next few hours. By this time a reddish curtain
of clouds nearly shut out the island from view, and rapidly advanced
over the land and descended on the sea. This eruption caused a loss of
life of about 1,350.

This eruption of Mt. Soufrière was accompanied by the same tornadic
blast of glowing air. There was not, however, any single blast quite
as severe as that which attended the eruption of Pelée on May 8th,
1902.




CHAPTER XII

SOME OTHER NOTED VOLCANIC MOUNTAINS


Since the limits of our book will prevent any further description
of volcanic districts or regions, we must content ourselves with
descriptions of some of the noted of the remaining volcanoes, although
many we will thus omit contain great wonders.

As we have already seen from the description of Krakatoa, the island
of Java near which Krakatoa is situated is especially noted not only
for the great number of its volcanic mountains, but also for the
frequency and severity of their eruptions.

Perhaps the most destructive eruption of any of the volcanic mountains
of Java was of a volcanic mountain called Papandayang. This volcano,
situated on the southern coast of the island, is 7,034 feet in
height, and was in eruption in 1772. According to Scrope, from whom
the details of this eruption have been obtained, two others of the
many volcanoes on Java, situated at 184 and 352 geographical miles
respectively from Papandayang, broke out at the same time into active
eruption, although several intervening cones were undisturbed.

The eruption of Papandayang was of the explosive type, a large part
of the mountain being broken off by the great force of the eruption,
and its materials scattered far and wide over the surrounding country.
During this eruption forty villages with their inhabitants were
buried by great showers of ashes. An area of fifteen by six miles was
left in the shape of a huge pit by the great eruption. It was at
first believed by some that this pit was due to the actual sinking
in of the ground, but a more careful study has shown that it was in
reality caused by the great force of the eruption, being, in point
of fact, a vast explosive crater that was formed by the expulsion of
the materials that formerly filled it. Some idea of the great extent
of this eruption of Papandayang may be had by the size of this huge
crater that was six by fifteen miles in diameter.

Another great volcanic mountain in Java that had a terrific eruption
was Galungoon, or Galung Gung. According to Lyell, from whom the facts
of this eruption have been obtained, prior to this eruption the slopes
of the mountain were highly cultivated and densely populated. There
was a circular pit or crater on the summit of the mountain, but there
had been no traditions of any eruptions prior to 1822.

In July, 1822, the waters of the Kunir River, one of the small rivers
that flow down the slopes of the mountain, were observed to become
hot and turbid. On the 8th of October, 1822, a terrific explosion was
suddenly heard, accompanied by great earthquake shocks, when immense
columns of hot water and boiling mud, mixed with burning brimstone,
ashes, and lapilli, were thrown violently like a great waterspout from
the opening in the mountain, with such enormous violence that great
quantities fell across the River Tandoi, forty miles distant, while
the valleys in the neighborhood were filled with a burning torrent.
The rivers overflowed their banks and produced great destruction by
floods of burning and boiling materials that washed away all the
villages and cultivated fields in their path. During this eruption an
extended area was covered with boiling mud in which were completely
buried the bodies of many of those who perished.

So great was the violence with which the boiling mud, cinders, etc.,
were thrown out of the mountain that they entirely failed to fall on
many of the villages in the immediate neighborhood, while the more
remote villages were completely destroyed and buried out of sight
under the mud.

The first eruption continued for nearly five hours. During several
days following the eruption, torrents of rain fell, which produced
floods in the rivers that covered the country far and wide with thick
layers of mud.

Four days after the great eruption, that is, on the 12th of October,
1822, a second and still more violent eruption occurred, when immense
quantities of hot mud were again thrown out of the crater. Great
blocks of hardened lava called basalt were thrown a distance of seven
miles from the volcano. This eruption was accompanied by a violent
earthquake. It was during this eruption that a huge piece of the side
of the cone was blown out, not unlike the case of the Val del Bove on
Mt. Etna. The surrounding country was covered with mud. The immense
quantity of materials thus thrown out of the side of the mountain
produced changes in the courses of several rivers, thus causing great
floods which in the single night of October 12th drowned 2,000 people.
During these eruptions there were 114 villages destroyed, with a total
loss of life of about 4,000.

There is a volcanic mountain on the island of Sumbawa that is noted
for the very destructive eruption that occurred on it in April, 1815.
If you examine the map of the Sunda Islands chain, you will see that
the island of Sumbawa lies immediately east of a little island called
Lombock, about 200 miles east of Java.

This eruption of Sumbawa was of the most frightful violence, and,
indeed, with the exception of Krakatoa and Pelée, was one of the
greatest eruptions in historic times.

Like all great eruptions, that of Sumbawa gave plenty of signs of
its coming. During April, 1814, the volcano manifested considerable
increase in its activity, and ashes fell on the decks of vessels
sailing past the island.

The eruption began on April 5th, 1815, but reached its greatest
violence on the 11th and 12th of April. According to Lyell, the sound
of the explosion was heard at the island of Sumatra at a distance of
970 geographical miles towards the west, and in the opposite direction
it was heard for a distance of 720 miles. The destruction of life was
terrible. Out of a population of 12,000 in the province of Tomboro,
only twenty-six people escaped with their lives.

Like many other great eruptions the shooting upwards of the great
column of matter from the crater produced a violent whirlwind that
carried people, horses, cattle, and almost every movable object high
into the air, and tore up huge trees by their roots.

Immense quantities of ashes fell over the surrounding country, or were
carried towards Java to the west a distance of 300 miles, while on the
north they were carried towards Celebes for a distance of 217 miles.
Cinders covered the ocean towards the west two feet thick and several
miles in length, so that ships could hardly make their way through
them.

The darkness in Java produced by the dense ash cloud was greater than
had ever before been experienced with the single exception of the
great eruption of Krakatoa. A considerable quantity of this volcanic
dust was carried to the islands of Amboyna and Banda, the last named
island being at a distance of 800 miles east of the volcano.

This eruption of Sumbawa was attended by great lava streams that
covered vast areas of the land and afterwards poured into the sea.

As in the case of the explosive eruption of Krakatoa great waves were
produced in the ocean all along the coasts of Sumbawa, and surrounding
islands. The sea suddenly rose from two to twelve feet. A great wave
rushed up the mouths of the rivers, and at the town of Tomboro, on
the west side of Sumbawa, an area of land was sunk in the waters and
remained permanently covered by eighteen feet of water.

The most important of the still active volcanoes of Japan is
Assamayna. This mountain was in terrible eruption during the autumn of
1783, when dense showers of ashes thrown out of the crater darkened
the sky, turning the day into night, and, falling on the cultivated
fields around the mountain, changed them into deserts. During the
eruption some forty-eight villages were destroyed by showers of ashes
and red hot stones and thousands of the inhabitants were either killed
directly by the stones and ashes, or died from starvation, since their
fields were covered with ashes for miles around to a depth of from two
and a half to five feet.

Another terrible eruption in Japan was in the volcanic mountain of
Wunzen, or Onzen-Gatake. This occurred during 1791-93. During the last
eruption of this volcano, 53,000 people lost their lives, either by
reason of the eruption of the volcano, or by huge waves set up in the
ocean by an earthquake.




CHAPTER XIII

JORULLO, A YOUNG VOLCANIC MOUNTAIN


You must not suppose that when we speak of Jorullo as a young volcanic
mountain that we mean young in the sense that you or I might be called
young, but young as regards mountains; for Jorullo, now a great
mountain range, had no existence before the year 1759, and that would
make the mountain a little less than 150 years old, which so far as
mountains are concerned may properly be regarded as quite young.

The story of Jorullo is very interesting, and affords an excellent
example of the great scale on which modern volcanic eruptions take
place during historical times.

If you examine the map of Mexico on page 86 you will see that Jorullo
lies 170 miles southwest of the city of Mexico, and 108 miles from the
Pacific Ocean, which is the nearest large body of water. This mountain
is of especial interest because, if old traditions are to be believed,
it was thrown up during practically a single night. This wonderful
event took place on an elevated plain or plateau, called the Plain of
Malpais, that lies between 2,000 and 3,000 feet above the level of the
ocean. The plain was situated in a part of Mexico that was celebrated
for the growth of the finest cotton and indigo in the world. It
formed the large estate of a wealthy planter, Señor Pedro de Jorullo,
who lived at his ease as a wealthy planter is apt to do in tropical
countries like Mexico.

Jorullo's plantation was covered by an especially fertile soil, since
it was formed by the deposits of volcanic ashes, dust, tufa, etc.,
produced, most probably, by neighboring volcanoes long before man
appeared on the earth, for the plain of Malpais was bounded by hills
that were composed of volcanic materials. There had, however, been no
signs of volcanic activity in the neighborhood. It had indeed been
quiet, so far as volcanic eruptions were concerned, since the time of
the discovery of America by Columbus, until the middle of the last
century. The fertile fields of the Jorullo plantation were watered by
two rivers, or as we would probably call them, brooks, the Cuitamba
and the San Pedro.

Signs were not wanting of the coming calamity. During June, 1759,
subterranean sounds were heard of a low rumbling character, which
every now and then increased until they resembled in intensity the
sounds produced by the firing of large guns. These sounds were
accompanied by earthquake shocks that greatly terrified the people
and caused them to flee from their homes. Nothing, however, occurred,
so, becoming accustomed to the noises, the people returned to their
houses. The noises and tremblings ceased for over two months, until,
on the 29th of September, 1759, they were again heard, and a terrible
eruption began. A long fissure opened in the earth, extending
generally from northeast to southwest. From this fissure flames
burst out, fragments of burning rock and stone, together with large
quantities of ashes were thrown to great heights in the air, and were
followed by streams of molten rock. Six volcanic cones were formed
along the fissure. The highest of these cones is what now constitutes
the volcanic mountain of Jorullo, which then reached a height of at
least 1,600 feet above the level of the plain. From its cone were
thrown out great quantities of lava of the same type as that which
escaped from the craters of many volcanic islands such as Hawaii and
Iceland, namely, basaltic lavas. This eruption, which began on the
29th of September, 1759, continued until the month of February, 1760.

The account as above given was obtained by Humboldt, who visited the
country some fifty-six years after the eruption. This story was told
him by the Indians, but was also recorded in verse by a Jesuit priest,
Raphael Landiva, a native of Guatemala. According to the account given
Humboldt by the Indians, it appears that when a long time after the
eruptions had quieted down, they had returned to their old homes with
the hope of cultivating part of the grounds, they found the plains
still too hot to permit their living on them.

According to Lyell, there was around the base of the cone, spreading
from them as a centre over an area of some four square miles, a convex
mass, about 550 feet in height, most of the surface of which was
covered with thousands of small flattish conical mounds from six to
nine feet in height. These, together with numerous large fissures that
crossed the plain in different directions, served as points for the
escape of sulphur vapors, as well as for the vapors of hot water.

During the escape of lava from the craters in 1759, the molten rock,
spreading over the plain, ran into the channels of the river or brooks
before named, driving out the water. This water reappeared at the base
of the mountain in numerous hot springs.

Humboldt thought that the conical mountains had been lifted or raised
by the formation of huge bubbles formed under the lava, thus causing
it to assume a shape not unlike that of a huge bladder. This opinion,
however, has not been accepted by geologists at the present time.
Scrope points out that this was probably the origin of the little
conical mounds that covered the surface of the principal conical
mounds but was not, in all probability, the cause of the mound itself.
He says:

      "With regard to the disputed question as to the origin
      of the raised plain of the Malpais, M. de Saussure, the
      last and most trustworthy visitor, entirely confirms the
      opinion which I ventured to proclaim in 1825, that Humboldt
      was mistaken in supposing it to have been 'blown up from
      beneath like a bladder,' and that it is merely an ordinary
      current of lava, which, owing to its very imperfect
      liquidity at the time of its issue from the volcanic vent,
      as well as to the overflow of one sheet or stream upon
      another, had acquired great thickness about its source,
      gradually thinning off towards the outer limit of the
      elliptical area it covered."

If you have been able to follow the above you will see that Mr. Scrope
means that in his opinion the cone of Jorullo is a lava cone like
that we have already studied on Mt. Loa or Mt. Kilauea, or, in other
words, that the lava as it came out from the opening on the top of
Jorullo, flowed in all directions around the opening, thus building up
a mountain in the form of a flat lava cone.

Perhaps one of the reasons Humboldt had for believing the entire
elevation of Jorullo to be due to the formation of a huge bladder was
the fact that the plain on which the cone is situated, when struck,
gave out a sound as though there was a vast hollow space below it.
This was especially the case when the hoofs of the horses driven over
its surface produced sounds as though they were moving over the summit
of a hollow dome-like space below. But, as Lyell points out, this was
probably only due to the fact that the materials forming the cone were
very light and porous.

According to Burkhardt, a German mining engineer who visited Jorullo
in 1827, there appears to have been no other eruptions of the volcano
since the time of Humboldt's visit. Mr. Burkhardt descended to the
bottom of the crater and observed that small quantities of sulphurous
vapors were still escaping. The small cones or _hornitos_, however, on
the slopes had entirely ceased emitting steam. It appeared, too, that
the twenty-four years that had passed since the time of Humboldt's
visit, the rich soil of the surrounding country had permitted the
successful cultivation of some crops of sugar cane and indigo.

Russell appears to doubt the reliability of the information obtained
by Humboldt concerning Jorullo. He suggests that a poetical account
by the Jesuit missionary from whom Humboldt obtained much of his
information was not apt to possess marked scientific accuracy. While,
however, this may be true, yet to a certain extent it seems entirely
probable that the principal facts were as above given. The following
account as given by Humboldt, is taken from a translation made in the
early part of 1800:

      "The affrighted inhabitants fled to the mountains of
      Aguasarco. A tract of ground from three to four square
      miles in extent, which goes by the name of Malpays, rose up
      in the shape of a bladder. The bounds of this convulsion
      are still distinguishable in the fractural strata. The
      Malpays, near its edge, is only twelve metres above the
      old level of the plain called the Playas de Jorullo; but
      the convexity of the ground thus thrown up increases
      progressively towards the centre, to an elevation of 160
      metres (524.8 ft.).

      "Those who witnessed this catastrophe from the top of
      Aguasarco assert that flames were seen to issue forth
      for an extent of more than half a square league, that
      fragments of burning rocks were thrown up to prodigious
      heights, and that through a thick cloud of ashes,
      illuminated by the volcanic fire, the softened surface
      of the earth was seen to swell up like an agitated
      sea. The rivers of Cuitamba and San Pedro precipitated
      themselves into the burning chasms. The decomposition of
      the water contributed to invigorate the flames, which were
      distinguishable at the city of Pascuaro, though situated on
      very extensive table-land 1,400 metres (4,592 ft.) elevated
      above the plains of Las Playas de Jorullo. Eruptions of
      mud, and especially of strata of clay enveloping balls
      of decomposed basalt in concentrical layers, appeared to
      indicate that subterranean water had no small share in
      producing this extraordinary revolution. Thousands of small
      cones, from two to three metres in height, called by the
      indigenes ovens, issued forth from the Malpays....

      "In the midst of the ovens, six large masses, elevated from
      400 to 500 metres each above the old level of the plain,
      sprung up from a chasm, of which the direction is from
      N. N. E. to the S. S. E. This is the phenomenon of the
      Montenovo of Naples, several times repeated in a range of
      volcanic hills. The most elevated of these enormous masses,
      which bears some resemblance to the puys de l'Auvergne, is
      the great Volcan de Jorullo. It is continually burning,
      and has thrown up from the north side an immense quantity
      of scorified and basaltic lavas containing fragments of
      primitive rocks. These great eruptions of the central
      volcano continued till the month of February, 1760. In the
      following years they became gradually less frequent.... The
      roofs of the houses of Queretaro were then covered with
      ashes at a distance of more than forty-eight leagues in a
      straight line from the scene of the explosion. Although
      the subterranean fire now appears far from violent, and
      the Malpays and the great volcano begin to be covered with
      vegetation, we nevertheless found the ambient air heated to
      such a degree by the action of the small ovens, that the
      thermometer at a great distance from the surface and in the
      shade rose as high as 43° C." (109° 4' F.).




CHAPTER XIV

MID-OCEAN VOLCANIC ISLANDS


Besides the volcanoes we have already described, there are many others
situated in mid-ocean far from any continent. A brief description will
be given of a few of these.

All the three great central oceans, the Pacific, the Atlantic, and the
Indian, contain numerous volcanic islands, some of which rise many
thousands of feet above the general level.

We will begin with a description of some of the more important
volcanic islands of the Pacific. It was first pointed out by Kotzebue,
and afterwards by Darwin, that all the islands of the Pacific Ocean
can be divided into two great classes, the _high islands_ and the
_low islands_. All the high islands are of volcanic origin, while
the low islands are of coral formation. It is the opinion of Dana,
who has made a careful study of coral formations, especially in the
Pacific, that in all probability even the low islands of the Pacific
were originally volcanic, and that the deposits of coral had been made
along their shores after their volcanoes had become extinct.

The islands of the Pacific, like the shores of the continents and
most of their mountain ranges, extend in two great lines of trend, or
general direction, which intersect each other nearly at right angles.
These lines extend from the southeast to the northwest, and from the
northeast to the southwest respectively, those extending in a general
direction from southeast to northwest being the most common in the
Pacific.

Now, perhaps, the greatest number of the earth's volcanoes are
arranged along fissures, or cracks in the earth's crust. The craters
are situated along the cracks, the openings being kept clear at the
crater, and gradually closing elsewhere, probably by pressure. In
other words, most of the volcanoes follow one another along more or
less straight lines. For example, in the western part of South America
they follow the Andes Mountains. A similar arrangement exists in the
volcanoes of Central America, Mexico, and the United States. Now, this
is especially true of mid-ocean volcanoes of the Pacific which lie
along lines extending from southeast to northwest, or from northeast
to southwest, though mainly along the former.

Some of the volcanic islands of the Pacific have already been
described or referred to, as, for example, the Aleutian Islands,
which stretch in a curved line from the southwestern extremity of
the peninsula of Alaska to Kamtschatka on the coast of Asia. We have
already described the island of Hawaii, the great volcanoes of the
Sandwich Islands chain, and besides these there are in the North
Pacific the Ladrone Islands, lying east of the Philippines.

Some of the principal remaining islands are: the Fejee Islands, which
are volcanic, with numerous hot springs and craters. The Friendly
Islands, with the peak of Tafua, 2,138 feet high, an active volcano
with a large crater always burning, and two other volcanoes, Apia,
and Upala. Tahiti, to the east, is at present extinct. One of its
mountains, Orobena, said to be 10,000 feet high, has a crater on its
summit. The Marquesas, still further to the east, are also volcanic.
All of these islands lie generally in the lines of the northeast
trend.

The Tongan or New Zealand Island chain extends in the direction of
the northeast trend. This, as you will see, is the direction in which
the two islands of New Zealand extend. The Tongan Island chain is
continued to the south through Auckland and the Macquaire Islands to
58° S. Towards the north, in almost the same line, are the Kermadec
Islands near 30° S.

There are several active volcanoes in New Zealand. An explosive
eruption of Tarawera, in New Zealand, in 1883, continued for several
days, and was followed, three days afterwards, by an outburst in an
active volcano in the Bay of Plenty, and two months afterwards, by a
violent outburst in a volcano on the island of Ninafou in the Tongan
Islands.

Coming now to the Atlantic Ocean we find a number of volcanic
mountains in the deep waters near mid-ocean. The principal of these,
besides Iceland, are the Azores, the Canaries, Cape Verde Islands,
Ascension Island, St. Helena Island, and Tristan d'Acunha. The Peak
of Pico, in the Azores, rises to a height of 7,016 feet. The Peak
of Teneriffe, in the Canaries, reaches the height of 12,225 feet.
Teneriffe is a snow-capped mountain. It has a cone on its summit with
precipitous walls like Vesuvius. Sulphurous vapors are continually
formed at its summit, but no flames can be seen.

In the Cape Verde Islands is to be found the active volcanic mountain
of Fuego, rising 7,000 feet above the sea. It has a central cone that
has been broken down on one side like that of Somma on Vesuvius. Fuego
was in eruption in 1785, and also in 1799.

Ascension Island, south of the equator, is formed entirely of volcanic
materials. This island rises from an apparently granite floor on the
bed of the ocean, in water 12,000 feet deep.

St. Helena lies further to the south. It is an extinct volcano, and
has the remains of a crater on its summit with lava dikes in various
parts of the island.

Tristan d'Acunha is an isolated mountain that lies in the South
Atlantic, south of St. Helena, 1,500 miles from Africa, the nearest
land. It is an extinct volcano that rises from a depth of 12,150 feet
to a height of 7,000 feet above the sea. It has a truncated cone on
its summit and a lake of pure water in its old crater.

There are only a few volcanic islands in the Indian Ocean. Kerguelen
Island lies in the southern waters. St. Paul and Amsterdam to the
north, lying near 40° S. lat., as well as the Crozet Islands, are
extinct volcanoes.

In the Arctic Ocean is the volcanic island of Jan Mayen. In the
Antarctic Ocean, as far as is known, there are only two volcanoes,
Mt. Erebus and Mt. Terror. Mt. Erebus, 12,400 feet high, is an active
volcano. Mt. Terror, 10,990 feet high, is an extinct volcano.




CHAPTER XV

SUBMARINE VOLCANOES


A submarine volcano is a volcano that erupts on the bed of the ocean
with its crater covered by the waters. Many of the great volcanic
mountains of the world began as submarine volcanoes. A crater first
opened on the floor of the ocean, and lava escaping, was heaped up
around the opening, until it emerged above the surface as an island.
As we have seen, the island of Iceland is believed to have begun in
this way. Such, too, in all probability, was the origin of Hawaii,
Vesuvius, Etna, and Santorin.

But besides the volcanic mountains that were thrown up during the
geological past, there are others that have been called into existence
while man has been living on the earth. We will now describe a few
islands that have been formed in this manner by submarine volcanic
eruptions.

That volcanic eruptions, or at least something that greatly resembles
eruptions, occur on the bed of the ocean too far below the surface to
permit them to be directly seen from above, has been shown in a number
of cases where the captains of vessels have reported that in certain
parts of the ocean, jets of water, or steam, and pillars of flame have
been seen rising to great heights from the surface of the water, and
that in certain regions sulphurous smoke has also been seen. During
such occurrences, the water is agitated, as if it were being violently
boiled. Moreover, these parts of the ocean are shaken by severe
earthquake shocks.

Another evidence of submarine volcanic eruptions is to be found in
great quantities of ashes, scoriæ, or pumice stone, that are seen
spread out over the surface of the ocean after the commotions referred
to in the preceding paragraph. Still another proof is that parts of
the ocean whose waters were previously very deep are found to have
suddenly shoaled.

Of course, the best proof is the appearance of rocky reefs or small
islands thrown up above the surface of the water, especially where
volcanic cones appear. While in many cases the new islands thus thrown
up are subsequently washed away by the waves, yet some have continued
above the water.

One of the most noted instances of the formation of an island by a
submarine volcano was Sabrina, which was thrown up in 1811, in the
Atlantic Ocean, off the shores of St. Michael in the Azores Islands.
Sabrina had a cone that was 300 feet in height. It did not long remain
above the waters, however, being soon washed away by the waves. It is
interesting to note that in the same part of the ocean where Sabrina
appeared, other islands have appeared and disappeared, at times long
before 1811; that is, during the year 1691, as well as during 1720.

Another instance of a submarine island is Graham's Island, that was
thrown up in 1831, in the Mediterranean Sea, between the west coast
of Sicily and the nearest part of Africa, on which ancient Carthage
was situated. The part of the sea where the island was thrown up had
previously a depth of 600 feet.

The general appearance of Graham's Island is represented in Fig. 22.

Graham's Island was formed by accumulations of loose scoria and
cinders, together with blocks of lava and fragments of limestone. It
reached a height of 200 feet above the water, but only remained above
the surface for a few months, when it was washed away, leaving a
submarine bank some twelve miles in width, that was covered by water
of about 150 feet, but which, however, increased rapidly in depth
towards the edge until depths of from 1,200 to 2,000 feet were reached.

[Illustration: FIG. 22. GRAHAM'S ISLAND--A RECENT VOLCANIC
ISLAND]

According to Lyell, on the 28th of June, 1831, before Graham's Island
appeared, a ship passing over this portion of the sea felt severe
earthquake shocks. On July 10th of the same year, the captain of a
vessel from Sicily reported that as he passed near this part of the
Mediterranean, a column of water, 800 yards in circumference, was seen
to rise from the sea to a height of sixty feet, and that afterwards a
column of steam rising to a height of 1,800 feet was seen in the same
place. On again passing the same region on July 18th, this captain
found a small island about twelve feet in height, with a crater in
its centre, that was throwing out volcanic materials, together with
immense masses of vapor.

The island thus formed grew rapidly, both in size and height. When
visited at the end of July, it had attained a height of from fifty to
ninety feet, and was three-quarters of a mile in circumference. By
August 4th, it had reached a height of 200 feet, and was then some
three miles in circumference. From this time, however, the island
began to decrease in size, as the waves began to wash it away. By
August 25th, it was only two miles in circumference. On September
3d, it had decreased to three-fifths of a mile in circumference, and
continued to decrease until it entirely disappeared, so that in the
year 1832, there were, according to measurements, some 150 feet of
water over its former site.

The Mediterranean Sea between Sicily and Greece is also especially
liable to submarine activity. New islands appear and disappear so
frequently that in this region they are almost regarded as common
phenomena.

There are many other parts of the ocean where submarine volcanic
eruptions are common. This is especially the case in the narrowest
part of the Atlantic Ocean between Africa and South America. Here
there is a region situated partly above the equator, though for the
greater part south of the equator, frequently visited by submarine
eruptions, that are accompanied by earthquakes, by the agitation of
the water, by the appearance of floating masses of ashes and scoriæ,
as well as by columns of steam or smoke. Floating masses of ashes and
scoriæ sometimes occur so thick as to retard the progress of vessels.

But what forms, perhaps, one of the best instances of a large island
formed by submarine eruptions during historical times, is Bogosloff
Island in Behring Sea, some forty miles west of Unalaska Island. This
island, the position of which is seen on the accompanying map, is
known to the Russians as Ioanna Bogoslova, or St. John the Theologian.
It is situated in lat. 53° 58' N., long. 168° west. It is said that
during the year 1795, some of the natives of Unalaska Island saw what
they thought was a fog in the neighborhood of a small rock, which they
had known for a long time to project above the sea in these waters.
This rock was marked on some Russian chart dated 1768-69. It was seen
by Captain Cooke, in 1778, and was named by him Ship Rock.

But it was not a fog that the Unalaskans had seen in the neighborhood
of Ship Rock; for, to their great surprise, the fog continued in sight
although everywhere else the air was quite clear. Of course, this
was a great mystery to the people. During the spring of 1796, one of
them, who possessed either greater curiosity than the rest, or greater
courage, or both, visited the rock. He returned, telling the strange
story that all the ocean around the rock was boiling, and that the
mist or fog was caused by the rising steam. What was taking place was
a submarine eruption. During May, 1796, sufficient matter had been
brought up from below to increase greatly the area of the small rock.

[Illustration: FIG. 23. ALEUTIAN ISLANDS]

During later years several attempts have been made to visit Bogosloff
Island. For example, the island was visited during 1872 and 1873,
when it was found to have increased in height to 850 feet. But no
appearance of any volcanic crater was to be seen.

During October, 1883, a great volcanic eruption occurred there.
Considerable changes were produced in its shape, as well as in the
depth of the surrounding water. During this eruption, clouds of steam
completely hid the island. Great quantities of ashes obscured the
light of the sun. After the eruption, a new island was thrown up near
the old one, in a place where the water had previously been deep
enough for the ready passage of ships. The new island was about half a
mile from the old one. It was conical in form, from 500 to 800 feet in
height, and about three-quarters of a mile in diameter.

The new island was visited in 1884 by the U. S. Revenue Marine Steamer
_Corwin_. Lieutenant Cartwell, who visited the island at this time,
described it as follows:

      "The sides of New Bogosloff rise with a gentle slope to the
      crater. The ascent at first appears easy, but a thin layer
      of ashes, formed into a crust by the action of rain and
      moisture, is not strong enough to sustain a man's weight.
      At every step my feet crushed through the outer covering
      and I sank at first ankle-deep and later on knee-deep into
      a soft, almost impalpable dust which arose in clouds and
      nearly suffocated me. As the summit was reached, the heat
      of the ashes become almost unbearable, and I was forced
      to continue the ascent by picking my way over rocks whose
      surfaces being exposed to the air, were somewhat cooled and
      afforded a more secure foothold.

      "On all sides of the cone there are openings through
      which steam escaped with more or less energy. I observed
      from some vents the steam was emitted at regular
      intervals, while from others it issued with no perceptible
      intermission. Around each vent there was a thick deposit of
      sulphur, which gave off suffocating vapors."




CHAPTER XVI

DISTRIBUTION OF THE EARTH'S VOLCANOES


Having now considered at some length the principal volcanoes of the
earth, and endeavored to obtain some idea of the many wonders they
exhibit, especially as regards the vast quantities of material they
bring from the inside of the earth, as well as the great force with
which they sometimes throw these materials out of their craters, it
will be well to point out where such volcanoes are to be found.

It may have seemed to you, when you have carefully followed what has
been said about the earth's volcanoes, that they are to be found
pretty nearly everywhere, at least so far as latitude is concerned;
and in this supposition you are correct; for there are volcanoes in
the Arctic Ocean, as in the volcanic island of Jan Mayen between
Iceland and Spitzbergen, there are Mt. Erebus and Mt. Terror in the
Antarctic Ocean, besides very numerous volcanoes in the Atlantic,
Pacific, and Indian Oceans, and their shores in both the temperate and
the torrid zones.

There is, however, one thing that you have probably especially
noticed and that is that volcanoes are seldom found at very great
distances from the ocean, except on some of its arms or seas, such
as the Mediterranean Sea. I do not mean by this that all the earth's
volcanoes are either situated directly on the coast of the continents
or on islands, since, in such a large body as the earth, a distance of
a few hundred miles from the ocean is hardly to be regarded as being
very far from it. But it is true that all the earth's volcanoes are
either situated on the coasts of the continents, or on islands, and,
moreover, they are situated to a greater or less extent along lines,
which, as we have already pointed out, are believed to mark weak
portions of the earth's crust that have been fissured or fractured.

In order that you may have some idea of this distribution, I think it
will be well to give you a number of interesting facts that have been
pointed out by Dana. According to this authority, there are something
in the neighborhood of 300 active volcanoes on the earth. Of these,
no less than five-sixths, or 250, lie either on the borders of the
Pacific Ocean, or on some of its many islands. Thirty-nine either
lie within or on the borders of the Atlantic, of which thirteen are
in Iceland, or near the Arctic Circle, three in the Canaries, seven
in the Mediterranean Sea, six in the Lesser Antilles, and ten in
the Atlantic Oceanic Islands. The Indian Ocean contains only a few
active volcanoes. There are, however, a much greater number of extinct
volcanoes, which may at any time again become active.

The following is the distribution of the earth's volcanoes as given
by Dana. As you will see, from an inspection of Fig. 24, all of the
regions of volcanoes lie either on the borders of the continents, or
on islands in the oceans. The districts are as follows:

1. _Scattered Over the Pacific Ocean._--This district includes the
following active volcanoes; i. e., the Hawaiian Islands, nearly in
mid-ocean, almost directly below the Tropic of Cancer; in the west
central parts of the South Pacific; in the New Hebrides; in the
Friendly Islands, the Tongan or New Zealand Islands, in the Santa Cruz
Islands, and in the Ladrones.

[Illustration: FIG. 24. MAP OF THE WORLD, SHOWING LOCATION OF
ACTIVE AND RECENTLY EXTINCT VOLCANOES]

2. _On the Borders of the Pacific._--This district includes the
volcanoes that extend from the southern part of South America
at intervals along the Andes Mountain range. Of these there are
thirty-two in Chile, seven or eight in Bolivia and Southern Peru;
about twenty in the neighborhood of Quito. Further north there are
thirty-nine in Central America, and seven in Mexico. Proceeding
northwards through the United States, there are a number of volcanic
mountains, generally extinct, in portions of the Sierra Nevadas
and Cascade Ranges. Probably a number of volcanic mountains exist
in portions of Canada lying between the northern boundaries of the
United States and Alaska, and a number in Alaska; some twenty-one
volcanic mountains in the Aleutian Islands; some fifteen or twenty
in Kamtschatka; thirteen in the Kuriles; some twenty-five or thirty
in Japan and the neighboring islands; some fifteen or twenty in the
Philippines; several along the northern coasts of New Guinea; a number
in New Zealand and south of Cape Horn; the volcanoes of the Deception
Island with its hot springs, and also in the South Shetlands 62° 30' S.

3. _In the Indian Ocean._--On the western border of the Indian Ocean
there are a few volcanoes in Madagascar; in the Island of Bourbon;
Mauritius; the Comoro Islands; and in Kerguelen Land on the south.
There are also volcanoes on the western border of the Indian Ocean
where the lofty peak of Kilima Ndjro, 18,000 feet, is volcanic.

4. _Over the Seas that Separate the Northern and the Southern
Continents and in their Vicinity._--This is an especially active
region of volcanoes. For the sake of convenience the continents of the
world are sometimes divided into three pairs or double continents;
namely, North and South America, connected by the Isthmus of Panama;
Europe and Africa, connected by the Isthmus of Suez; and Australia and
Asia, completely separated by a sunken isthmus, the summits of which
form the Sunda Island chain. In the first of these regions we have the
very active group of the West Indies, where there are ten volcanic
islands. In the second pair of double continents we have the volcanoes
of the Mediterranean and Red Seas, and their borders, such as Sicily,
Vesuvius, and other parts of Italy, Spain, Germany, the Grecian
Archipelago, Asia Minor, and extending eastward through the Caspian,
Mt. Ararat, Demavend, on the south shores of the Caspian, Mt. Ararat,
and some few others along the borders of the Red Sea.

In the East Indies we find the most intense centre of volcanic
activity in the world. Here there are some 200 volcanoes of which
there are nearly fifty in Java alone, more than half of which are
still active. There are nearly as many volcanoes in Sumatra, and many
in the small islands near Borneo, the Philippines, etc.

5. _On the Borders of the Atlantic and Elsewhere._--It is an
interesting fact that there are no volcanoes on the eastern borders
of the Atlantic north of the West Indies Island chain. In the South
Atlantic the only volcano on the borders is one of the Cameroons
Mountains. In the Atlantic Ocean we have Iceland, the Azores, the
Canaries, Cape Verde, Ascension, St. Helena, and Tristan d'Acunha.

This curious distribution of the volcanoes of the world near the
oceanic waters appears to be dependent rather on the very early shapes
of the continents and the ocean beds than on their present shapes.




CHAPTER XVII

VOLCANOES OF THE GEOLOGICAL PAST


The question is often asked whether the volcanic eruptions of the
geological past were not much more violent and destructive than the
volcanoes of the present time. Now, while this is a matter that
properly belongs to the subject of geology, and will be treated at
greater length in the Wonder Book on Geology, yet a short mention
should be made of it here.

It is the opinion of Dana that while there have been volcanoes during
the different geological ages, yet volcanic activity has increased
through the geological past until the age that immediately preceded
the appearance of man on the earth. He thinks there is no reason for
believing that there were any very great volcanic eruptions during the
earliest geological time known as the Archæic. Dana speaks as follows
concerning this:

      "In this connection it is an instructive fact that in
      eastern North America, at epochs when there was the
      greatest amount of friction and crushing ... those of the
      making of the Green Mountains and the Appalachians ... no
      volcanoes were made, and little took place in the way of
      eruptions through fissures."

On the other hand, Prestwich seems inclined to think that the absence
of well-marked cones of volcanic material in the rock of the older
geological ages is not to be regarded as proof that no eruptions then
took place, since the very great amount of erosion that occurred
between that time and the Tertiary Age before the appearance of man,
would, probably, have completely obliterated any cones, and even the
volcanic materials would have undergone such changes as completely to
alter their general character. He agrees, however, with Dana that,
probably, the most violent and explosive volcanoes of the geological
ages have been those of the Tertiary Age.

Without, however, attempting anything more than a brief reference to
the volcanoes of the geological past, it may be said that many of the
more important of the active volcanoes of the earth's present time
were begun in the Tertiary Age. Mt. Etna, Vesuvius, and Mt. Hecla are
believed to have commenced at this time.

There is an interesting region of geological volcanoes in the
neighborhood of Auvergne in Central France. Here they occur in three
separate groups that extend over a high granite platform from north
to south for a distance of about 100 miles, and from twenty to eighty
miles from east to west. The eruptions began in the earlier portions
of the Tertiary Age, and continued down to the latter periods of
prehistoric times. Some of these volcanic craters remain to-day almost
as unaffected by erosion as if they had been formed but recently.

Other regions of geological volcanoes are to be found in parts of
Spain near the foot of the Pyrenees Mountains, in parts of Italy and
Germany, as well as in regions in the Caucasus Mountains.

In Asia Minor there exists a group of almost thirty extinct volcanoes
in the neighborhood of the Gulf of Smyrna. Both Little and Great
Ararat contain volcanic cones: that in the latter mountain was active
during historical times. There are also extensive volcanic districts
in the Taurus Mountains. In addition to these there are groups of
extinct volcanoes in portions of Central Asia.

Aden, on the Red Sea, is the centre of an extensive volcanic district.
Indeed, on both shores of the Red Sea there are a few volcanoes that
are still active, while in Sinai, and in the districts of the south,
there are several extinct craters.

But it is in the New World, especially on the Pacific coast of
North America, that volcanic activity was especially great during
the geological past. There is a district containing volcanic rocks
that extends through various parts of western North America, from
New Mexico and North California, to Oregon and British Columbia.
This district has a width of from eighty to 200 miles, and a length
of not quite 800 miles. This great area of nearly 150,000 square
miles is covered with great sheets of volcanic rocks except where
mountain ranges rise from them, or where the rivers have cut deep
valleys through them. In portions of California and New Mexico these
plateaus rise to heights of from 8,000 to 10,000 feet, while in parts
of Colorado, where they form huge dome-like mountains, they reach a
thickness of 14,000 feet. In Oregon the sheet of lava is 2,000 feet
thick, and, indeed, in some places, is estimated to have a depth of
7,000 feet.

In the opinion of nearly all American geologists these great lava
flows in western North America were not of the type known as crater
eruptions, but were what are called fissure eruptions. Some of them
are believed to have occurred during geological times as early as the
Eocene. Prestwich, however, is of the opinion that the eruptions of
the past in these portions of the world were not confined to fissure
eruptions, but that crater eruptions also occurred; and that it was
towards the close of the Tertiary Age that crater eruptions occurred
with great lava flows. Indeed, as we have seen, in portions of Utah
and the neighborhood the remains of true craters can be found.

Besides the above there are evidences of geological volcanoes of still
older times. In portions of Deccan, in southern Hindostan, there is an
immense plateau formed of trap rock, that extends from east to west
for a distance of 400 miles, and from north to south through from 700
to 800 miles. This district, with an area of almost 200,000 square
miles, is covered with a vast lava sheet. It was, in the opinion of
Prestwich, from whom many of the facts of the geological volcanic
eruptions have been obtained, probably still more extensive. The
plateau of Deccan rises gradually from the east to the west, where, in
some parts of the Ghauts Mountains, it reaches a height of from 4,000
to 5,000 feet.

One of the greatest of these prehistoric volcanoes of Scotland was a
volcano in the Isle of Mull in the Hebrides. This volcano was probably
nearly thirty miles across at its base, and was from 10,000 to 12,000
feet high. It is now only 3,172 feet in height.

According to Judd the Island of Skye in Inverness-shire is the remains
of a volcano that was active in Tertiary times, probably many millions
of years ago. This volcano was very large, probably about thirty miles
across at its base, with a height of perhaps as great as 12,000 or
15,000 feet. Now there are only left some granite and other similar
rocks that form the Red Mountains and Coolim Hills of Skye that reach
about 3,000 feet above the sea level.

There are many other parts of the world containing volcanoes that were
active during the geological past. The above, however, is as far as we
can describe such volcanoes in this book.




CHAPTER XVIII

LAPLACE'S NEBULAR HYPOTHESIS


LaPlace's nebular hypothesis is the name given to an ingenious
hypothesis proposed by LaPlace, a celebrated French astronomer, in an
endeavor to explain how the solar system has been evolved.

You will notice that this is called a hypothesis and not a theory.
The word hypothesis is properly applied to a more or less intelligent
guess or assumption, that has been made for the purpose of trying
to find out in the cause of any natural phenomenon. A theory is an
expression of a physical truth based on natural laws and principles
that have been independently established. A theory, therefore, is much
more complete than a hypothesis. A hypothesis, as Silliman remarks,
bears the same relation to a theory or law, that a scaffolding does to
a completed building, since it forms a convenient means for erecting
the building. LaPlace's work is properly called a hypothesis, because
it is not to be considered as any more than a means for enabling one
intelligently to inquire into the probable manner in which the solar
system has reached its present condition, by gradual steps or stages
during the almost inconceivable length of time since its creation.

Before describing LaPlace's hypothesis it will be necessary to give
you some ideas concerning what is known by astronomers as the solar
system.

The solar system consists of the sun, and the eight large bodies
called planets that revolve around the sun. It also includes a number
of moons or satellites revolving around the planets, a number of small
bodies, called planetoids or asteroids, together with numerous comets
and meteorites. Besides these there is probably a system of meteoric
bodies that are believed to revolve around the sun, and to produce, by
the reflection of the light from their surfaces, what is known as the
_zodiacal light_.

The principal bodies of the solar system are the planets. These
constitute eight large bodies named in their order from the sun,
beginning with the nearest: Mercury, Venus, Earth, Mars, Jupiter,
Saturn, Uranus, and Neptune. The last four planets, Jupiter, Saturn,
Uranus, and Neptune are much larger than the others, and are therefore
known as the _major planets_ in order to distinguish them from
Mercury, Venus, Earth, and Mars, which are called the _minor planets_.
You can remember the order in which the last three planets come by
their initial letter, S-aturn, U-ranus, and N-eptune, spelling the
word SUN, around which they all revolve.

It may be interesting to state here that the ancients knew of seven
only of these planets. Since, as they asserted, there were only seven
days in the week, and seven openings into the head; i. e., two for the
eyes, two for the nostrils, two for the ears, and one for the mouth,
it was natural that there should be but seven planets. During later
years, however, an eighth planet was discovered and named Neptune. It
would be interesting to explain to you how the position of this planet
was reasoned out by mathematical calculations, that is, in other
words, how, as a result of such calculations, an astronomer was told
that if he would point his telescope to a certain part of the heavens
he would discover a new planet. He did this and located the planet
Neptune. However interesting this story may be it belongs properly
to astronomy, and will be described in full in the Wonder Book of
Astronomy.

In the opinion of some astronomers it is quite probable that a ninth
planet will be found far beyond the orbit of Neptune. There may also
be some additional planets discovered between Mercury and the Sun.

Besides the eight known planets there exist, somewhere between the
orbits of Mars and Jupiter, many smaller planets called _asteroids_,
or _minor planets_. A long time ago it was pointed out by Bode that
a curious relation exists between the distances of the planets from
the sun. This relation or law is generally known, after the name of
the astronomer who first called attention to it, as _Bode's Law_.
No reason has been discovered for this arrangement of the planets,
so that Bode's Law may be regarded as empirical. It may, however,
be mentioned here that the distances of all the planets from the
sun agrees with the law very closely, with the single exception of
Neptune, which is quite at variance with the law.

It was noticed at an early date, that a gap existed between Mars
and Jupiter, so that astronomers began to believe that there was
probably a missing planet in that space, and this belief was greatly
strengthened when Neptune was discovered in 1781. Without going any
further into this story in this book, it may be said that it is the
general opinion of astronomers that the planetoids or asteroids were
formed possibly from the fragments of the missing planet, or, more
probably, from the breaking up of some of the outer rings on the
planet Mars.

The distances of the planets from the central sun vary from the
nearest planet, Mercury, which is about 36,000,000 miles from the sun,
to the furthest, or Neptune, which is 2,766,000,000 miles from the sun.

All the major planets have a single moon, or more, revolving around
them. For example, Jupiter has four moons; Uranus, six; Saturn, eight;
Neptune, one. As to the minor planets, Mars has two moons; and, as far
as is known, neither Mercury or Venus has a moon. Our earth has one
moon, but, as we shall afterwards see, this is not to be regarded as
a moon or satellite of the earth, but rather as a twin planet to the
earth.

LaPlace's nebular hypothesis was proposed by LaPlace during the year
1796. While there are many objections that can be brought against
it, since it fails to account for all of the phenomena of the solar
system, yet it is a significant fact now, in the year 1907, nearly a
century and a quarter after the hypothesis was first announced, that
although modified in many respects, there has not been any hypothesis
proposed to entirely replace it.

While the nebular hypothesis of LaPlace is necessarily a matter that
belongs to astronomy, yet it will be advisable to consider it here,
since it explains the source of the original heat of both the earth
and the moon, which we believe is the true cause of volcanoes.

In his nebular hypothesis, LaPlace assumes that all the materials of
which the solar system is formed, were originally scattered throughout
space in the shape of an exceedingly rare form of matter known as
nebulous matter. He points out that if it be granted that this medium
began to accumulate around a common centre, so as to form a huge globe
or sphere, and if a motion of rotation on its axis from west to east
were given to this sphere that, on strictly mechanical principles, a
system of heavenly bodies corresponding to the solar system might have
been evolved. Let us, therefore, try to understand how this might have
been brought about.

The nebulous matter that LaPlace assumed originally constituted all
the matter in the solar system, was highly heated gaseous matter. In
other words, it consisted of ordinary matter raised to a very high
temperature; LaPlace thought at a temperature very much hotter than
that of the sun.

As this great mass of matter commenced to cool, it began to collect
around a centre and slowly rotate. Its contraction or shrinkage, while
cooling, must have caused an increase in the speed with which it spun
around or rotated on its axis. At first it spun but sluggishly, but as
it cooled and began to shrink this rate of rotation began slowly to
increase.

Now you must bear in mind that the huge rotating mass, as imagined
by LaPlace, was very many times larger than the size of our present
sun. Indeed, instead of having a diameter of only 866,500 miles, its
temperature was so high that the nebulous matter of which it was
composed had expanded it so much that it extended far beyond the orbit
of Neptune, or had a diameter twice as great as 2,766,000,000 miles.

As the huge mass continued to shrink or contract, its rotation
began to gradually increase until at last its centrifugal force was
sufficiently great to cause it to bulge out at the equator, so as
at last to separate a ring of gaseous matter. This ring was left
behind by the sun, as it continued cooling, and formed the first
planet that was born into the solar system. The ring might have
continued to revolve around the sun for a time, and would, of course,
revolve in the same direction as that in which the sun was rotating,
that is, from west to east. Eventually, however, it broke up into
smaller fragments, that afterwards collected in a single body, and,
assuming a globe-like shape of the planet, formed the planet Neptune.
Necessarily, too, the planet so formed not only would revolve in its
orbit from west to east in the same direction in which the sun was
revolving on its axis, but would also rotate or spin on its axis in
the same direction.

After, in this way, throwing off the first planet, the central sun
continued to cool and grow smaller, until the increase in the rate
of its rotation was again such as to permit its centrifugal force to
form a second ring around its equator, which being left as the sun
continued to contract, gave rise to another planet, or to Uranus, and
so on until the four major planets and the four minor planets were
born.

According to this hypothesis, the planet that was first born was the
planet that is farthest from the sun, that is, Neptune, and the planet
last born must have been the nearest planet, Mercury.

But while all this planet forming was going on, the separate planets
also continued to shrink, and, therefore, began to rotate more rapidly
on their axes. Under the influence of the centrifugal force, ring-like
masses began to form around their equators, and these masses left by
the planet constituted their moons or satellites. As you can see,
according to this hypothesis, just as the planets would all revolve in
their orbits from west to east, and rotate on their axes in the same
direction as the sun, so, too, the moons or satellites of the planets
would also rotate on their axes, from east to west, and revolve in
their orbits in the same direction.

In order to show the extent to which LaPlace's nebular hypothesis
explains the peculiarities of the solar system, we must inquire what
are the most important of these peculiarities. We will take these from
Young's general book on Astronomy, from which most of the facts in
this chapter have been condensed. They are as follows:

The orbits of nearly all the planets and their satellites are nearly
circular; they are all in the same plane; and all revolve in the same
direction. They are, moreover, with the single exception of Neptune,
arranged at distances from the sun in accordance with Bode's Law.

All the planets increase in both directions, towards and from the sun,
in density from Saturn, the least dense.

All the planets, with the exception probably of Uranus, rotate in a
plane that is nearly the same as the plane of the orbit in which they
revolve. Moreover, with the exception of probably both Uranus and
Neptune, all the planets rotate in the same direction as that in which
they revolve.

The satellites revolve in orbits whose planes nearly coincide with the
plane of the planets' rotation, while the direction of the revolution
of the satellites is the same as that in which their planets revolve.

Finally, the largest planets rotate most swiftly.

Now, LaPlace's nebular hypothesis explains nearly all of the above
facts. The following modifications of the hypothesis, however, are
necessary. Let us briefly examine some of these modifications.

In the first place it can be shown that the original nebulous mass
instead of being at a higher temperature than that of the sun was
probably at a much lower temperature, since the condensation of
the gaseous matter must have increased the temperature. Instead,
therefore, of the original nebulous mass being purely gaseous it was,
as Young expressed it: "Rather a cloud of ice cold meteoric dust than
an incandescent gas or a fire mist." Or in other words, the original
nebulous mass from which the solar system was evolved, consisted of
finely divided particles of solid or liquid matter surrounded by an
envelope of permanent gaseous matter.

A doubt, too, has been raised as regards the manner in which the
planets were liberated from the central sun. Instead of separating in
the form of a regular ring, it has been thought that probably in most
cases this separation assumed the shape of a lump. It might, however,
have occurred at times in the ring-like form as may be seen in the
case of the planet Saturn.

Again, instead of the outer rings being separated first, and the
others in regular order, so that the outer planets are much the older,
it would seem possible, or, as Young states, even probable, that
several of the planets may be of the same or nearly the same age, as
they would be if more than one ring had been separated at one time,
or, indeed, several planets may have been formed from different zones
of a single ring.

As you will see, LaPlace's nebular hypothesis assumes that both
sun and moon were in a highly heated condition when they were
separated from the nebulous sun, so that we can understand that the
former molten condition of their interiors was due to the heat they
originally possessed.




CHAPTER XIX

THE EARTH'S HEATED INTERIOR, THE CAUSE OF VOLCANOES


As we have already seen, the nebular hypothesis of LaPlace would seem
to make it more than probable that the earth was originally in a
highly heated condition, and only reached its present state after long
cooling. While this cooling has gone on for probably millions upon
millions of years both before and during the geological past, yet in
the opinion of perhaps the best geologists the interior of the earth
is still very hot, only the outer portions or crust having hardened by
loss of heat.

That there is a very hot region somewhere inside the earth is evident,
since from some place or places below the surface there come out
the immense streams of lava that, continuing to flow at irregular
intervals, have at last built up such great masses of land as the
island of Hawaii, the still greater island of Iceland, the even
greater lava fields of the western United States, and the great
plateau of the Deccan in southern Hindustan.

It certainly must have required a great quantity of lava to build up
an island like Hawaii with its area of fully 40,000 square miles, for
the highest point on the summit of Mt. Kea reaches 13,805 feet above
the level of the sea, and, moreover, stands on the bed of the Pacific
Ocean in water fully 12,000 feet deep.

But Iceland is only one of many similar cases. Volcanoes are to
be found in practically all parts of the earth, not only in the
equatorial regions, where they are especially numerous, but also in
the frigid and temperate zones. We must also remember the immense lava
streams that are known to have come from the interior during the great
fissure eruptions of the geological past. When all these facts are
taken into consideration, it would certainly seem that there is only
one source sufficiently great to supply this wonderful demand, and
that is the entire inside of the earth.

But entirely apart from volcanic phenomena there are other proofs that
the entire interior of the earth is in a highly heated condition. The
differences of temperature caused by the sun during day and night
do not affect the earth much below a depth of three feet, while the
differences of temperature between summer and winter do not extend
much further below the surface than forty feet. Below these depths, in
all parts of the earth, the temperature of the crust rises at a rate,
which, although not uniform, yet is not far from an increase of one
degree of the Fahrenheit thermometer scale for every fifty or sixty
feet of descent.

If the above rate of increase continues uniform the temperature of
the crust would be sufficiently hot to boil water at a distance of
about 8,000 feet below the surface, while at a depth of about thirty
miles the temperature would be sufficiently high to melt all known
substances at ordinary conditions of atmospheric pressure; that is, to
melt all known substances if they were subjected to such a temperature
at the level of the sea.

In considering the above we must not lose sight of the fact that this
increase in temperature with descent below the surface of the earth's
crust occurs, not only in places where there are volcanoes, but over
all parts of the earth, thus seeming to point out that there is
something hot below the surface which fills the entire inside of the
earth.

It is true the greatest distance to which man has actually gone down
through the earth's crust is but a few miles. We do not, therefore,
know by actual experience that the interior is anywhere in a fused
condition, yet the escape of lava or molten rocks in all latitudes,
and in the enormous quantities referred to above, seems to show that
the entire inside of the earth is at a temperature sufficiently high
to melt all known substances under ordinary conditions.

It may be interesting in this connection to examine some of the proofs
of this increase in temperature with descent below the surface. The
following figures are given by Dana:

Borings to great depths have been made in various parts of the earth,
both for artesian wells as well as for the shafts of mines. After
passing the line of invariable temperature, the rate of increase for a
total distance of 4,000 feet below the surface is in the neighborhood
of from one degree for fifty-five to sixty feet, or an average of
fifty-seven and a half feet for each degree of heat. In the case of
the deep artesian well bored at Grenelle, Paris, where a temperature
of eighty-five degrees Fahrenheit was reached at a distance of 2,000
feet, the rate of increase was somewhat more rapid, being one degree
Fahrenheit for every sixty feet.

In a deep well bored in a salt mine at Neusalzwerk, Prussia, a depth
of 2,200 feet showed a temperature of ninety-one degrees Fahrenheit at
the bottom. This was at the rate of one degree for every fifty feet of
descent. At Schladenbach, in Prussia, a well has been dug to the depth
of 5,735 feet with a temperature of 134° F. A boring at Wheeling, in
West Virginia, reached a depth of 4,500 feet, 3,700 feet below the
level of the sea. Here the rate of increase of temperature in the
upper half was one degree Fahrenheit for every eighty feet, and in
the lower half of one degree for every sixty feet.

It must not be supposed because the rate of increase of temperature is
not uniform that the argument of a highly heated interior is weakened.
On the contrary, it would be very surprising if the rate continued
uniform; for it is evident that the conducting power of different
materials in the earth's crust for heat must necessarily make a great
difference in the rate at which heat should increase, as we go farther
down into the earth. This is so important a matter that I will explain
it at somewhat greater length.

Let us suppose that instead of the highly heated interior of the
earth, we consider the simple case of a hot stove, the doors or other
openings into which are closed so that it is impossible to see the
red hot coals inside. Now, suppose holes were bored in the sides of
this stove not deep enough to reach the red hot mass within, and that
tightly fitting rods or plugs all of the same length and thickness,
but of different kinds of materials such as wood, earthenware, glass,
iron, copper, silver, and gold, etc., were so placed in the holes as
to tightly fit them. Now, under these circumstances the end of all
the plugs would be at the same distance from the heated inside. They
would not, however, by any means show the same temperatures, the
metallic rods would be too hot to touch, while the end of the piece
of wood would hardly be hot enough to burn the hand when held against
it. The piece of glass and earthenware though less cool would be much
less hot than the different rods of metals. Their temperatures would
be necessarily affected by their conducting power for heat. The wood,
the glass, and the earthenware being poorer conductors than the metals
would show much lower temperatures.

Now, the same thing is true with the different materials that
constitute the rocks of the earth's crust. Some of these are much
better conductors of heat than others, so that the rate of increase of
temperature with descent below the surface must necessarily vary with
the kind of materials that form the crust of different parts of the
earth.

You may, therefore, safely conclude that the entire interior of the
earth is in a highly heated condition, and that the source of this
heat is to be traced to the heat the earth originally possessed when,
in accordance to the nebular hypothesis of LaPlace, it was separated
from the sun which gave birth to it, that the present crust of the
earth has been formed on the outside by the loss of a portion of this
heat.

The rapidity with which a body cools, depends, among other things,
on the difference between its temperature and that of the medium in
which it is placed. The greater this difference of temperature the
greater the rapidity of cooling. Careful measurements made by Tait,
the English physicist, show that our earth loses every year from each
square foot of surface, an amount of heat that would be able to raise
the temperature of one pound of water from the melting point of ice to
the boiling point of water, or from 32° F. to 212° F. The rate of loss
of heat, must, therefore, have been much greater when the earth was
more highly heated than it is now, and will be much smaller than now
many years from the present.

Now, let us suppose, what nearly everyone acknowledges to be true,
that the earth was originally so hot as to be a molten globe, and that
while in this molten condition, it began to revolve or move around the
sun. Since the empty space through which the earth moves is very cold,
something in the neighborhood of 45° below the zero of the Fahrenheit
thermometer scale, the loss of heat would take place very rapidly and
a thin crust of hardened materials would be formed on the outside. Now
all the time the earth is cooling, it is shrinking or growing smaller.

A very little thought will convince you that this cooling or shrinkage
could not go on uninterruptedly; for, while the earth was cooling it
was contracting, or growing smaller, and in this way a great pressure,
or as it is generally called in science, a great stress was being
produced. Every now and then this stress became so great that the
crust of the earth was fractured or broken.

At first these fractures would not require a very great amount of
stress or force, since the crust of lava was then very thin. After
great periods of time, however, the crust grew thicker and thicker,
and the amount of force required to break it continually increased, so
that the fractures of the crust produced a greater disturbance.

Whenever the earth's crust was fractured in this way the earth was
shaken by what are called earthquakes, while a part of the molten
interior would run out or escape, making volcanoes. In the very early
times neither the earthquakes or the volcanoes were as energetic as
they were at later periods when the thickness of the earth's crust
increased.

Now, having as we believe correctly come to the conclusion that the
entire interior of the earth is in a highly heated condition, the
next question that arises is as to the present condition of this
interior. A long time ago it was believed that the interior of the
earth is still melted, and that a cooled portion or crust surrounds
a great molten mass that fills all the inside; that it is this mass
which supplies the immense quantities of molten rock or lava that
escape through the craters of volcanoes or through the fissures in
the crust. Without going into this question thoroughly, since it is a
very difficult question to understand, it will be sufficient to say
that there are many reasons why it is impossible to believe that the
interior is still melted.

You will understand that if the interior of the earth were melted like
a huge central sea of fire that each volcano would necessarily affect
all the others. Now, as we have seen, this is never the case, so that
this is one reason we cannot believe in the existence of a melted
interior.

Another reason we cannot believe in a molten interior is an
astronomical consideration. It can be shown that under the attraction
of the sun and moon the earth could not possibly behave as it does
if it were still liquid in the interior. That, on the contrary, the
behavior of the earth to the attraction of the sun and moon is such as
to make it necessary for us to believe that it is as rigid throughout
as would be a globe of steel of the same size.

I can easily understand that you find it very difficult to see how it
can be believed that the interior of the earth is solid and yet at the
same time be sufficiently hot to melt. I can imagine hearing you ask
if it is hot enough in the inside to melt any known materials, why it
is not melted. The reason, however, is very simple when you come to
think it over. For a solid to fuse or become melted, it is not only
necessary for it to be heated to a temperature which is different for
different substances, but that at the same time it is heated it shall
have plenty of room in which to expand or grow bigger. In other words,
the temperature required to fuse any substance increases very rapidly
with the pressure to which that substance is exposed.

Now, try to think of the pressure to which the materials that fill
the inside of the earth are subjected at great distances below the
surface. This pressure is enormous, not only by reason of the weight
of the many miles of rocks that are pressing down, but also by reason
of the enormous stress or pressure caused by contraction or shrinkage.
When we say that the interior of the earth is hot enough to melt all
known substances we mean hot enough to melt them if they could be
brought from great depths to the level of the sea, but not hot enough
to melt them when subjected to the great pressure that exists in
regions far below the surface of the earth.

Briefly, the condition of things is believed to be as follows: The
entire interior is filled with rock hot enough to melt at the level
of the sea, but under too great pressure to melt. If this be granted,
as it is by perhaps the greatest number of men who are competent to
judge, the phenomena of earthquakes can be readily explained, as can,
indeed, the phenomena of those great movements whereby great changes
of level take place in different parts of the earth.

Now let us see how volcanoes can be explained on the assumption that
the interior of the earth is hot enough to melt, but remains solid
only because there is no room for the heated mass to expand in. Such
a heated interior as we have imagined, must be constantly losing its
heat and, therefore, shrinking. Every now and then this shrinkage must
produce great fissures or cracks in the solid crust of the earth.
Now should such cracks or fissures extend downwards to the heated
interior, there must result a decrease in the pressure. The rocks
would, therefore, begin to expand and would be forced by the great
pressure to rise slowly in such cracks or fissures. The further they
rise the greater the relief of pressure, until they at last assume a
molten condition in which they are forced out through the craters of
volcanoes as molten rocks or lava.

But it is not only volcanoes that seem to indicate a highly heated
plastic condition as existing in the earth's interior. As geologists
well know, there are to be found in the various strata of the earth
places where great fissures have been made at various times during the
geological past. These fissures vary in width from a few inches to
many hundreds of feet, and are frequently scores of miles in length.
Lava either flows out of them, and covers adjoining sections of the
country, or simply rises in them and, afterwards cooling, forms dikes.
In many instances, however, the lava is forced in between more or less
horizontal layers and in some cases has caused these layers to assume
the shape of what geologists know as _subtruderant mountains_. Some
of the eastern ranges of the Rocky Mountains have been formed in this
manner.

We can, therefore, picture to ourselves the following as the manner
of formation of an ordinary volcano. A fissure is first formed in the
solid crust of the earth, extending downwards to the regions of great
heat. There is thus produced a relief of pressure, so that at this
point the highly heated rocks begin to be slowly forced up through the
fissure. As they rise higher and higher they become less solid and
finally expand into fused masses that can flow out of the crater or
opening in the earth's surface. In this way a volcano is started.

But for this volcano to continue in eruption, it is necessary that
the conditions shall continue that force the molten rock upwards from
great depths. It is not enough for the lava to fill the crevice that
exists upwards to the surface, it must continue to be forced upwards
until it escapes. If it is permitted to remain in the fissure for any
time, it hardens, and only great dikes are formed. It would seem,
therefore, that some other force must be called into action to keep
the fissure open or, in other words, to prevent the chilling of the
lava. Now, this force is generally believed to be the expansive force
of steam or the vapor of water.

As Dana points out, by far the greater part of the vapor which escapes
from the craters of volcanoes consists of steam or the vapor of water.
Indeed, it can be shown that for every hundred parts of different
vapors, at least ninety-nine of such parts consist of water vapor. It
is for the greater part, to the pressure of steam or water vapor that
the escape of lava from the tube near the top of the crater is due.

Of course, the question arises as to where the water comes from that
produces this steam. There are three possible sources. From the rains;
from leakage at the bed of the ocean; and from vapors existing at
great depths below the surface.

It is not probable that either rain water, or water from the ocean,
penetrates through the earth's crust for distances much greater than a
few thousand feet. It is, however, very well known that in all parts
of the earth, except in desert regions, whether they are near or far
from the ocean, the rocks are always found fully charged with water.
When, therefore, the slowly rising lava passes through the moist rocks
that everywhere form the crust of the earth, there must be formed in
them great quantities of steam under very high pressure. Moreover,
many substances, especially those forming lava, possess the power of
absorbing large quantities of steam and other gases. Therefore, as
the molten material reaches the moist rocks in the earth's crust, it
becomes highly charged with steam, and as the lava rises towards the
surface this steam expands.

Where the lava is in a very fluid condition the steam quietly escapes,
as does the steam from the surface of boiling water. But where the
lava is viscous, like tar or pitch, great bubbles are formed, which,
on their explosion, throw the lava upwards for great distances into
the air.

We can, therefore, account in this manner for both the non-explosive
as well as the explosive type of volcanoes.

It must not be supposed, however, that it is the explosive power of
steam which is the principal cause of the lava rising upwards from
great depths. This is caused by the great pressure or stress set up
by the contraction of a cooling crust. The pressure of this steam is
added to this pressure which keeps the lava flowing upwards from great
depths below.

The objection has sometimes been urged that it is impossible to
believe the lava comes from a highly heated interior, because, as is
well known, lavas are of different types even when coming from the
same volcano at different times of eruption. While such an objection
would have weight were it believed that the interior of the earth is
still in a molten condition, it loses its weight when one believes
that the interior is solid. It must, however, be acknowledged that
the largest part of the interior of the earth would probably have the
same chemical composition if it had ever been in a completely melted
condition throughout.

I do not doubt you have already concluded that the reason the earth's
volcanoes are practically limited to the borders of continents,
or to the shores of islands, is the leakage of the ocean waters
into the crust at these parts. This was at one time believed by
most geologists. That sea water has much to do with such volcanoes
as Vesuvius there is no doubt, but it is now generally recognized
that it is not so much the present outlines of the earth, or the
present arrangement of its land and water areas, that determines the
distribution of the world's volcanoes. It is rather believed that the
location of the lines of fractures along which the earth's volcanoes
are found were determined by conditions that occurred long before the
earth assumed its present outlines.

But there is another explanation that has been suggested as regards
the condition of the interior of the earth. Judd refers to this
explanation as follows:

      "Some physicists have asserted that a globe of liquid
      matter radiating its heat into space, would tend to
      solidify both at the surface and the centre at the
      same time. The consequence of this action would be the
      production of a sphere with a solid external shell and a
      solid central nucleus, but with an interposed layer in a
      fluid or semi-fluid condition. It has been pointed out that
      if we suppose the solidification to have gone so far as
      to have caused the partial union of the interior nucleus
      and the external shell, we may conceive a condition of
      things in which the stability and rigidity is sufficient to
      satisfy both geologists and astronomers, but that in still
      unsolidified pockets or reservoirs, filled with liquefied
      rock, between the nucleus and the shell, we should have
      a competent cause for the production of the volcanic
      phenomena of the globe. In this hypothesis, however, it is
      assumed that the cooling at the centre and the surface of
      the globe would go on at such rate that the reservoirs of
      liquid material would be left at a moderate depth from the
      surface, so that easy communication could be opened between
      them and volcanic vents."

I must caution you, however, not to think that the above theory of
volcanoes is accepted by all scientific men. On the contrary, there
are many who believe that the earth is solid throughout because it
has completely lost its original heat; that it is only comparatively
small areas that are to be found filled with molten or at least highly
heated material. But these opinions are held largely by those who have
given their attention almost entirely to the phenomena of earthquakes,
or who base their reasonings on mathematical grounds only and have not
sufficiently considered the phenomena of volcanoes. Since, however,
they can be better understood after we have explained the phenomena of
earthquakes, we will defer their discussion to the last chapters of
this book.




CHAPTER XX

SOME FORMS OF LAVA


In describing the wonders of volcanoes, we must not fail to say
something of the many remarkable forms that lava is capable of
assuming.

All volcanic lavas contain large quantities of an acid substance known
as _silica_, or what is known better as _quartz sand_. This material
exists in lava combined chemically with various substances called
bases, the principal of which are alumina, magnesia, lime, iron,
potash, and soda.

Although there are many kinds of lava, yet all lavas can be arranged
under three great classes according to the quantity of silica they
contain.

_Acid lavas_ are those in which the quantity of silica is greatest.
In these lavas the silica, which varies from 66 to 80%, is combined
with small quantities of lime or magnesia, and comparatively large
quantities of potash or soda. Some of the most important varieties of
acid lavas are known as _trachytes_, _andesites_, _rhyolites_, and
_obsidians_.

_Basic lavas_ are those containing from 45 to 55% of silica. They
are rich in lime and magnesia, but poor in soda or potash. Some of
the most important of basic lavas are the _dolerites_ and _basalts_.
Generally speaking, basic lavas are of a darker color than acid lavas,
and fuse at much lower temperatures.

_Intermediate lavas_ are those containing silica in the proportion of
from 55 to 66%.

While the temperature of liquid lava has not been very accurately
determined, yet, since we know that molten lava is able to melt silver
or copper, its temperature must be somewhere between 2,500° F. and
3,000° F., the melting point varying with the chemical composition.

According to Dana lavas can be divided into the following classes
according to their fusibility; i. e., _lavas of easy fusibility_, such
as _basalts_; these lavas fuse at about 2,250° F.; _lavas of medium
fusibility_, including andesites; these lavas fuse at about 2,520° F.;
_lavas of difficult fusibility_, such as trachytes; these lavas fuse
at about 2,700° F.

But what is, perhaps, most curious about lavas is that when the
surface of a freshly broken piece of cold lava is carefully examined,
it is found to contain a number of small crystals of such mineral
substances as quartz, feldspar, hornblende, mica, magnetite, etc.

The best way to study the different forms of lava crystals is to
prepare a thin transparent slice of hardened lava and then examine it
with a good magnifying glass. It will be found that the slice consists
of a mass of a glass-like material through which the crystals are
irregularly distributed, not unlike the raisins and currants in a
slice of not over rich plumcake.

When examined by a more powerful glass, such as a microscope, cloudy
patches can be seen distributed irregularly through the glass-like
mass. When these patches are examined by a higher power of the
microscope they are seen to consist of small solid particles of
definite forms known as _microliths_ and _crystallites_. It has been
shown by a careful study of these minute objects that they form the
exceedingly small particles of which crystals are built up.

If we fuse a small quantity of lava and then let it slowly cool, the
glassy mass will be found to contain numerous crystallites. On the
other hand, when fused lava is permitted to cool quickly, it takes on
the form of a black, glass-like mass known as _obsidian_ or _volcanic_
glass, a very common form of lava in some parts of the world.

In some lavas there are found larger crystals that appear to have been
separated from the glassy mass, under the great pressure that exists
in the subterranean reservoirs at great depths below the volcanic
crater, and then floated to the surface surrounded by the glass-like
material. Now when we examine these crystals with a higher power of
the microscope, we frequently find in them minute cavities containing
a small quantity of liquid and a bubble of gas, thus causing them to
resemble small spirit levels. The liquid in such cavities has been
examined chemically and in most cases has been found to consist of
water containing several salts in solution. Sometimes, however, the
liquid consists of liquefied carbonic acid gas. These wonderful things
will be discussed at greater length in the Wonder Book of Light.

When the mass of molten rock or lava that comes out of the crater
of a volcano is thrown upwards in the air the condition it assumes
by the time it falls back again to the earth depends on the height
it reaches. If this height is great the lava chills or hardens
before reaching the earth, and assumes various forms according to
the size of the fragments. The largest of these fragments are called
_cinders_; the finer particles _volcanic dust_; while most of those
of intermediate particles are known among other things as _volcanic
ashes_.

We have already seen that when an explosive volcanic eruption occurs
there is suddenly thrown out of the crater of the volcano a huge
column of various substances that rises sometimes as high as 30,000
feet or even more. The smaller fragments of lava are quickly cooled
and form volcanic ashes, sand, cinders, or dust. These are rapidly
spread out by the wind in the form of a black cloud, that not only
covers the mountain but reaches out over the surrounding country,
completely shutting off the light of the sun. From this cloud
particles of red hot ashes, cinders, sand, etc., begin to fall, the
largest particles near the crater of the volcano, and the smaller
particles at much greater distances. In very powerful explosive
volcanic eruptions such as Krakatoa, the finer dust may be carried to
practically all parts of the world.

Volcanic ashes consist of a fine, light, gray powder. These particles
take the name ashes from their resemblance to the ashes left after the
burning of pieces of wood or coal in an open fire. The name, however,
as Geicke points out, is unfortunate, since it is apt to lead one to
suppose that volcanic ashes consist of some burned material. Such an
idea is erroneous, however, since ashes do not consist of anything
that is left after burning, but merely of fine particles of molten
rock that have hardened by cooling. When in the shape of what is known
as volcanic dust these particles are so exceedingly small that they
can readily make their way through the smallest openings in a closed
room just as does the finest dust in the rooms of our houses when
they are shut up. There are cases on record where people have been
suffocated by the entrance of volcanic dust in closed rooms to which
they have fled for safety during volcanic eruptions.

_Volcanic sand_ consists of the coarser particles of chilled lava that
are partly round and partly angular. They are of various sizes up to
that of an ordinary pea. Volcanic sand is formed by the breaking up of
the lava by the explosion of the vapors as they escape from the lava
on relief from pressure. Volcanic dust when examined by the microscope
is found to consist of very small particles that are more or less
crystalline.

But besides the above there are larger fragments known as _lapilli_,
consisting of rounded or angular bits of lava varying in size from
that of a pea to an ordinary black walnut. These sometimes consist of
solid fragments, but are usually porous, sometimes so much so that
they readily float on water.

A curious form sometimes assumed by lava consists of what are called
_volcanic bombs_. These are formed during explosive eruptions,
when masses of liquid lava are hurled high up into the air. During
their flight they take on a rotary motion, which tends to make them
globular, so that cooling, while still revolving, they assume the
form of a more or less spherical mass. At times, however, they are
still sufficiently soft when they strike the earth to be flattened out
in the form of flat cakes. When of a spherical form these are very
properly called volcanic bombs.

That volcanic bombs have actually been subjected to a spinning motion
while in the air can sometimes be shown by the fact that masses of
scoriæ are frequently found in the interior with air cells largest at
the centre of the bomb.

Volcanic bombs are sometimes thrown from the crater to great
distances. During one of its recent eruptions, Cotopaxi threw out
bombs that fell at a distance of nine miles from the crater.

According to Dana another form of lava bombs is sometimes found on the
slopes of the active volcanoes of Hawaii, where masses of lava acquire
a ball-like shape while rolling down an inclination.

What are sometimes called volcanic bombs, but which are more properly
_volcanic vesicles_, are produced by small fragments of lava which
are thrown up in the air for only a moderate height and, on cooling,
assume pear-like forms. Fig. 25 represents the appearance of volcanic
vesicles. The direction in which these vesicles moved through the air
while in a molten state is indicated by their shape, the blunt end
being the end towards which the particles were projected.

[Illustration: FIG. 25. VOLCANIC VESICLES _From Dana's Manual
of Geology_]

But by far the greater portion of the hardened lava; i. e., the
coarser, heavier particles, fall back on the mountain, and collecting
around the crater build up volcanic cones, as already described in the
case of mountains of the Vesuvian type.

There are two different ways in which the melted lava is broken up
into fine particles when it is thrown upwards from the crater of the
volcano. Nearly all lava contains large quantities of steam that are
shut up, or occluded in the mass, being prevented from escaping by
reason of the pressure to which the lava is subjected. The lava is
released from this pressure as it is thrown out of the crater. The
steam or gases escape explosively and thus break the lava into fine
liquid spray, which rapidly hardens.

There is another way in which small particles of lava are formed.
Sometimes large pieces of hardened lava are shot upwards into the air
with a velocity as great as that with which a heavy projectile leaves
the muzzle of a large gun. These heavy particles striking against
one another, either while rising or falling, are broken into smaller
fragments. Sometimes, indeed, these fragments fall back again into
the crater from which they are again violently thrown out, and are
again broken into smaller fragments either while rising or falling.

You will, probably, remember several instances of volcanic eruptions
where masses of rock were thrown violently up into the air out of
the crater. These larger masses are known as _volcanic blocks_. They
probably consist of masses of hardened lava that have collected in
the tube of the volcano during some of its periods of inactivity.
Sometimes, however, they consist of fragments of rocks that are not
of volcanic origin. Cases are on record where volcanic blocks have
been thrown out of the craters in so great quantities as to cover the
surface of many square miles of land with fragments hundreds of feet
deep.

There is sometimes formed on the surface of a pool of lava as it
collects in the craters of such volcanoes as Mt. Loa or Kilauea, when
the volcanoes are not in eruption, a material resembling froth or
scum. The same thing sometimes occurs on the surface of some kinds
of lava as it runs down the side of the mountain. In this way a very
light variety of highly cellular lava known as _pumice stone_ is
produced. The action which thus takes place is not unlike that which
occurs during the raising of a lot of the dough from which bread is
made, where the carbonic acid gas which is formed during the raising
of the dough expands, and produces the well-known open cellular
structure of well-raised bread. In the case of pumice stone, however,
this raising goes on to such an extent that the mass consists often of
less than 2% of solid matter, the remainder being a tangled mass of
air.

[Illustration: THE LAVA FLOW OF THE CRATER OF KILAUEA, HAWAIIAN
ISLANDS _From a Stereograph, Copyright, by Underwood & Underwood_]

Fragments of lava that possess a cellular structure form what are
known as _scoriæ_. The lightest of all kinds of scoriæ is what is
known as _thread-lace scoriæ_. Here the thin walls consist of mere
threads. Figs. 26 and 27 represent the appearance of thread-lace
scoriæ from Kilauea. The separate threads are very fine, being only
from one-thirtieth to one-fortieth of an inch in thickness. As can be
seen, this form of scoriæ have six-sided or hexagonal shapes. You can
form some idea of the great lightness of such scoriæ when you learn
that they contain only 1.7% of rocky material. Indeed, they contain
so little solid material that a layer of volcanic glass only one inch
thick, if blown out into scoriæ, would be able to produce a layer
sixty inches thick.

[Illustration: FIG. 26. THREAD-LACE SCORIÆ FROM KILAUEA _From
Dana's Manual of Geology_]

Another curious form sometimes assumed by lava, especially in the
case of Kilauea, is where the lava is spun out in the form of long
silk-like hairs. This is called by the natives _Pele's hair_, after
the name of their goddess. Inasmuch as the origin of this form of lava
was at one time generally attributed to the action of the wind in
drawing out thread-like pieces from the jets of lava thrown upwards
from the pool, it will be interesting if its true cause is explained.

[Illustration: FIG. 27. THREAD-LACE SCORIÆ FROM KILAUEA _From
Dana's Manual of Geology_]

Dutton, in his report on the Hawaiian volcanoes, refers to the
formation of Pele's hair as follows:

      "The phenomenon of Pele's hair is often spoken of in the
      school books, and receives its name from this locality.
      It has generally been explained as the result of the
      action of the wind upon minute threads of lava drawn out
      by the spurting up of boiling lava. Nothing of the sort
      was seen here, and yet Pele's hair was seen forming in
      great abundance. Whenever the surface of the liquid lava
      was exposed during the break-up the air above the lake was
      filled with these cobwebs, but there was no spurting or
      apparent boiling on the exposed surface. The explanation of
      the phenomenon which I would offer is as follows: Liquid
      lava coming up from the depths always contains more or
      less water, which it gives off slowly and by degrees, in
      much the same way as champagne gives off carbonic acid
      when the bottle is uncorked. Water-vapor is held in the
      liquid lava by some affinity similar to chemical affinity,
      and though it escapes ultimately, yet it is surrendered
      by the lava with reluctance so long as the lava remains
      liquid. But when the lava solidifies the water is expelled
      much more energetically, and the water-vapor separates
      in the form of minute vesicles. Since the congelation of
      all siliceous compounds is a passage free from a liquid
      condition through an intermediate state of viscosity to
      final solidity, the walls of these vesicles are capable of
      being drawn out as in the case of glass. The commotion set
      up by the descending crust produces eddies and numberless
      currents in the surface of the lava. These vesicles are
      drawn out on the surface of the current with exceeding
      tenuity, producing myriads of minute filaments, and the
      air, agitated by the intense heat at the surface of the
      pool, readily lifts them and wafts them away. It forms
      almost wholly at the time of the break-up. The air is then
      full of it. Yet I saw no spouting or sputtering, but only
      the eddying of the lava like water in the wake of a ship.
      The country to the leeward of Kilauea shows an abundance
      of Pele's hair, and it may be gathered by the barrelful. A
      bunch of it is much like finely shredded asbestos."

You have probably often seen the beautiful frost pictures that collect
on the panes of glass in a room where the ventilation has been
neglected. These pictures consist of groupings of ice crystals that
collect on the surface of the windows, when the moist vapor-laden
air in the room is chilled by contact with their cold surfaces. Now
the crystals formed in cooling lavas are sometimes grouped in forms
closely resembling frost pictures. A few of such forms are represented
in Figs. 28 and 29 in lava from Mt. Loa and Mt. Kea.

[Illustration: FIG. 28. FROST-LIKE LAVA CRYSTALS _From Dana's
Manual of Geology_]

[Illustration: FIG. 29. FROST-LIKE LAVA CRYSTALS _From Dana's
Manual of Geology_]

Certain varieties of lava, especially that which is found in dikes,
form cool, beautiful columns called basaltic columns. They are due to
the contraction that occurs on the cooling of the material. Instances
of basaltic columns are seen in the Giant's Causeway, on the northern
coast of Ireland, as well as in the Isle of Cyclops on the coast of
Italy. The general appearance of the latter is represented in Fig. 30.

[Illustration: FIG. 30. BASALTIC COLUMNS, ISLE OF CYCLOPS,
ITALY]

It is a curious fact that the entire mass of basalt does not generally
take the columnous form but only certain layers which terminate
suddenly above and below at structureless masses of basalt, as shown
in Fig. 31. These columns, however, are always found at right angles
to the cooling surfaces as seen in the figures. They may, therefore,
be inclined at all angles to the horizon.

[Illustration: FIG. 31. COLUMNAR AND NON-COLUMNAR BASALT]

When molten lava is only thrown up a short distance into the air
from a crater it is still partially molten when on falling it again
reaches the earth, and therefore clings to any surface on which it
falls. There are thus built up curious cones known as _driblet cones_,
in which the separate drops covering the sides of the cone can be
distinctly traced. Driblet cones are represented in Figs. 32 and 33.
Here, as can be seen, the separate drops can be readily traced as they
run down a short distance before cooling.

[Illustration: FIGS. 32, 33. DRIBLET CONES _From Dana's
Manual of Geology_]

We have already referred briefly to the _lava caves_ or _grottoes_,
that are formed in some of the lava streams issuing from Vesuvius,
Etna, or Hawaii. These caves consist either of a number of
communicating huge bubbles, or of the tunnels that are formed in the
lava by the hardening of the outside of the lava streams as they flow
down the sides of the mountain, and towards the close of the eruption
are afterwards emptied by the molten lava within continuing to flow to
a lower level before solidifying. Now, in the interior of these caves,
there are often found on the walls, as well as on the portions of the
floors of the caves, immediately below them, curious pendants, like
icicles, or, more correctly, like the _stalactites of limestone_ that
are seen hanging to the walls of caves in limestone districts, where
they are formed as follows: as the rain water sinks through limestone
strata it dissolves some of the lime, when, slowly falling, drop after
drop, from the roofs of the caverns, small particles of lime are
deposited on the roof, and in this manner a pendant of limestone is
formed. The water that falls to the floor of the causeway immediately
below, also builds up a dome-like hillock called a stalagmite. In due
time the pillar reaches downwards, and the opposite hillock upwards
until the two meet, thus forming great natural pillars that appear
to hold up the roof of the vast cave in which they have been slowly
formed. A number of _lava stalactites_ are represented in Fig. 34.

[Illustration: FIG. 34. LAVA STALACTITES _From Dana's Manual
of Geology_]

Now, in a similar manner these lava stalactites, formed in the lava
caves or grottoes, are caused by the stream as it escapes from the
walls of the caves depositing on them stalactites of various lava
minerals it has dissolved as it slowly passed through them.

But the most important of all volcanic products is _volcanic dust_.
This, as we have seen, is so light that it remains longest in the air,
and is often carried by the winds to great distances from the volcano
from which it escaped. It may interest you to know that some of the
most fruitful of the great wheat fields of the western parts of the
United States owe their extraordinary fertility to immense deposits
of volcanic dust that have been thrown out from some of the great
volcanoes of the geological past, now found in an extinct condition in
these parts of the United States.

According to Russell, immense deposits of volcanic dust are spread
over vast areas in Montana, Southern Dakota, Nebraska, and Kansas, as
well as over parts of Oregon, and Washington, and, indeed, over large
areas of southwestern Canada and Alaska.

It is practically certain that many of the eruptions producing this
dust occurred within historic times. There must, therefore, have been
many times in these parts of our country when the dense ash clouds
hiding the sun turned the day into night and destroyed the forests and
other vegetation by showers of red hot ashes. There were produced,
too, the same great dread, and possibly loss of life as common during
historical eruptions. It is pleasing, however, to think that while
these great catastrophes brought suffering and dread to the people who
then lived on the earth, they were, nevertheless, but the forerunners
of those fruitful fields that at a much later age were to bless the
people who afterwards lived on them.




CHAPTER XXI

MUD VOLCANOES AND HOT SPRINGS


Mud volcanoes are the more or less conical hillocks from which, under
certain conditions, mud is thrown out through the crust of the earth.

Geikie defines mud volcanoes as follows:

      "Conical hills formed by the accumulation of fine and
      usually saline (salty) mud, which, with various gases, is
      continuously or intermittently given out from the orifice
      or crater in the centre. They occur in groups, each hillock
      being sometimes less than a yard in height, but ranging up
      to elevations of 100 feet or more. Like true volcanoes,
      they have their periods of repose, when either no discharge
      takes place at all, or mud oozes out tranquilly from the
      crater, and their periods of activity, when large volumes
      of gas, and sometimes columns of flame, rush out with
      considerable violence and explosion, and throw up mud and
      stones to a height of several hundred feet."

There are two kinds of mud volcanoes: those in which the mud is thrown
out by the action of different kinds of gases, and those in which the
mud is thrown out by the action of steam.

Mud volcanoes may or not be volcanic phenomena. Those which occur in
the neighborhood of volcanoes whether active, dormant, or extinct, are
probably of volcanic origin. There are others, however, which occur
in regions far removed from volcanoes. These are probably due not to
volcanoes, but to chemical action and the eruptions are caused by the
action of gases.

The gases producing these eruptions are either carbonic acid gas
(the gas that is given off from soda water); carburetted hydrogen
(the gas that is sometimes seen escaping from the bottom of marshy
ground); sulphuretted hydrogen (a gas that is given off from rotten or
decomposing eggs, and possessing the characteristic odor of decayed
eggs) and nitrogen gas derived from the atmosphere. In mud volcanoes
of the gaseous type the mud is generally cold, and the water salty. In
this latter case the mud volcanoes are also called _salses_. Daubeny
has pointed out that the mud volcanoes of this class that occur in the
neighborhood of Sicily are due to the slow burning or oxidation of
beds of sulphur.

Mud volcanoes which eject hot mud by the force of eruption of steam,
which occur in volcanic districts, are of volcanic origin. They are
caused by the passage of hot water and steam through beds of volcanic
rock such as tufa, or hardened volcanic mud and other volcanic
products. The hot water or steam raises the temperature of the mud
through which it passes to the boiling point. As Dana remarks, the mud
varies in consistency from very liquid muddy water to a thick mass
like boiling soap, or in some cases like masses of mud or paint, and,
in still other cases, to material like soft mortar, the consistency of
the mud varying with the dryness of the season.

There are three regions where mud volcanoes are especially common.
One of the best known is in the Yellowstone National Park, four miles
north of Yellowstone Lake, and six miles from Crater Hill. Some of
these mud volcanoes have circular craters about ten feet in depth
around which they have built mounds, the rims of which are several
feet above the general level.

There are well-known regions of mud volcanoes in different parts of
Iceland. Here, according to Lyell, they occur in many of the valleys
where sulphur vapor and steam bursts from fissures in the ground with
a loud hissing noise. In these regions there are pools of boiling
water filled with a bluish black clay-like paste, that is kept
violently boiling. Huge bubbles, fifteen feet or more in diameter,
rise from the surface of the boiling mass. The volcanoes pile up the
mud around the sides of their craters or basins.

Another part of the world where mud volcanoes are especially numerous
is on the western shores of the Caspian Sea at a place called Baku.
These are of the gaseous type and are attended by flames that blaze
up to great heights often for several hours. These flames are due to
the presence of natural gas and petroleum vapor that pass out through
the water. Large quantities of mud are thrown out from the craters of
these mud volcanoes.

There are also many mud volcanoes in a district in India about 120
miles northwest of Cutch near the mouth of the Indus. In this region
the cone built up around the crater is sometimes as high as 400 feet.

The following description of mud volcanoes on Java is quoted from
Daubeny's book on volcanoes.

      "It would appear likewise from Dr. Horsfield's description,
      that Java exhibits phenomena of a similar kind to those
      noticed in Sicily and at the foot of the Apennines, and
      there known under the name of 'Salses.' In the calcareous
      district (which I suspect to belong to the same class
      of formations as the blue clay and tertiary limestone
      of Sicily) occur a number of hot springs, containing in
      solution a large quantity of calcareous earth, which
      incrusts the surface of the ground near it. Of these, some
      are much mixed with petroleum, and others highly saline.

      "The latter are dispersed through a district of country
      consisting of limestone, several miles in circumference.
      They are of considerable number, and force themselves
      upwards through apertures in the rocks with some violence
      and ebullition. The waters are strongly impregnated with
      muriate of soda, and yield upon evaporation very good salt
      for culinary purposes (not less than 200 tons in the year).

      "About the centre of this limestone district is found an
      extraordinary volcanic phenomenon. On approaching the
      spot from a distance, it is first discovered by a large
      volume of smoke rising and disappearing at intervals of a
      few seconds, resembling the vapors arising from a violent
      surf, whilst a dull noise is heard like that of distant
      thunder. Having advanced so near that the vision was no
      longer impeded by the smoke, a large hemispherical mass was
      observed, consisting of black earth mixed with water, about
      sixteen feet in diameter, rising to the height of twenty or
      thirty feet in a perfectly regular manner, and, as it were,
      pushed up by a force beneath, which suddenly exploded with
      a dull noise, and scattered about a volume of black mud
      in every direction. After an interval of two or three, or
      sometimes four or five seconds, the hemispherical body of
      mud or earth rose and exploded again.

      "In the same manner this volcanic ebullition goes on
      without interruption, throwing up a globular mass of mud,
      and dispersing it with violence through the neighboring
      places. The spot where the ebullition occurs is nearly
      circular and perfectly level; it is covered with only the
      earthy particles impregnated with salt water, which are
      thrown up from below; its circumference may be estimated
      at about half an English mile. In order to conduct the
      salt water to the circumference, small passages or gutters
      are made in the loose muddy earth, which lead it to the
      borders, where it is collected in holes dug in the ground
      for the purpose of evaporation.

      "A strong, pungent, sulphurous smell, somewhat resembling
      that of earth-oil (naphtha), is perceived on standing near
      the site of the explosion, and the mud recently thrown
      up possesses a degree of heat greater than that of the
      surrounding atmosphere. During the rainy season these
      explosions are more violent, the mud is thrown up much
      higher, and the noise is heard at a greater distance.

      "This volcanic phenomenon is situated near the centre of
      the large plain, which interrupts the great series of
      volcanoes, and owes its origin to the same general cause as
      that of the numerous eruptions met with in this island."

There are, in many parts of the world, springs, whose waters issue
from their reservoirs at temperatures either at or near the boiling
point of water. These are called _hot_ or _thermal springs_. Hot
springs are found both in volcanic regions, as well as in regions
where there are no volcanoes, but where there are lines of deep
fissures or faults. According to Dana, in both of these classes, the
cause is to be traced to heat of volcanic or deep subterranean origin.
Hot springs are also found in regions where there are no volcanoes.
In these cases the heat is due to the gradual oxidation of various
sulphide ores, or to some other chemical action.

The waters of hot or thermal springs almost always contain various
mineral substances in solution. All spring water contains some little
dissolved mineral matter, but in hot springs the quantity of this
matter is greater than in cold springs, because hot water can dissolve
mineral substances much better than can cold water.

It might surprise you to hear that one of the commonest substances
that is found in solution in the waters of many hot springs is silica;
for silica is practically sand, and sand does not easily dissolve in
water as does sugar. The very hot water, however, which comes from
the hot spring, whose temperature below the earth's surface is very
much higher than it is when it comes out of the spring, possesses
the power of readily dissolving silica from the rocks over which it
flows. When the waters of such springs reach the surface the silica
is deposited in a solid condition around the outlets of the springs.
In this way there are built up craters or mounds, or, more correctly,
crater-shaped basins.

Sometimes the hot water contains calcareous substances dissolved in
it, the solution being caused not only by reason of the hot water, but
also by means of the carbonic gas it contains. When this water flows
from the springs, it builds up the same crater-shaped mounds, only in
this case the mounds are of lime instead of silica.

There are peculiar kinds of hot springs called _geysers_, that possess
the power of throwing huge streams of water up into the air at more or
less regular intervals. The word geyser is an Icelandic word meaning
to rage, or snort, or gush, the name being given by reason of the
manner in which the waters rush violently out during an eruption.

As Dana points out, when the water in a basin of a hot spring merely
boils, whether this boiling is nearly continuous, or the water is
alternately boiling and quiet, the spring is called a hot or thermal
spring, but where the water is thrown violently out at more or less
regular intervals, it is called a geyser.

The cause of the eruption of a geyser was discovered by Professor
Bunsen, the celebrated German chemist, after a careful study of
the geyser regions in Iceland. The waters of geysers contain large
quantities of either silica or lime in solution. Bunsen traced the
cause of these curious eruptions to be the manner in which the hot
springs pile up cones of silica or limestone around their mouths.

The water of a geyser generally issues from the top of a more or less
conical hillock, reaching the surface through a funnel-shaped tube.
Both the tube and the basin are covered with a smooth coating of
silica or limestone. In the case of the Great Geyser in Iceland, the
basin is over fifty feet high and seventy-five feet deep. Both the
tube and the basin have been slowly deposited by the hot water of the
geyser.

It is only when the tube of a geyser has reached a certain depth that
the geyser is able to erupt. Moreover, as soon as this tube passes a
certain depth the geyser can no longer erupt and forever afterwards
becomes an ordinary hot spring. There are, therefore, to be found in
most geyser regions, a number of what might be called young geysers or
merely hot springs, that are not yet deep enough to erupt; others that
have just commenced eruption, others that have reached their prime,
while others that, old and decrepit, have again merely become hot
springs.

Let us now try to understand the cause of the eruption of a geyser.
Bunsen's explanation, which is now generally accepted, is as follows:

The heat of the volcanic strata through which the tube of the geyser
extends, gradually raises the temperature of the water that fills
the geyser tube. Since the boiling point of a liquid increases with
the pressure to which it is subjected, far down in the tube of a
geyser, the pressure arising from the weight of the water above it is
sufficiently great to prevent the water from beginning to boil until
it reaches a temperature far higher than that at which it would boil
in the upper parts of the tube. Suppose now, when the water in the
funnel-shaped tube is nearly filled to the top, the water at last
grows hot enough to begin boiling at some point near the middle of
the tube. The pressure of the steam driven off from this portion of
the water raises the column of water above it in the tube and begins
to empty it out of the top of the geyser. All the water below this
point being thus suddenly relieved of its pressure, and being now much
hotter than is necessary to boil the water at that decreased pressure,
suddenly flashes into steam, and violently shoots out all the water
above it to a height that in some cases may be as great as 100 to 200
feet. The steam causes this eruption, then rushes out with a roar, and
the geyser eruption is over.

Professor Tyndall in his charming book entitled "Heat as a Mode of
Motion" speaks as follows concerning Professor Bunsen's discovery:

      "Previous to an eruption, both the tube and basin are
      filled with hot water; detonations which shake the ground,
      are heard at intervals, and each is succeeded by a violent
      agitation of the water in the basin. The water in the
      pipe is lifted up so as to form an eminence in the middle
      of the basin, and an overflow is the consequence. These
      detonations are evidently due to the production of steam in
      the ducts which feed the geyser tube, which steam escaping
      into the cooler water of the tube is there suddenly
      condensed, and produces the explosions. Professor Bunsen
      succeeded in determining the temperature of the geyser
      tube, from top to bottom, a few minutes before a great
      eruption; and these observations revealed the extraordinary
      fact that at no part of the tube did the water reach its
      boiling point. In the sketch [not reproduced] I have given
      on one side the temperatures actually observed, and on
      the other side the temperatures at which water would boil,
      taking into account both the pressure of the atmosphere and
      the pressure of the superincumbent column of water. The
      nearest approach to the boiling point is at A, a height of
      30 feet from the bottom; but even here the water is 2° C.,
      or more than 3-1/2° F., below the temperature at which it
      could boil. How then is it possible that an eruption could
      occur under such circumstances?

      "Fix your attention upon the water at the point A, where
      the temperature is within 2° C. of the boiling point. Call
      to mind the lifting of the column when the detonations
      are heard. Let us suppose that by the entrance of steam
      from the ducts near the bottom of the tube, the geyser
      column is elevated six feet, a height quite within the
      limits of actual observation; the water at A is thereby
      transferred to B. Its boiling point at A is 123.8°, and
      its actual temperature 121.8°; but at B its boiling point
      is only 120.8°, hence, when transferred from A to B the
      heat which it possesses is in excess of that necessary to
      make it boil. This excess of heat is instantly applied to
      the generation of steam: the column is thus lifted higher,
      and the water below is further relieved. More steam is
      generated; from the middle downwards the mass suddenly
      bursts into ebullition, the water above, mixed with steam
      clouds, is projected into the atmosphere, and we have the
      geyser eruption in all its grandeur.

      "By its contact with the air the water is cooled, falls
      back into the basin, partially refills the tube, in which
      it gradually rises, and finally fills the basin as before.
      Detonations are heard at intervals, and risings of the
      water in the basin. These are so many futile attempts at
      an eruption, for not until the water in the tube comes
      sufficiently near its boiling temperature, to make the
      lifting of the column effective, can we have a true
      eruption."

The principal geyser regions of the world are in Iceland, in New
Zealand, and in the Yellowstone National Park in the United States.

There are several geyser regions in Iceland. The best known lies in
the neighborhood of Mt. Hecla. Here is a great geyser that shoots up
a column of water to a height of about 100 feet every thirty hours.
Fig. 35 represents the appearance of the crater of the great geyser in
Iceland.

[Illustration: FIG. 35. CRATER OF THE GREAT GEYSER OF ICELAND]

It is a well-known fact that in geyser regions generally, the throwing
of stones or other materials into the tube will frequently hasten an
eruption. This is probably due to the fact that the throwing in of
these things results in the raising of the water in the tube, thus
hastening the eruption.

The New Zealand region is in the neighborhood of Lake Rotomahama in
the northern island.

The geyser region in the Yellowstone Park is by far the most
interesting of all geyser regions. This region is situated principally
around Fire-Hole Fork of the Madison, and near Shoshone Lake at the
head of Lake Fork of the Snake River. There are many geysers in this
region, as well as simple hot springs. The temperature of their
waters varies from between 160° and 200° F. to the boiling point of
water at this elevation. As you are probably aware, water boils at
the temperature of 212° F. only under the condition of the ordinary
atmospheric pressure that exists at the level of the sea. At higher
elevations, such as on the slopes of mountains, or on high plateaus,
water boils at a lower temperature. The height of the country in which
the Yellowstone Park is situated is so great that the water boils at
temperatures of from 198° to 199° F.

The conical hillock of geyser cones from which the waters flow assume
various shapes, two of which are shown in Figs. 36 and 37.

[Illustration: FIG. 36. GIANT GEYSER _From Dana's Manual of
Geology_]


[Illustration: FIG. 37. BEE HIVE _From Dana's Manual of
Geology_]

That shown in Fig. 36 represents the shape of the cone of the giant
geyser in the upper geyser basin of the Fire-Hole, Yellowstone
National Park. This cone is about ten feet in height, and twenty-four
feet in diameter. As shown in the figure it is broken on one of its
sides. It throws out, at long intervals, a column of water the height
of which varies from ninety to 200 feet.

Fig. 38 represents the crater of a cone known as the Bee Hive in
eruption.

Besides the above named geyser regions there is another region on the
shores of Celebes, and a small region on San Miguel, in the Azores
Islands, in the Atlantic Ocean.

Besides hot springs and mud volcanoes there are two other phenomena
connected with volcanic action that we will now briefly describe.

When eruptions take place and the lava begins to flow down the side
of a mountain, the different vapors and gases with which the lava is
charged begin to escape or pass out from the boiling or fused mass.
When these substances are of such a character that they produce fumes,
or the vapors of various chemical substances, that become solid on
cooling, they form what are called _fumaroles_, a word derived from
a Latin word meaning "to smoke." For the greater part, fumaroles are
found on the edge of craters, but sometimes are found in cavernous
places either in the crater or in the lava streams.

There is, still, another class of openings through which only
sulphurous vapors escape. These are called _solfataras_, a word
derived from the Italian word _solfo_, or sulphur. Solfataras are
generally found in regions distant from volcanic action. In the
materials that escape from recently ejected lava, or molten lava,
the temperature is high enough to volatilize many of the solid
ingredients. But where the temperature is low, only sulphur vapors are
driven off. It is for this reason that fumaroles are only found around
the craters of active volcanoes, or on the lines of cracks or crevices
of the lava stream where the temperature is very high.

[Illustration: FIG. 38. BEE HIVE GEYSER OF ICELAND _From
Dana's Manual of Geology_]

Besides water vapor and sulphurous vapors there are other substances
that escape from the earth in volcanic districts. Sulphurous acid,
together with hydrogen and nitrogen escape from nearly all lava. At
Vesuvius chlorine gas is given off. This, however, as soon as it
passes into the atmosphere becomes changed into hydrochloric acid.
Sulphurous acid is frequently changed into sulphuric acid, which,
combining with various substances, forms such materials as _gypsum_,
or sulphate of lime, the chemical name for plaster of Paris; sulphate
of soda or _Glauber's salt_; sodium chloride or _common table salt_;
and _sal ammoniac_. You will remember in reading the description of
Vulcano, in the Grecian Archipelago, that some of these products were
collected at the chemical works that had been established on the
volcano.

When a volcanic mountain is for the time being passing from an active
to an extinct condition, it is sometimes said to be in the _fumarole
stage_, since the presence of the fumaroles are the only indication
of its activity. The volcanic heat is still great. When it reaches a
still greater decline, the fumaroles disappear, and only solfataras
are left. The amount of heat is now only sufficient to produce sulphur
vapors and the vapor of water. This is called the _solfatara stage_.

Of course, as we have already pointed out, fumaroles and solfataras
may occur in the neighborhood of a volcano at different distances from
its crater.




CHAPTER XXII

THE VOLCANOES OF THE MOON


There can be no doubt that the moon was once the seat of very great
volcanic activity. It was formerly believed that the very many
volcanic craters which can be seen on its surface when it is examined
by a comparatively small telescope, were all extinct. While this
is nearly true, yet recent investigations have shown that in all
probability a feeble volcanic activity still exists in a few of these
craters.

The distinctness with which the surface of the moon is seen does not
depend so much on the size of the telescope employed, as it does
on the steadiness of the atmosphere when the telescope is being
used. When one wishes to examine a very distant body like a star,
it is necessary to use a powerful telescope, but in the case of a
comparatively near body, like one of the planets or the moon, a big
telescope is not necessary. It is, however, necessary to make the
observations at some time of the year, or in some part of the world,
when the air is apt to be free from winds.

A person on the earth's surface looking at the heavenly bodies through
a telescope is practically in the position in which he would be were
he at the bottom of the water in a large lake looking up through the
water at some body in the heavens. He would have no difficulty in
seeing such a body distinctly as long as the upper surface of the
water remained quiet, and unruffled by waves. As soon, however, as
waves were set up, the images seen in the telescope are so distorted
as to become practically worthless. It is for this reason that it is
customary to build great astronomical observatories in parts of the
world where there are apt to be many days in the year when the air is
almost entirely free from wind.

Since the atmosphere is apt to be disturbed by winds in both the
temperate and the polar latitudes, these parts of the world are
not very satisfactory as sites for astronomical observatories. The
conditions are more favorable near the equator, since, although at
certain seasons of the year there are very severe storms in these
regions, yet there are quite long periods when the air is almost
entirely free from winds.

It is for this reason that Harvard University has erected an
astronomical observatory at Arequipa, Peru, at an elevation of 8,000
feet above the level of the Pacific Ocean. Here, with a comparatively
small object glass, of about twelve inches aperture, magnificent
photographs have been obtained not only of the moon but also of the
planet Mars.

According to Professor Pickering, from whose magnificent work,
entitled, "The Moon," much of the information in this chapter has been
obtained, the moon, which is generally spoken of as a satellite of the
earth, ought rather to be called the earth's twin planet. Although the
moon appears to revolve in a small elliptical orbit around the earth
it should properly be said to revolve around the sun; for, together
with the earth, it revolves around the sun once every year. As seen
from any of the planets that lie near the earth the earth and moon
would appear as a very beautiful double star.

In order the more readily to understand what will be said shortly
concerning the origin of the moon, it may be mentioned that the
moon's diameter is 2,163 miles, or a little more than one-fourth the
diameter of our earth.

You will, most probably, be surprised to learn that the origin of the
moon is believed to be very different from the origin of the moons
or satellites of Jupiter, Saturn, and the other planets. As we have
already seen, according to the nebular hypothesis, all the planets
except the earth probably had their moons formed from the rings that
were left surrounding them when they shrunk on cooling to their
present dimensions. Such a ring is still to be seen surrounding Saturn.

Now it is believed that our moon was formed in a different manner.
It was not thrown off from the earth while the latter was in a
highly fluid or gaseous condition, but after the earth had shrunken
to nearly its present size and, most probably, after a solid crust
had been formed on its surface. In order that our earth should be
able to violently throw off a large portion of its mass, it is only
necessary that at the time this separation occurred, its motion of
rotation on its axis was sufficiently great to enable it to make one
complete revolution in rather less than three hours instead of in
the twenty-four hours it now requires. At this velocity of rotation,
objects would fly off the earth in the neighborhood of the equator,
under the influence of the high centrifugal force. Let us, then,
endeavor to see if it was at all probable that the earth ever did turn
so rapidly on its axis.

You all probably know that it is principally the attraction of the
moon that produces the earth's tides. Of course, the sun also produces
tides on the earth, but it is so far off from the earth that not
withstanding its greater mass the tides it forms are much smaller
than those produced by the moon. You also know that the moon produces
at the same time two tides in every twenty-four hours, on directly
opposite sides of the earth; one on the side immediately under the
moon, and the other on the side furthest from the moon. As the earth
rotates between these two tides, they act as a break which serves to
impede its motion. Every high tide, therefore, tends to make the earth
rotate more slowly, and thus to slowly increase the length of the day.
For this reason to-day is a trifle longer than yesterday, and still
longer than a day a hundred years ago.

You must not suppose for a moment that this increase in the length of
the day is large. On the contrary, it is so small that since the year
A. D. 1, up to the present time, the day is only a very small
fraction of a second longer.

But it was very different in the earth's geological past, when the
inside of the earth was in a molten condition; for then great tides
were set up in the melted interior of the earth that not only greatly
changed the shape of the earth, but decreased the rate of rotation
much more rapidly than it does when the earth's tides are limited as
they are now to the waters on the earth's surfaces.

There was, however, at the same time, something going on that tended
greatly to make the earth turn more rapidly on its axis. While the
originally melted earth was cooling and shrinking, the rate of
its rotation was necessarily increasing. As you know, the time of
vibration of a pendulum, that is, the time it requires to make one
complete to-and-fro motion, is shorter the shorter the length of the
pendulum. A pendulum two feet long moves to and fro more slowly than
a pendulum one foot in length. In the same way a rotating sphere will
make one complete rotation in a shorter time when its radius, which
corresponds to the length of a pendulum, is shorter. Therefore, as the
earth shrunk, it rotated more and more rapidly, and at last reached a
rapidity of motion at which an immense quantity of matter flew off
its surface nearest the equator and went out into space, never again
to return. It was this mass that constituted the earth's moon.

Necessarily such a tremendous catastrophe was attended by an
earthquake as well as by the most fearful volcanic phenomena that
the earth has ever witnessed. The terrible catastrophe produced by
the explosive eruption of Krakatoa was but as a small drop of rain
falling on the earth, when compared with the catastrophe produced when
the "five thousand million cubic miles of material left the earth's
surface, never again to return to it."

It is not known whether this matter was torn off the earth at a single
time or during successive times, but quoting the beautiful language of
Professor Pickering:

      "We may try in vain to imagine the awful uproar and fearful
      volcanic phenomena exhibited when a planet was cleft in
      twain, and a new planet was born into the solar system."

This terrible catastrophe took place at a time not when the earth was
a gaseous mass, but when it had condensed into a comparatively small
mass not much larger than it is at its present time, and possibly
even after it had hardened sufficiently to form a solid crust on its
outside.

If you look at a map of the earth on a Mercator's projection, such,
for example, as that employed in illustrating the distribution of the
world's volcanoes in Fig. 24, you can see, even without any very close
examination, that the great water area of the Atlantic Ocean has its
eastern and western shores almost parallel to each other, so that
if you conceive the Eastern and Western Continents as being pushed
together, they would, except at the south, almost completely fit
together, and the same thing is true, if Greenland is pushed towards
the northeastern coast of North America. Of course, some portions of
the coast would not fit exactly, but then these portions might either
have been worn away, or, as is more probable, have been changed in
shape by the deposit of immense beds of sedimentary rocks spread over
the borders of the Atlantic by the great rivers that empty into it.
This is so remarkable a fact that it will be well worth your while to
turn to the map mentioned and convince yourself of the proof of what
I have just said. As you will see, Europe and Africa would almost
exactly fit against South America and North America, while Greenland
would even more closely fit against the northeastern coast of North
America.

Now, while we do not say that it was so, it has been suggested as just
possible that the great depression of the Pacific Ocean represents the
spot that was once filled by the moon. That the Eastern and Western
Continents, then torn asunder by the great force of the convulsion,
were left floating on the surface of a sea of molten matter, a greatly
widened crack marking positions they assumed at the end of this
cataclysm.

Of course, you must understand that all this is a mere supposition,
and that we do not know whether the earth was actually cooled on the
outside when this occurred, since it might have still been in a liquid
condition throughout. It would seem, however, to have occurred rather
recently, since it could not have occurred until the earth shrunk so
much that it became so small in radius as to acquire a very rapid rate
of motion on its axis.

It is an interesting fact that we are, perhaps, better acquainted with
that side of the moon which is turned towards us than we are with the
surface of the earth on which we live. Of course, I do not mean in the
small details of the moon's surface, but with such portions as can be
seen through a good telescope when the air is quiet. While there are
no parts of the moon's surface that have not been carefully examined
in detail probably thousands of times by acute astronomers, there are
still comparatively large areas of the earth that have never been once
trodden by civilized man.

When I speak of all parts of the moon's surface, I only mean those
parts that are turned towards us. You may possibly be ignorant of the
fact that the moon always turns exactly the same face towards the
earth. Not only has no man ever seen the opposite side of the moon,
but he never can hope to see it while he remains on the earth. This is
because the moon turns or rotates on its axis in exactly the same time
that it revolves in its orbit.

When I say that the time of rotation is the same as the time of
revolution of the moon, I do not mean that it is almost the same, but
that it is exactly the same. If it differed even but a small fraction
of a second, a time would come when we would be able to see the other
side of the moon. Now, since astronomers have made careful pictures
of the moon, many, many years ago, we can see by comparing them
with photographs taken at the present time there has been no change
whatever in that face of the moon which is turned towards us, and
this, of course, proves beyond question, that the time of the moon's
rotation during this great period has remained exactly the same as the
time of its revolution.

It may possibly seem to you that it cannot be a matter of great
importance in a book like this on the Wonders of Volcanoes and
Earthquakes, whether or not the moon always turns its face towards
the earth; on the contrary, it is a matter of the greatest importance
since by it we can prove positively that the moon was at one time at
least in a partly fluid condition. It was the presence of this partly
fluid interior that resulted in the time of the moon's rotation
agreeing exactly with the time of its revolution. The tides of the
earth set up in the moon's molten interior, tides, that instead of
reaching twice every day the height of a few feet only, were set up
in the molten mass in the moon's interior, probably reaching miles in
height, rapidly decreased the time of the moon's rotation until the
moon rotated once only during every complete revolution.

Even now that the moon is probably solid throughout, the time of its
rotation and revolution exactly agree because, while in a molten
condition, the action of the earth changed its shape from that of an
exact sphere to a spheroid, with its longest axis in the direction of
the earth. Even, therefore, if the moon at any time began to rotate
faster than the earth, the earth acting on its projecting surface
retarded it until the time of its rotation agreed exactly with the
time of its revolution.

It was at one time believed that the moon had no atmosphere. It is
now known, however, that it has an atmosphere. It is true this is a
rare atmosphere, probably not greater in density than the one-ten
thousandth of the earth's atmosphere. This important question was
settled once for all on August 12th, 1892, at the Harvard Observatory
at Arequipa, Peru, when a photograph was taken of an object on the
moon. It could be readily seen on examining this photograph that the
light coming from the moon experienced a bending, known as refraction,
in passing from the space outside the moon to its atmosphere on to its
surface.

Of course, when the moon was thrown off from the earth by reason of
its great centrifugal force, it carried along with it a portion of the
earth's atmosphere. But since the quantity of matter in the moon is
only about one-eightieth of that of the earth, the force of gravity
on the moon is much smaller than that on the earth, being almost
exactly one-sixth that of the earth's gravity. In other words, if you
could succeed in reaching the moon's surface, you would only weigh
one-sixth of what you weigh on the earth, but then you could carry a
weight six times heavier with no greater effort, and, as for running,
jumping, and other athletic exercises, the surface of the moon would,
indeed, be a great place on which to break records, since one could
readily jump six times higher, put the shot six times further, than
on the earth, or go through most other athletic exercises with a
corresponding increase.

Without going any further into this question it will be sufficient
to say that the moon's present atmosphere is believed to consist of
carbonic acid gas, and that while on the general surface of the moon
this atmosphere must be very rare, yet, at the bottom of the great
fissures that cross the moon's surface, it may possess a fairly great
density, especially if the moon still possesses feeble volcanic
activity; that carbonic acid gas is still being given off from the
inside of the moon as we know it is being given off from inside the
earth.

Under the best conditions of atmosphere and telescope, we can see the
moon's surface as it would appear at a distance varying from 800 miles
to 300 miles from the earth. With a fifteen-inch telescope, under
perfect conditions of vision, objects can be seen as if they were at
a distance of 800 miles from the earth, and with the most powerful
glasses, and the best conditions of atmosphere this distance can be
reduced to about 300 miles. This would enable us to clearly see large
objects like rivers, lakes, seas, or forests, if they existed, but
would not be sufficient to enable us to see houses, buildings, or
roads.

When we come to examine the surface of the moon under the most
favorable conditions, we find that it is extremely irregular. There
are plenty of high mountains. These mountains are not collected
in ranges as they are on the earth's surface, but are completely
separated from each other, and are scattered in great numbers over the
moon's surface.

You may form some idea of the number of volcanoes that have been
observed on the moon when I tell you that as many as 32,000 have been
seen on that side of the moon that is turned towards the earth.

Now it is an interesting fact that almost all these mountains possess
great craters that are not unlike some of the volcanic craters we see
on the earth. The volcanic craters of the moon, however, are of very
much greater size than those on the earth, many being from fifty to
sixty miles in diameter, while some of them are more than 100 miles
in diameter. Smaller craters, say from twenty to twenty-five miles in
diameter, can be counted by the hundreds.

Like most of the moon's craters, the largest crater more closely
resembles one of the pit-craters or calderas on the island of Hawaii.
This volcanic crater consists of a huge circular ring with a small
irregular peak that rises inside the ring. This peak, by the way,
might at first appear to resemble the crater of Vesuvius, which after
a long period of inactivity of the mountain during the eruption that
destroyed Pompeii and Herculaneum was thrown up inside of what had
been left standing of the old crater of Somma. But it has no crater
at its summit, and, therefore, resembles rather the irregular pile or
rock that rises from the surface of a lava lake in the craters of Mt.
Loa or Mt. Kilauea in Hawaii.

Besides the numerous craters to be seen on the moon's surface there
are many lines of deep, crooked valleys, known as _rills_, that may
at one time have been the beds of rivers. Besides the rills, there are
many straight clefts about half a mile in width, that extend down into
the surface of the moon for unknown depths. These clefts can be seen
passing directly through mountains and valleys. They are believed to
be cracks or fissures in the moon's surface.

On the moon is a great crater called Tycho. It is situated near the
moon's south pole. The great crater of Tycho is by far the most
prominent object on the moon's surface. It has a system of rays that
extend for great distances around its craters.

You will also see if you examine the moon's surface by a powerful
glass that there are immense plains called _oceans_ or _seas_. By an
appropriate custom the names of the different craters on the moon are
the same as the names of the great astronomers and philosophers that
have long since passed from their labors, such as Tycho, Copernicus,
Kepler, Plato, etc.

Various explanations have been given as to the origin of the craters
on the moon's surface, but without going into a discussion it may be
said that they are now generally regarded as having been formed in the
main just as were the craters of the earth's volcanoes.

The tremendous size of the moon's craters is of course due to the
great decrease in the force of gravity. This would make the craters,
approximately, six times as great as the craters on the earth.
Professor Pickering points out that while the moon's craters resemble
more closely those of Hawaii than those of any other of the earth's
volcanoes, yet there is this difference in them: that while the
earth's crater floors are generally considerably higher than the level
of the sea, the moon's crater floors are generally below the level of
the surrounding country. Still, taking them all in all, the craters
of the moon's volcanoes resemble those of the island of Hawaii, or
again quoting from Pickering:--

      "There seems, indeed, to be no feature found upon the moon
      which is not presented by these Hawaiian volcanoes, there
      is no feature of the volcanoes that does not also have its
      counterpart in the moon."




CHAPTER XXIII

EARTHQUAKES


An _earthquake_ is a shaking of the earth. It may vary in intensity
from a shaking so feeble that it requires the use of a delicate
instrument to detect it, to a shaking violent enough to overthrow
heavy buildings, and even to make great rents or fissures in the crust.

An earthquake then is an _earth-shake_. It may be caused by anything
capable of shaking the earth; for example, as the falling of a heavy
weight on its surface. Now, a shaking so caused is only felt in the
immediate neighborhood of the place the weight strikes the earth. On
the contrary, in an earthquake, the shaking spreads in all directions
through the earth's crust, until, in the case of very violent
earthquakes, it reaches portions that may be situated many thousands
of miles away from where the shock started. This spreading of the
earthquake waves through the solid earth is not unlike the spreading
of the circular waves that are set up in a still water surface when a
stone is tossed in.

Any shaking of the earth's crust produces what may be called an
earth-shake or earthquake. The mere falling of a raindrop on the earth
produces a slight shaking. The falling of a heavy stone produces a
stronger shaking, and sets up a series of minute waves, generally
called vibrations, that spread around the place in all directions from
where the stone struck. These movements, however, while they spread
in all directions, just as they do in a surface of a lake, when a
stone is thrown into it, are of course much more quickly stopped by
the solid earth than similar movements are by the more readily movable
water.

But, while any shaking of the earth's crust constitutes an earthquake,
yet, strictly speaking, an earthquake is produced only by some force
that acts suddenly on the earth, _at a point below its surface_, and,
therefore, out of sight. This, of course, would rule out all such
shakings as are caused by bodies striking the outer surface of the
earth.

Earthquakes may occur in any part of the world, and at any time of the
day or year. They do occur, however, most frequently in certain parts
of the world, at certain seasons of the year and at certain hours of
the day.

Earthquakes are far from being unusual occurrences. In some parts of
the world, such as the island of Java, they are very common, and in
Japan, under certain circumstances, scarcely a day passes without one
or more shocks in some part of that little empire.

Professor Mallet, who has made a very extensive study of earthquakes,
published in 1850 to 1858, in the Philosophical Transactions, brief
abstracts or descriptions of all the more important earthquakes he
could find records of during the past 3,456 years. The number of
earthquakes thus recorded during this period reached 6,830. Of this
great number nearly one-half occurred during the last fifty years.

It should not be inferred from the above figures that the number of
earthquakes has really increased so greatly in the past half-century.
The explanation of the apparent increase is that greater care has
been taken recently in recording earthquakes, and that an apparatus
called a _seismometer_, or _earthquake-recorder_, has been invented
which automatically produces a record of the smallest shocks; so that
a great many have been recorded that would otherwise have passed
undetected.

It is the opinion of Le Conte that if the records of all the
earthquakes of 3,456 years had been thus made there would have been
found during the entire time of Mallet's researches to have occurred
no less than 200,000, while during the last four years of Mallet's
records, the number would have probably reached two earthquakes per
week.

Since Mallet's time, Prof. Alexis Perry published (1876) a much larger
list of earthquakes. Perry finds that from 1843 to 1872 there have
been 17,249 earthquakes, or 575 every year. Perry's list, however,
is incomplete, since it fails to record earthquakes that occurred in
mid-ocean, and in the unexplored and uncivilized parts of the world.
So it seems likely that earthquakes are so common that our earth, at
some part or other of its surface, is continually shaking or quaking.

Earthquakes are such tremendous phenomena that they were necessarily
observed by the ancients. We find more or less complete accounts of
them in various writings. Lucretius (Titus Carus Lucretius, a great
Roman poet) speaks as follows, in his De Rerum Natura (On the Nature
of Things). We use Munro's translation here:

      "Now mark and learn what the law of earthquakes is. And
      first of all take for granted that the earth below us as
      well as above is filled in all parts with windy caverns,
      and bears within its bosom many lakes and many chasms,
      cliffs and craggy rocks; and you must suppose that many
      rivers hidden beneath the crust of the earth roll on with
      violent waves and submerged stones; for the very nature
      of the case requires it to be throughout like to itself.
      With such things then attached and placed below, the
      earth quakes above from the shock of great falling masses,
      when underneath, time has undermined vast caverns. Whole
      mountains, indeed, fall in, and in an instant from the
      mighty shock tremblings spread themselves far and wide from
      that centre. And with good cause, since buildings beside
      a road tremble throughout, when shaken by a wagon of not
      such very great weight; and they rock no less, where any
      sharp pebble on the road jolts up the iron tires of the
      wheels on both sides. Sometimes, too, when an enormous mass
      of soil through age rolls down from the land into great
      and extensive pools of water, the earth rocks and sways
      with the undulation of the water just as a vessel at times
      cannot rest, until the liquid within has ceased to sway
      about in unsteady undulations....

      "The same great quaking likewise arises from this cause,
      when on a sudden the wind and some enormous force of air
      gathering either from without or within the earth have
      flung themselves into the hollow of the earth and there
      chafe at first with much uproar among the great caverns
      and are carried on with a whirling motion, and when their
      force, afterwards stirred and lashed into fury, bursts
      abroad and at the same moment cleaves the deep earth and
      opens up a great yawning chasm. This fell out in Syrian
      Sidon and took place at Ægium in the Peloponnese, two towns
      which an outbreak of wind of this sort and the ensuing
      earthquake threw down. And many walled places besides fell
      down by great commotions on land and many towns sank down
      engulfed in the sea together with their burghers. And if
      they do not break out, still the impetuous fury of the
      air and the fierce violence of the wind spread over the
      numerous passages of the earth like a shivering-fit and
      thereby cause a trembling."

Of course, no one at the present time believes this ridiculous
explanation as to the cause of earthquakes.

Aristotle, a Greek philosopher, speaks thus concerning earthquakes. We
quote the translation employed by Mallet:

      "Three theories on the subject have been handed down to
      us by three different persons; namely, Anaxagoras of
      Klazomene, before him Anaximenes the Milesian, and later
      than these Democritus of Abdera.

      "Anaxagoras says that the ether of nature rises upward, but
      that when it falls into hollow places in the lower parts
      of the earth it moves it (the earth); because the parts
      above are cemented or closed up by rain, all parts being by
      nature equally spongy or full of cavities, both those which
      are above (where we live) and those which are below. Of
      this opinion it may perhaps be unnecessary to say anything,
      as being foolish, for it is absurd to suppose that things
      would thus exist above and beneath, and that the parts of
      bodies which have weight would not on every side be borne
      to the earth, and those which are light, and fiery, rise;
      especially since we see the surface of the earth to be
      convex and spherical, the horizon constantly changing as
      we change our place, at least as far as we know. And it is
      also foolish to assert on the one hand that it remains in
      the air on account of its great size, and on the other to
      say that it is shaken, when struck from beneath upwards.
      And besides these objections, it is to be remarked that
      he has not treated of the attendant circumstances of
      earthquakes, for neither every time nor place is subject to
      these convulsions.

      "But Democritus says, that the earth being full of water,
      and receiving much also by means of rain, is moved by
      this. For when the water increases in bulk, because the
      cavities cannot contain it, in its struggles it causes an
      earthquake. And when the earth becomes partially dried up,
      the water being drawn from the full reservoirs into those
      which are empty, in passing from one to the other, by its
      movements it causes an earthquake also.

      "Anaximenes, however, says that the earth, when parched up
      and again moistened, cracks, and by the masses thus broken
      off falling on it, is shaken; wherefore earthquakes occur
      in drouths and again in times of rain; in drouths, because,
      as we have said, it cracks, when highly dried, and then,
      when moistened over again, it cracks and falls to pieces.
      Were this the case, however, the earth ought to appear
      in many places subsiding. Why then is it that hitherto
      many places have been very subject to these convulsions
      which do not present any such remarkable differences from
      others? Yet such ought to be the case. And, moreover, those
      who think thus must assert that earthquakes constantly
      become less and less, and at last cease altogether. For
      the continual condensation of the earth would cause this.
      Wherefore, if this be not the fact, it is plain that this
      is not the correct explanation."

Besides the above, there are numerous references to earthquakes in the
works of other writers. Thales, Seneca, and Pliny all speak of these
phenomena and appear to describe correctly the movement of the earth
in waves both in the solid land, as well as on the sea.

Coming down to less ancient writers, Mallet refers to a book by
Fromondi, published in Antwerp, in 1527, that contains much valuable
and interesting information. Among other things Fromondi declares
that in the year 369, in the reign of Valentinian, there was a great
earthquake that shook nearly the entire world and that another
earthquake of almost equal severity occurred in 1116. He also states
that in 1601 an earthquake continued for nearly forty days; that a
great earthquake in Italy, in 1538, lasted fifteen days, and that
another, in Spain, lasted for nearly three years.

This does not mean that these earthquakes actually continued to shake
the earth violently for the times mentioned. These are only the times
during which, at intervals of greater or less length, successive
shocks were felt in these localities.

Another of the less ancient writers referred to by Mallet is
Travagini, who published a book in Venice in 1683. This book contains
a description of a terrible earthquake occurring in Italy on the 6th
of April, 1667, which affected large portions of the country adjacent
to Ragusa.

Without attempting at present to discuss the various theories of
earthquakes, it will suffice to say that earthquakes can be divided,
according to their origin, into two classes: _volcanic earthquakes_,
or earthquakes that are caused by practically the same forces that
cause volcanoes, and _tectonic[3] earthquakes_, or those produced by
the slipping of a large mass of rock lying along the lines of old or
new fractures.

Earthquakes of the first class are found especially in volcanic
districts, while those of the second class are found in all parts
of the world, whether in volcanic districts or elsewhere. According
to Dana, earthquakes of the second class generally start in the
neighborhood of mountains, where old lines of fractures are especially
abundant.

As regards the direction of the shaking movements of the earth,
earthquakes can be divided into three different classes: _explosive
earthquakes_, or those in which the force acts vertically upwards;
_horizontal earthquakes_, or those in which the force moves in a more
or less horizontal direction, or parallel to the general surface
of the earth, and _rotary earthquakes_, or those in which the earth
rotates or moves in great eddies or whirls.

When the earthquake wave is started below the earth's surface, it
spreads through the crust in all directions. The direction these waves
will have on emerging, or coming out of the surface, will depend on
the distance of this point from the place the waves started. When a
place is situated directly over where the wave started, the waves will
emerge so as to move vertically upwards, so that the earth at this
point will be shaken by an explosive earthquake. As the point where
the waves pass out is situated further and further from the place
where the waves start, the waves will emerge more nearly horizontally,
the greater the distance from the source.

In explosive earthquakes, which, as just explained, occur at areas
almost immediately above the point where the disturbance starts,
the force is, generally speaking, the greatest. In earthquakes of
this character the force is sometimes sufficiently great to throw
large bodies high up into the air. In the case of the great Riobamba
earthquake of 1797, the force was not only sufficiently great to
fracture the earth in various places, but also to throw bodies lying
on the surface great distances into the air. Bodies of men were thrown
several hundred feet into the air and were afterwards found on the
other side of a broad river or high up on the side of a hill.

It is possible that Humboldt did not inquire with as much care as
he should have done into these reports. They were probably greatly
exaggerated, since it is difficult to understand how a force great as
this would have failed to detach the soil at these places, and hurl it
after the people. This much, however, can be accepted, that the upward
force was very great.

In the great Calabria earthquake of March, 1783, Dolomieu states that
the tops of the granite hills of Calabria were distinctly seen to rise
and fall. In some cases houses were suddenly raised a great distance
in the air, and were afterwards brought down again to a position of
rest, at a higher level without any damage occurring to them. In a
similar manner during the Caracas earthquake of March, 1812, the
ground was seen to rise and fall in a nearly vertical direction. But,
perhaps, one of the most terrible earthquakes of this character was
the earthquake that destroyed the greater part of Jamaica in June,
1793. During this earthquake the entire surface of the ground at Port
Royal assumed the appearance of a rolling sea. Houses were shifted
from their old sites. Many of the inhabitants who had succeeded in
escaping from the city to the neighboring country were thrown great
distances into the air. Some of these, by good fortune, fell into the
harbor, from which, in some cases, they escaped with their lives. Here
again the projectile force was probably greatly exaggerated.

Vertical movements characterized the great earthquake of Lisbon, on
November 1st, 1755, the city appearing to have been not far from the
point of origin.

The commonest type of earthquakes is the horizontal, where the waves
emerge at the surface in a direction either horizontal or parallel
to the general surface, or at least inclined to it at a very small
angle. Where the materials of the earth's crust, through which the
waves spread, are of the same kind and of the same density in all
directions, the area shaken is approximately circular, but where the
materials of the crust are more or less dense in some directions than
in others, the area of disturbance is of course oblong or elliptical.

In some cases earthquakes of the horizontal type are limited almost
entirely to a single direction. This is especially the case with
earthquakes that occur in mountainous districts. These earthquakes are
known as _linear earthquakes_, since they spread almost in a single
line.

When earthquake waves pass from one medium to another, that is, from
one kind of rock to another, the greater portion of the waves is
refracted or bent out of their straight direction as they pass into
the new medium; a part of the waves, however, are reflected. It is
these reflected waves that probably cause rotary earthquakes.

The speed with which the surface waves move outwards in all
directions, varies not only with the force of the wave, but also with
the kind of material through which they pass. This velocity may be
in the neighborhood of twenty miles per second, while in others the
velocity is as great as 140 miles per second.

Naturally, one would suppose that the most severe earthquakes are
those in which the waves move the most rapidly. On the contrary,
however, the comparatively feeble shocks are sent through the earth
with greater velocity.

In rotary earthquakes, as the name indicates, the ground is whirled
or twisted in the manner of a violent eddy, and is often left in
this twisted condition. In the great Calabria earthquake, huge
blocks of stone forming obelisks were twisted on one another in a
manner represented in Fig. 39. In this case the pedestals remained
unaffected, but the separate blocks of stone were partially turned
around, as shown. During this earthquake the earth was so twisted that
trees, which had been planted in straight lines before the earthquake,
were left standing in zigzags. During the great Charleston earthquake,
South Carolina, the chimney-tops of the houses were separated at
places where they joined the roof and were twisted around these places
without being overthrown. In some of the houses wardrobes or bureaus
were turned at right angles to their former positions, and in some
cases were even found with their faces turned towards the wall.

[Illustration: FIG. 39. HEAVY STONE OBELISKS TWISTED BY CALABRIAN
EARTHQUAKE OF 1783]

Mallet suggests that in some cases the rotary motion is more apparent
than real, being due only to a to-and-fro motion without any twisting,
the apparent turning being due to the greater freedom of motion of the
object in one direction than in another. A twisting motion, however,
has actually taken place in some earthquakes.

While separate shocks, in a given locality, may follow one another
at intervals for fairly long times, yet the principal shock or shake
that produces the greatest damage is generally of exceedingly short
duration. In the Caracas earthquake the greatest destruction was
accomplished in about one minute. There were three distinct shocks,
each of which lasted but three or four seconds. The great Calabria
earthquake, of 1783, lasted but two minutes. The earthquake of Lisbon,
in 1755, lasted five minutes, but the first, and worst, shock, was
only from five to six seconds.




CHAPTER XXIV

SOME OF THE PHENOMENA OF EARTHQUAKES


The nature of an earthquake and the movements of its waves from
their starting place having now been briefly described, it remains
to explain some of the strange phenomena that precede, accompany, or
follow one.

Next to the violent shaking of the earth's crust, perhaps the most
wonderful and impressive thing is the great variety of sounds and
noises. These occur not only while the earth-waves are passing through
the crust at any place, but also long before the principal shocks
reach the place, as well as long after they have passed.

Earthquake sounds vary almost infinitely, both in intensity and
character. Some are like the gentle sighings of the wind, or resemble
faint mysterious whisperings; some are not unlike the confused
murmurings of a crowded room; some resemble the sounds of a busy
street. Some sounds are full and strong, like the deep bass notes
of a large organ. Others resemble the din of a great battle with
the reports of the large guns. Still others reach the intensity of
continuous peals of thunder. But we can better understand the nature
of earthquake sounds from an actual description of them in a number of
great earthquakes, and by inquiring at the same time into any of the
peculiar facts connected.

Humboldt in his great work, "Cosmos," thus describes the varied voice
of the earthquake:

      "It is either rolling or rustling, or clanking, like
      chains being moved, or like near thunder, or clear and
      ringing, as if obsidian or some other vitrified masses were
      struck in subterranean cavities."

That the sounds produced during earthquakes are carried through the
ground faster than through the air appears clear from the fact that
such sounds are sometimes heard in deep mines when they are not at all
heard on the earth's surface.

In describing the earthquake that occurred in Kamtschatka, in 1759,
Krashenikoff of St. Petersburg states that noises were heard like the
rushing of a strong underground wind, accompanied by a hissing sound,
which resembled the sizzlings heard when red hot coals are thrown in
water.

In an earthquake that occurred in Lincolnshire, England, February
6th, 1817, a noise was heard closely resembling the sounds of wagons
running away on a road. So complete and convincing was the resemblance
that several wagoners on one of the roads drew their teams to one side
so as to permit the runaway to pass safely.

Another kind of noise heard during earthquakes is a loud hollow
bellowing. Sometimes, however, the sounds are more musical in their
nature, being not unlike those produced by a very large organ pipe. At
other times they resemble the noises produced when steam is blown into
cold water.

The following account of earthquake sounds is given by Daubeny,
in his book on volcanoes. It appears that during March, 1822, the
people living on the island of Melida, opposite Ragusa, in Dalmatia,
were greatly alarmed by sounds that at first they believed due to
cannonading either at sea or on the neighboring coast. They afterwards
found that these sounds were due to something that was taking place
under the ground. The noises continued at intervals until August
23d, 1823, when a great earthquake occurred, during which one of the
highest mountains on the island was cleft or split in one place. The
underground noises continued from time to time and so frightened
the people that they were about to leave the island permanently and
emigrate to the mainland of Dalmatia. They were dissuaded from doing
so by the government, and while the noises continued at intervals it
so happened that no damage came to them. It is said, however, that
twenty years after an active volcano broke out on the island.

There are various causes that produce earthquake sounds. A very slight
rubbing or grinding together of rock surfaces may produce fairly
loud noises, the volume of the sound being increased by transmission
through the rock masses that lie in the path of the waves. An example
of such an increase in the loudness of sounds is seen in the case of
several of the large blocks of stone used for some of the piers of
Kingston Harbor, in Ireland. When these rocks are moved together by
blows of the waves they produce loud and appalling sounds, as if the
whole island were being washed away. The same rocks, however, when
left high and dry on the falling of the tide, can be caused to rub
together, when moved by the hand. Under these circumstances, they
produce but feeble sounds that can only be heard in their immediate
neighborhood.

No doubt, some find it difficult to understand how it is possible for
comparatively feeble sound-waves to be strengthened by their passage
through large masses of solids. This is important and should be made
clear. As everyone well knows, the ticking of a watch can only be
heard at a short distance when the watch is held in the hand, because
the sound-waves cannot readily pass through the body of the person
holding the watch to the earth, the materials of the body not being
sufficiently elastic. If, however, the watch be placed on the bare
surface of a large wooden table from which the tablecloth has been
removed, so that the watch can come directly in contact with the wood,
and nothing else is placed on the table but the watch, the sound-waves
are transmitted to the mass of the table and its entire surface sends
them out into the air. The ticking of the watch can then be heard
distinctly in almost any part of a large room.

Mallet states that in nearly all great earthquakes sounds are heard
before the principal shock, and in his description of the Calabrian
earthquake Hamilton says:

      "All agreed that every shock seemed to come with a rumbling
      noise from the westward, beginning with the horizontal and
      ending with the vorticose (rotary) motion."

According to Dolomieu, during the Lisbon earthquake, the shocks were
preceded "by a loud subterranean noise like thunder, which was renewed
for every shock.... This great shock," he says, referring to one of
the great upward shocks, "occurred without the prelude of any slight
shocks, without any notice whatever as suddenly as the blowing up of
a mine.... Some, however, pretend that a muffled interior noise was
heard almost at the same moment."

The noises do not generally continue long after the earthquake shocks.
In some cases, however, a very loud noise is heard at intervals for a
considerable length of time after the principal shock. This was the
case at Quito and Ibarra, in which a great noise was heard for from
eighteen to twenty minutes after the principal shock. In a similar
manner during the earthquake of October, 1746, at Lima, and Callao,
South America, peals of underground thunder were heard at Truxillo
for fifteen minutes after the principal shock. In such cases it
seems probable that the noises were not caused by the same impulses
that caused the original shock, but by the forces that caused the
subsequent shock.

Humboldt relates that in 1784 there were noises heard at Guanajuato,
from the 9th to the 12th of February. They were not, however, followed
by an earthquake.

Humboldt also states that in an earthquake which occurred on the 30th
of April, 1812, on the banks of the Orinoco River, in South America,
a loud thundering noise was heard, without, however, any shock, but
at this time a volcano on the island of St. Vincent, in the Lesser
Antilles, although some 632 miles to the northeast, was pouring out
streams of lava. Again in the great eruption of Cotopaxi, in 1734,
underground noises were heard as if cannon were being fired. These
sounds were distinctly heard at as great a distance as Honda on the
banks of the Magdalena River. Now, bearing in mind that the crater of
Cotopaxi is situated on the high plateau of Quito, in a region full
of valleys and fissures, it would seem that for the sounds to have
been sent through the 436 miles between the mountains and the valley
of the Magdalena River, the waves must, for the greater part, have
been transmitted through the solid earth at some considerable distance
below the surface.

Mallet states that the underground noises which continued for more
than a month from the midnight of January 9th, 1784, at Guanajuato,
were not followed by any earthquake shocks, that it was if as thunder
clouds occupied the space below the surface at that part of the earth
and from these clouds there came the slow rolling sounds like short,
quick, snaps of thunder.

Major Dutton in his book entitled "Earthquakes in the Light of the
New Seismology" gives the following as the principal signs that herald
the coming earthquake in the open country.

      "The first sensation is the sound. It is wholly unlike
      anything we have ever heard before, unless we have already
      had a similar experience. It is a strange murmur. Some
      liken it to the sighing of pine-trees in the wind, or to
      falling rain; others to the distant roar of the surf;
      others to the far-off rumble of the railway train; others
      to distant thunder. It grows louder. The earth begins to
      quiver, then to shake rudely. Soon the ground begins to
      heave. Then it is actually seen to be traversed by visible
      waves somewhat likes waves at sea, but of less height and
      moving much more swiftly. The sound becomes a roar. It is
      difficult to stand, and at length it becomes impossible to
      do so. The victim flings himself to the ground to avoid
      being dashed to it, or he clings to a convenient sapling,
      or fence-post, to avoid being overthrown. The trees are
      seen to sway sometimes through large arcs, and are said,
      doubtless with exaggeration, to touch the ground with
      their branches, first on one side, then on the other. As
      the waves rush past, the ground on the crests opens in
      cracks which close again in the troughs. As they close, the
      squeezed-out air blows forth sand and gravel, and sometimes
      sand and water are spurted high in air. The roar becomes
      appalling. Through its din are heard loud, deep, solemn
      booms that seem like the voice of the Eternal One, speaking
      out of the depths of the universe. Suddenly this storm
      subsides, the earth comes speedily to rest and all is over."

There are many other curious phenomena besides earthquake sounds or
noises. Among some of the more interesting are the fire and smoke that
are seen to come out of fissures that have been rent in the ground.

It is possible that in many cases these flashes of fire are in reality
produced by electric discharges that momentarily light the clouds of
dust thrown up out of the fissure. But sometimes true flames are seen
escaping from the fissures. This was the case during the earthquake of
Lisbon, in 1755, when fire burst through fissures at several places,
burning with a lambent flame for some hours.

The clouds of dust that follow the rending of mountain masses by
earthquakes are probably to be traced to the fracture of the rock
masses, the dust so formed being violently thrown forth by the air
squeezed out of the fissures, when they are suddenly closed. The
violent compression of this air may raise this dust to incandescence.

Mallet asserts that in many cases the clouds of smoke observed do
not consist of true smoke like that produced when wood or vegetable
matters are incompletely burned, but is only ordinary air mixed with
sulphurous acid gas, and various other gases.

But not only fire and smoke are seen at times coming out of fissures
in the earth. A thing still more frequently thrown out is water, which
often spouts forth along with great quantities of mud, sand, and the
finely ground fragments of earthy materials generally. Among many
other instances where the emission of water from the crevices was
particularly noticeable, may be mentioned the earthquakes at Jamaica
in 1687 and 1692. Here the water, in some places, was thrown out of
the ground to considerable heights in the air.

Mallet calls attention to the fact that the waters of springs collect
in reservoirs consisting either of fissures or crevices of the rocks,
of small width but great depth, which are vertical or inclined to the
horizon, or in reservoirs that are formed of extended beds of sand or
gravel.

Now, when the earthquake waves moving horizontally over the surface
produce movements that squeeze these fissures together, the water in
the fissures is spurted out in high jets, and carries with it the
finely divided rock or sand formed by the rubbing together of the rock
surfaces. In the case of the reservoirs consisting of beds of sand
or gravel, lying between impervious layers, if, during an earthquake
motion, the land areas are suddenly lowered, the water rushing into
the cavity thus left will afterwards be shot out with considerable
force, when the land is suddenly raised again.

Where there are no direct openings in the ground the water will burst
through the crust in the shape of great vertical jets, thus forming a
circular hole, broken or fractured at its edges. Water jets of this
character were especially numerous during the earthquake of Calabria
in 1783. In a swampy plain, known as Rosarno, many of these circular
wells or openings about the size of an ordinary carriage wheel, though
in some cases much larger, were to be seen crowded together. The
appearance of the openings are represented in Fig. 40.

Some of these were filled with water, but the greater number were dry
and filled with loose sand. These latter, when examined by digging,
were shown to be funnel-shaped, as seen in Fig. 41. As seen, the
margins of the wells exhibit a series of cracks or crevices extending
radially outward from the centre. Their origin is evident. As the
water was violently expelled by the squeezing motion of the upper
and lower impervious strata, it shot upwards, thus producing the
funnel-shaped tube. At the same time the force of the eruption was
sufficiently great to produce the radial fissures or fractures at the
sides.

[Illustration: FIG. 40. CIRCULAR HOLLOW FORMED BY CALABRIAN
EARTHQUAKE]

[Illustration: FIG. 41. SECTION OF CIRCULAR HOLLOW FORMED BY
CALABRIAN EARTHQUAKE]

But greater fissures than these have been formed by earthquakes,
especially those of the class created by a slipping of the earth's
strata. In the case of an earthquake on the South Island of New
Zealand, in 1848, a fissure having an average width of eighteen
inches could be clearly seen extending in a direction parallel to
the mountain chain for a distance of sixty miles, and during a later
earthquake in the same region, in 1855, a fracture was formed that
could be clearly traced for a distance of nearly ninety miles.

In some cases these fissures or fractured parts of the crust are left
with one of their sides at a higher level than the opposite side. This
was the case of the great Japanese earthquake of October 28th, 1891.

There are three kinds of waves produced by earthquakes; namely, the
earthquake waves proper through the earth; the sound waves in the air,
and great forced waves in the sea.

The sound waves of course reach the air from the point of origin below
the earth's surface through the solid materials of the crust, and take
on the curious varieties already described in connection with the
sounds accompanying earthquakes.

We have already briefly described the manner in which the earthquake
waves travel through the materials of the earth's crust. There remain
to be discussed the great waves that are rolled up in the ocean
during an earthquake shock. These waves are, perhaps, among the most
destructive phenomena of great earthquakes. The following are only
some of the more remarkable of such waves, and have been taken from
Mallet's collection of earthquake data.

During some of the great earthquakes on the coasts of Chile and Peru,
huge waves from the ocean did great damage when they reached the land.
In the earthquake of 1590, ocean waves rushed for several leagues
inland over the coast of Chile, carrying with them ships that were
left high and dry as the wave receded. In the earthquake of 1687,
Callao was inundated by a great wave from the Pacific Ocean, and ships
were carried a full league into the country. During the earthquake of
1746, Callao was again swept away by a huge ocean wave. At later times
earthquake waves have caused great damage to several other parts of
the coast of South America.

Ocean waves of this character are formed by successive upward and
downward movements at the bottom of the ocean, following each other at
very brief intervals. Le Conte points out that the sudden upheaval of
the bed of the ocean forms a huge mound in the surface of the water
which results in a large wave that spreads rapidly in all directions.
Waves produced in this manner sometimes reach a height of fifty to
sixty feet. They are not readily observed in the deep ocean, but
as soon as they reach the shallow waters near the shore they rush
forward, forming waves from fifty to sixty feet in height and, rushing
over the land, sweep everything before them.

During the great Lisbon earthquake of 1755 a huge wave started at a
point fifty miles off the coast of Portugal. Half an hour after the
earthquake was over several waves, the largest of which was sixty
feet in height, rushed over a part of the city and greatly increased
the ruin already wrought by the earthquake. According to Le Conte the
great waves so formed moved in all directions across the Atlantic
Ocean. They were thirty feet high when they reached Cadiz, eighteen
feet in height at Madeira, and five feet on the coast of Ireland. They
even crossed the Atlantic, being observed on the coasts of the West
Indies.

A great ocean wave accompanied the Japanese earthquake in 1854. As in
the case of the Lisbon earthquake this wave started in the bed of the
ocean off the coast of Japan and only reached the island half an hour
afterwards. It was thirty feet in height, and completely swept away
the town of Simoda.

Owing to water's greater freedom of motion earthquake waves travel
greater distances through the water than they do on land.

Of course, great earthquake shocks as a rule cause a very large loss
of life. The following figures from Mallet give some idea of the
extent of this loss, which is generally a matter of a few moments.

In the Lisbon earthquake, where the worst shock lasted a few seconds,
60,000 people were killed. During other earthquakes the losses have
been as follows: 10,000 at Morocco; 40,000 in Calabria; 50,000 in
Syria, and probably 120,000 in earthquakes that occurred in Syria in
A. D. 19 and in A. D. 526.

But even these figures give only a meagre idea of the vast loss of
life that has occurred during the past. It is said that during the
reign of Justinian, earthquakes repeatedly shook the whole Roman
world. The city of Constantinople was visited by earthquake shocks
that continued at intervals for forty days. Deep chasms were opened in
the earth and huge masses were thrown into the air. Enormous sea-waves
were formed. At Antioch, during the earthquake of May 20th, A.
D. 526, 250,000 people are believed to have been killed.

On the 31st of July, A. D. 365, in the second year of
Valentinian, a dreadful earthquake shook the Roman world, and a great
wave rolled in from the Mediterranean and swept two miles inland,
carrying ships over the tops of houses. During this earthquake 50,000
people lost their lives at Alexandria.

In the earthquake of Messina in 1692, 74,000 people are said to have
been killed; and, according to other accounts, 100,000. In the year
A. D. 602, another earthquake at Antioch killed 60,000 people.

During the earthquake of Quito, in 1797, Humboldt estimates that
40,000 natives were either buried in crevices in the earth, under
the ruins of buildings, or were drowned in lakes and ponds that were
temporarily formed.

In this connection Mallet writes as follows:

      "Such are the numbers to be met with in narratives, and
      if we suppose that there occurs one great earthquake in
      three years over the whole earth and that this involves the
      entombment of only 10,000 human beings, and that such has
      been the economy of our system for the last 4,000 years, we
      shall have a number representing above 13,000,000 men thus
      suddenly swallowed up, with countless bodies of animals of
      every lower class. Sir Charles Lyell then with good reason
      suggests that even in our own time we may yet find the
      remains of men and of their habitations and implements thus
      buried deep and embalmed, as it were, by earthquakes that
      occurred in the days of Moses and the Ptolemies."

Necessarily the progress of a great earthquake wave will produce great
changes in the earth's surface features; for example, landslides,
where immense layers of clay or other material slip or slide to a
lower level and are thrown across the course of a river, causing its
waters to be dammed up and then by spreading to form great lakes.

Sometimes, after vast bodies of water have been collected in this
manner, disastrous floods result later from a sudden giving way of the
barrier, and the loss thus caused is occasionally far greater than
that directly due to the earthquake.

Permanent changes of level are frequently caused by earthquakes, as,
for example, the coast of Chile during the earthquake of November
19th, 1822, where the coast for many miles was raised from three to
four feet above its former plane.

In other cases the level of the ground is permanently lowered. This
occurred in the Bengal earthquake in 1762, when an area of some sixty
square miles suddenly sank, leaving only the tops of the higher points
above water.

In some cases of changes in the level of the ground, large areas being
raised in one place and lowered in another, rivers take new courses,
and their old courses are completely obliterated.




CHAPTER XXV

THE EARTHQUAKE OF CALABRIA IN 1783


All students of elementary geography are quick to notice that the
extreme southeastern part of Italy is shaped something like a boot,
which appears to be kicking at the island of Sicily. This part of the
Mediterranean Sea has for very many years been the arena or storm
centre of more or less intense volcanic activity. To the northwest is
the active volcano of Vesuvius, as well as the volcanic regions of the
Phlegræan Fields. Immediately opposite the point of Italy, near the
toe of the foot, is the active volcanic mountain, Etna, while not far
from this point is the volcano of Stromboli.

In 1783 this part of the world was visited by a very severe
earthquake. Since at that time the country was divided into two
parts, known as Upper Calabria and Lower Calabria, this earthquake is
sometimes spoken of as the earthquake of the Calabrias, or more simply
as the Calabrian earthquake.

The great mountain range of the Apennines, mainly of granite
formation, extends through the central part of Italy. The lands
adjoining the mountains on each side are flat and marshy, and
consequently unhealthy.

Numerous observers have compiled excellent accounts of the Calabrian
earthquake. These, having been made by educated persons, are, to a
large extent free from the inconsistencies and exaggerations apt to
characterize descriptions by ignorant persons, especially when in
a condition of excitement or alarm. Among reliable writers was Sir
William Hamilton, who made a personal examination of the region, soon
after the first severe shock, and collected much valuable information
for a paper which was afterwards published in the Philosophical
Transactions of the Royal Society. Then, too, Dolomieu, another
scientific man of high ability, made a careful study of the effects
produced by the earthquake.

[Illustration: FIG. 42. MAP OF THE CALABRIAN EARTHQUAKE OF
1783]

As can be seen by an examination of the map presented in Fig. 42, the
part of Italy included in the Calabrias covers an area from north to
south almost equal to two degrees of latitude. Although the shock
extended beyond the limits of Calabria, since it reached as far north
as Naples, as well as over a great part of the Island of Sicily, the
territory in which the greatest damage was done did not exceed in area
about 500 square miles.

The southern part of Italy is subject to frequent earthquake shocks.
Pignatari, an Italian physician, asserts that this region was visited
during 1783 by no less than 949 earthquakes, of which 501 were of the
first class, or degree of intensity, while in 1784, there were 151
earthquakes, of which ninety-eight were of the first class.

It seems that the city of Oppido, marked on the above map as midway
between the two coasts, was the point from which the severe earthquake
of 1783 started. If one draws a circle, with a radius of twenty-two
miles, around Oppido as a centre, the portions of the Calabrias that
were the most affected will all lie within this circle.

The great Calabrian earthquake was attended by numerous shocks. The
first and the most severe shock, that of February 5th, 1783, was only
two minutes in destroying most of the houses in all cities, towns, and
villages on the western side of the Apennines in this part of Italy.

Another severe shock occurred on the 28th of March. This shock was
almost as severe as that of February 5th.

In order to understand many of the effects produced by this
earthquake, inquiry must be made into the geological character of the
region. According to Dolomieu, the flat country at the slopes of the
Apennines, known as the Plain of Calabria, is covered with sand and
clay mixed with sea shells. These strata have been deposited by the
sea from materials that have been obtained by the decomposition of the
granite mountain ranges in the Apennines. The plain is quite level
except where it is crossed by deep valleys or ravines, which have
been eroded or cut by the swift mountain torrents. In many cases,
these ravines or valleys have depths as great as 600 feet. Their sides
are generally almost perpendicular. Consequently, as Lyell remarks,
throughout the length of the mountain chain, the soil, which adheres
but loosely to the granite base of the mountain chain, could therefore
be easily separated from the mountain, and sliding over the solid
steeps of the mountain could readily move, especially through the
ravines or gorges, to distances in some cases as great as from nine to
ten miles.

This peculiarity of the country must be thoroughly understood, since,
otherwise, it would seem impossible that lands could be carried
several miles from their former position, and often bear along
with them almost undisturbed houses, olive groves, vineyards, and
cultivated fields.

The heaving of the surface of the earth like the waters of the sea,
so common in severe earthquakes, occurred during the Calabrian
earthquake. In some places this heaving so shook the trees that they
bent until their tops touched the ground near their base.

Parts of the ground were violently thrown upwards into the air as in
the explosive type of earthquakes. In many instances the large paving
stones were thrown into the air and afterwards found with their lower
portions upwards.

During the earthquake deep fissures were made in the earth at various
localities and there were, moreover, marked changes of level. At
Messina in Sicily the shore was fissured and rent and while before the
convulsion the surface had been level, it was afterwards found to be
inclined toward the sea.

According to Dolomieu the following curious incident occurred during
the passage of the earthquake waves. A well in the ground of one of
the convents of the Augustines, lined on the inside with stones, was
so affected by the upward thrust given to the land that its stone
lining was left projecting above the level of the earth in the form of
a small tower some eight or nine feet in height.

Frequent instances occurred of deep fissures in the surface of the
earth. Many of these remained open after the earthquake, although in
other cases they were firmly closed together before the earthquake
shocks ceased.

[Illustration: FIG. 43. FISSURES CAUSED BY THE CALABRIAN
EARTHQUAKE]

Fig. 43 represents the appearance of certain fissures in a part of
Calabria during this earthquake. These cracks, it will be noticed,
radiate or pass outward in all directions from a central point, just
like the cracks that are formed in a glass window pane when it is
fractured by a stone thrown against it.

Of course, the most violent effects were near the origin of the
earthquake at Oppido. Here the formation of deep fissures was common.
In another part of the country a number of buildings were suddenly
swallowed up in a central chasm, which almost immediately closed,
thus permanently burying all these objects.

Some idea of the force with which the fissures were afterwards closed
can be formed by reflecting on a case where, in order to recover some
of the buried articles, the ground was dug up at these points, and it
was found that the materials, human bodies and other objects, were so
jammed together as to make one compact mass.

To Sir William Hamilton a place was shown where the fissures, though,
when he saw them, they were not more than a foot in width, had opened
sufficiently wide during the shock to swallow up a hundred goats as
well as an ox.

An earthquake that caused such marked changes in the appearance of the
earth's surface, naturally made great changes in the direction of the
rivers. In one case the end of a small valley was so completely filled
with stones and dirt that the water was dammed up, producing a lake
two miles in length and one mile in breadth. In a similar manner no
less than 215 lakes were formed in different portions of Calabria.

Of course, in the flat country at the base of the Apennines,
frequent landslides occurred, the land sliding into great chasms and
continuing to move down them for considerable distances, so that in
many places pieces of land containing olive trees, vineyards, and
green fields, were bodily transported for distances of several miles.
This, moreover, was done so quietly as to leave the houses entirely
uninjured, and the trees and other vegetation continuing to grow up
with apparently no marked decrease in vitality.

As is usual in such cases, the sudden and strong blows acting on the
waters of the sea, killed great numbers of fish just as does the
explosion of dynamite at a point below the surface of the water; and
in a similar way the fish that usually live at the bottom of the sea
in the soft mud, being disturbed by the earthquake shocks, came near
the surface where they were caught in vast numbers.

It is an interesting fact that during this earthquake the volcano of
Stromboli showed a marked decrease in the volume of smoke it gave out.
Etna, however, was observed to emit large quantities of vapor during
the convulsion.

Lyell tells the following story of the Prince of Scilla, who with
many of his vassals sought safety in their fishing boats. Suddenly,
on the night of February 5th, while some of the people were sleeping
in the boat, and others were resting on a low plain near the sea,
in the neighborhood, another shock occurred, a great mass was torn
from a neighboring mountain and hurled with a crash on the plain, and
immediately afterwards a wave, twenty feet or more in height, rolled
over the level plain, sweeping away the people. It then retreated, but
soon rushed back again, bringing with it many of the bodies of the
people who had perished. At the same time all the boats were either
sunk or dashed against the beach, and the Prince with 1,430 of his
people was destroyed.

The total number of deaths caused by this earthquake in the Calabrias
and Sicily were estimated by Hamilton at 40,000. Besides these about
20,000 more perished in epidemics that followed the earthquake, or
died for lack of proper food.




CHAPTER XXVI

THE GREAT LISBON EARTHQUAKE OF 1755


Lisbon, the capital of Portugal, on the Tagus River, is built along
both banks for five miles, and on several small neighboring hills. It
is supplied with water by means of an aqueduct, called the Alcantara,
which brings the water from springs about nine miles to the northwest.
For portions of its length the aqueduct is placed underground, but
where it crosses the deep valley of the Alcantara it is supported,
for a distance of 2,400 feet, by a number of marble arches, which
in one place are 260 feet in height. This fact is put forward not
merely for the sake of its artistic interest, but because, strange to
relate, this part of the aqueduct remained uninjured during that great
earthquake, the greatest of modern times.

On the 1st of November, 1755, this frightful catastrophe, according to
Lyell, from whose excellent account much of the information contained
in this chapter has been obtained, struck the beautiful city almost
without any warning. Terrible sounds came suddenly from underground;
almost instantly afterward a violent shock threw down the greater
portion of the city; in less than six minutes 60,000 people were
killed.

The place from which this earthquake started must have been situated
on the bed of the ocean at some distance from the coast; for the great
wave thus raised in the Atlantic Ocean did not reach the mouth of the
Tagus River until about half an hour after the most severe shocks
were over. The arrival of this wave at the mouth of the Tagus was
announced by the sea retiring to such an extent as to leave the bar
dry. Then a huge wave, sixty feet in height, rolled in from the ocean
and completed the work of destruction that had been commenced by the
earthquake.

So great was the shock that the mountains in the neighborhood were
violently shaken and some of them split or fractured in a most
wonderful manner.

Particularly large was the loss of life in the churches whither
hundreds hastened for refuge when the shakings of the earth began,
for most of these buildings fell and buried the worshippers. Another
immense loss of life was caused by the destruction of a large marble
quay or wharf that was suddenly swallowed up by the sea. While the
buildings in the city were being overthrown by the violent shakings
of the earth, a multitude sought the quay as a flat place where they
could not be injured by the falling buildings. Suddenly, however,
this structure sank into the water and not only were all the people
drowned, but none of the bodies was ever afterwards found.

Failure to find any remnants of the pier or any of the people who
perished on it has been attributed to the formation of eddies or
whirls that were sufficiently strong to carry down vessels by suction
similar to that of the famous maelstrom off the coast of Norway. Of
course, in a time of boundless excitement like that of the Lisbon
earthquake, accounts are apt to be highly exaggerated. For example,
assertions are made in many books that the water left in the harbor
after the sinking of the quay was unfathomable. Now, in point of fact,
the depth of this place has been measured and found to be less than
100 fathoms.

When it is remembered that not one of the bodies of the people on that
quay was ever again seen, it is possible, as Lyell suggests, that a
deep fissure or chasm opened immediately on the ground on which the
quay stood, so that it, together with all on it, were dropped into the
chasm, which, closing, buried them deep in the earth.

The Lisbon earthquake was especially noted for the extent of country
affected by it. Humboldt estimated this area as being more than four
times the size of Europe. In parts of this area immense mountain
ranges, such as the Pyrenees, Alps, etc., were violently shaken. When
the size of these mountains is considered one realizes that it must
have required a mighty force to shake them. These shakings were so
severe that they produced a deep fissure in the ground in France.
Continuing towards the north the solid earth was shaken as far as
the shores of the Baltic and Norway and Sweden, generally. This, of
course, included the flat country of Northern Germany. The hot springs
of Toplitz disappeared for a time, but, breaking out afterwards,
discharged such quantities of muddy water that the surrounding country
was inundated.

The waves crossed the Atlantic, causing high tides on the island of
Antigua, Barbadoes, and Martinique, of the Lesser Antilles, where,
instead of the usual tides of two feet, tides of twenty feet high were
observed. Further to the north the waves reached the eastern shores of
North America, and shook the continent as far west as the Great Lakes,
and spread in the North Atlantic as far as Iceland.

Toward the south the waves affected parts of northwestern Africa,
where much loss of life occurred in the villages some eight leagues
distant from the city of Morocco. Here from 8,000 to 10,000 people
were killed, being swallowed up by deep fissures in the earth, which
afterwards closed on their bodies.

Severe shocks were in many cases felt on vessels at sea. In one
instance, although the vessels were at considerable distances from
where the waves started, the captains reported that the shocks were so
great that on several occasions it was believed the vessel had struck
a rock, till, on heaving the lead, they found that they were in very
deep water. In another instance, such was the shock to the vessel that
the planks on the deck had their seams opened. In still another case
several of the sailors were thrown into the air for a distance of
about one and a half feet.

It has been frequently observed that when great earthquakes happen,
curious changes take place in the level of the waters of lakes
entirely disconnected with the ocean; for example, mountain lakes,
far above the level of the sea, the water suddenly rising and then
resuming its original level. Sometimes the waters of such lakes have
suddenly disappeared, probably being drained off through a fissure
formed in the bed of the lake. In such event the lake generally
remains dry after the passage of the earthquake.

At the time of the Lisbon earthquake it was observed that the water of
Loch Lomond in Scotland first rose above its ordinary, then sank again
to its usual level. This difference of level is explained by Lyell as
follows: when the earthquake waves reached the lake, the water being
unable to take the sudden shove given to it by the earthquake waves,
dashed over that side of the basin which first received the shock.
Assuming this to be the case, since the rise of the level in the water
of Loch Lomond was two feet and four inches, it is comparatively easy
to calculate the speed of movement that the earthquake waves had,
when they reached this body of water. Calculated in this way it would
seem that the waves had a speed of about twenty miles a minute.

But what especially characterized the Lisbon earthquake were the great
waves that were produced in the ocean. Besides the huge wave that
entered the Tagus, a wave of the same height swept eastward along the
southern coast of Spain, and the northwestern coast of Africa. At
Tangier in Africa it swept the coast as a very high wave no less than
eighteen times, or, in other words, eighteen huge waves rolled in from
the ocean. At Funchal, on the Madeira Islands, this wave rose fifteen
feet above the high water mark.

Many attempts have been made to explain the manner in which the great
sea waves are started in earthquake movements. Some believe that they
are due to the sudden raising or heaving up of the water, far above
ordinary level. But, as Lyell points out, this explanation would not
be satisfactory for the waves produced in the case of the Lisbon
earthquake, since it would fail to account for the fact that both on
the coasts of Portugal as well as on the island of Madeira the high
wave was preceded by a movement of the water toward the point of
origin; that is, the waters moved away from Lisbon and the Madeira
Islands, so as to leave the water very low at those points, when
shortly afterwards a huge wave rushed in from the sea and swept over
the land.

Earthquake waves move much more rapidly through the solid rocks of
the earth's crust than through the waters of the ocean. The shock
transmitted through the solid earth from Lisbon to the Madeira Islands
took only twenty-five minutes to reach the islands, while the waves in
the ocean took about two and a half hours to cover the same distance.




CHAPTER XXVII

THE EARTHQUAKE OF CUTCH, INDIA, IN 1819


Cutch is one of the Provinces of India lying on the western coast of
Hindostan, east of the delta of the Indus River.

A great earthquake occurred in this region on June 16th, 1819. As
indicated by the map presented in Fig. 44, by Lyell, the district
of Cutch lies on the coast of the Arabian Sea. Cutch is at times a
peninsula, being washed on the south and east by the Arabian Sea and
the Gulf of Cutch, and on the north by a depression known as the Runn
of Cutch which, during unusual tides, is overflowed by the waters of
the sea, but for the rest of the year is dry.

The earthquake of Cutch was apparently central at the town of Bhooj,
where the destruction was extreme, hardly a house being left standing.
The shock extended over a radius of about 1,000 miles from Bhooj,
reaching to Khatmandoo, Calcutta, and Pondicherry.

At Anjar the fort, together with its tower and guns, were completely
ruined. The shocks continued at intervals after the principal shock
until June 20th, when the volcano of Denodur is said by some to have
emitted flames, although this is denied by others.

Great changes were produced in the eastern channel of the Indus,
which forms the western boundary of the Province of Cutch. The water
in this inlet had become so low that it was readily fordable at low
tide at Luckput, and was only covered with six feet of water at high
tide. After the earthquake it deepened at the port of Luckput to over
eighteen feet at low tide, while in other parts of the channel the
water had deepened from four to ten feet at high tide, where before
the earthquake shock it had never been deeper than from one to two
feet. Indeed, after these changes the inland navigation of the country
again became possible after having been closed for many centuries.

[Illustration: FIG. 44. MAP SHOWING DISTRICT VISITED BY THE
EARTHQUAKE OF CUTCH OF 1819]

The Cutch earthquake resulted in a marked depression of the country,
especially north of Luckput, where the fort and village of Sindree
were so quietly sunk that the fort, with its tower and walls, was left
projecting slightly above a body of water that not only completely
covered the old site but also formed a large lake marked on the
preceding map, at Sindree, by the dark shading. It was this change of
level that deepened the eastern channel of the Indus, just mentioned.

[Illustration: FIG 45.. SINDREE BEFORE THE EARTHQUAKE OF
1819]

Fig. 45, from Lyell, gives an idea of the appearance of the fort at
Sindree before the earthquake. The appearance of the fort after its
submergence is represented in Fig. 46, where, as will be noticed, only
the top of the tower and the walls remain above the surface of the
water. That the masonry was not affected either by the earthquake, or
by the inrush of waters, is evident from the fact that the ruins were
still standing in March, 1838, as represented in the figure.

In heavy shading on the map in Fig. 44 is a large area lying in the
northern part of the province known as the Runn of Cutch. This is a
flat region of about 7,000 square miles. It owes its level surface to
its being the deserted or dried-up bed of a sea. For the greater part
of the year its bottom is dry and hard, and is covered with a crust of
salt half an inch or so in thickness.

[Illustration: FIG. 46. SINDREE AFTER THE EARTHQUAKE OF 1819]

According to Lyell, from whom most of the facts concerning this
earthquake have been obtained, the Runn of Cutch is connected with
a vast inland sea, not only by the water driven into it through the
Gulf of Cutch, but also through the eastern channel of the Indus at
Luckput. These changes occur especially during the monsoon, when the
seas are high, and especially after the heavy rains that come with
these winds, when the wet condition of the soil permits the sea water
to spread rapidly.

Traditions of the natives tend to confirm belief that Cutch a long
time ago was a true peninsula, and that the Runn of Cutch was then an
arm of the sea.

That a change of this character did occur in the Runn of Cutch seems
to be proved by the ruins of old towns now far inland that are said to
have been ancient seaports, and as apparent evidences of this many
pieces of wrought iron and ships' nails have been found in parts of
the Runn.

At the same time that the sinking of the land around the fort and
village of Sindree took place a considerable elevation occurred in the
neighborhood. Immediately after the earthquake, the people in Sindree
saw that a low hill or mound had been thrown up in a place that before
had been a low and perfectly level plain. They named this elevation
the Ullah Bund, or _the Mound of God_, in order to distinguish it
from several embankments that had been built directly across the
eastern mouth of the Indus; for the Ullah Bund had been raised by the
earthquake across the same branch of the Indus.

For several years after the earthquake of 1819 marked changes kept
developing in the channels of the Indus. During 1826 a large body of
water entered into the eastern branch of the Indus above the Ullah
Bund and finally forced its way through the mound, thus establishing
a direct course to the sea. The Ullah Bund, being thus cut in two,
an opportunity was afforded of seeing the materials of which it was
composed. These were found to consist principally of clay filled with
shells.

The opening of the river resulted in throwing such large quantities of
fresh water into Lake Sindree that its waters were rendered fresh for
several months, but at last regained their saltiness.

Dana states that in 1845 another earthquake occurred in this district
which converted Sindree Lake into a salt marsh.




CHAPTER XXVIII

THE SAN FRANCISCO EARTHQUAKE OF APRIL 18, 1906


About twelve minutes past five o'clock on the morning of the 18th of
April, 1906, the inhabitants of San Francisco were rudely awakened by
a few frightful earthquake shocks. Their houses were violently shaken
to and fro, and on all sides were heard the awful crashings of falling
walls, chimneys, and buildings, together with the death-shrieks of
those caught in the ruins. Rushing madly into the streets they could
see on every side evidences of destruction; for, in almost every
direction, were heaps of fallen buildings, still being violently
shaken by the earthquake waves that rapidly passed through the solid
earth. Huge cracks or crevices had been formed in the streets, while
the heavy rails of the trolley tracks had been bent and twisted by the
mighty forces.

Before describing in detail the great San Francisco earthquake, the
location of the city and its surroundings demand consideration.

As can be seen from the map, Fig. 47, San Francisco is situated on the
western coast of California, at the northern end of a peninsula, some
twenty miles in length and about six miles in width. This peninsula
is formed by the magnificent Bay of San Francisco on the east, a
navigable strait called the Golden Gate on the north, and the Pacific
Ocean on the west.

[Illustration: FIG. 47. MAP OF WESTERN COAST OF CALIFORNIA SHOWING
POSITION OF SAN FRANCISCO]

San Francisco Bay, accessible by the Golden Gate, is the principal
harbor on the Pacific Coast, and is, indeed, one of the most
magnificent harbors in the world. It is land-locked, that is,
surrounded by a continuous land border except at its entrance through
the Golden Gate. Including San Pablo Bay, it has a length of about
fifty-five miles, and varies in breadth from three to twelve miles.
The entrance to the harbor, however, is impeded by a bar across the
mouth of the Golden Gate, over which there is a depth of but thirty
feet of water at low tide.

San Francisco has over 750 miles of streets, 200 miles of which are
paved. The city is lighted by both electricity and gas, and has an
extensive system of water-works, the water being brought from the
Pilarcitos and Calaveras Creeks, situated from twenty to forty miles
respectively from the city.

San Francisco is in a region where earthquakes are common. It might,
therefore, be visited at any time by a great catastrophe. There have
occurred between 1850 and 1888, no less than 254 earthquake shocks in
the State of California, these shocks having been especially frequent
in the country surrounding San Francisco Bay. The most severe were
the earthquake of 1868, which injured San Francisco; the Owens Valley
earthquake of 1872; the Vacaville earthquake of 1892; the Mare Island
earthquake of 1898; and a smaller earthquake in 1900. Since 1900 there
was a period of rest until the 18th of April, 1906.

As in the case of practically all severe earthquakes, that which
destroyed San Francisco consisted of a few momentary shocks: then all
was over. According to a preliminary report of the State Earthquake
Commission, appointed by the Governor of California, April 21st, 1906,
these shocks, as recorded in the observatory at Berkeley, began at
twelve minutes and six seconds after five A. M., Pacific
Standard Time. Their entire duration was only one minute and fifty
seconds, but, as frequently happens, there were a number of minor
shocks, following at regular intervals during the next few hours as
well as the next few days.

While the most severe shocks were in the neighborhood of the Peninsula
of San Francisco, yet minor disturbances were felt as far north
as Coos Bay, Oregon, and as far south as Los Angeles, California.
As shown by recording instruments at the seismograph station at
Washington, D. C., Sitka, Alaska; Potsdam, Germany; and Tokio, Japan,
a series of waves were propagated through the earth, as well as over
its periphery.

The damage done within the city limits was wide-reaching. Among the
buildings almost completely destroyed were the City Hall, on which
about $7,000,000 had been expended, the United States Post Office,
besides many business blocks, hotels, department stores, theatres,
banks, churches, and dwelling houses.

Amid the terrors of such a calamity it is difficult to obtain
observations possessing any scientific value. Fortunately, however,
there was in the city a physicist trained to observe phenomena of this
character, Professor George Davidson of the University of California.
Like others, he had been awakened by the first severe shock. At once
recognizing the nature of the phenomenon, and desirous of obtaining
the exact time of its occurrence, he counted seconds while he ran
towards the table on which he had placed his watch, and in this way
estimated that the shock occurred at twelve minutes past five in
the morning. The closeness of this observation is emphasized by the
fact that it differed from the recorded time by only six seconds. He
states that the motion, at the time of its greatest intensity, closely
resembled that of a rat vigorously shaken by a terrier.

The destruction caused by the earthquake was, however, but a small
part of the total loss to the city. Fires were almost immediately
started in the ruined houses by the fires in the kitchens and other
parts of the houses, by the ignited jets of the illuminating gas,
and, perhaps, especially, by the crossing of numerous electric light
wires.

The manner in which the woodwork and other combustible materials of
the buildings were loosely tossed together by the shocks helped the
quick spread of the fires, and this, too, was probably greatly aided
by the illuminating gas from the broken gas pipes and mains. Eight
severe conflagrations were, therefore, soon raging in different parts
of the doomed city. What made these fires especially dangerous was the
fact that the earthquake shocks had destroyed the water pipes. Thus
the firemen were handicapped in their heroic endeavors to extinguish
the flames.

At the time of the fire a strong wind was blowing from the northeast.
Since the firemen were unable to check the flames, the fire line
rapidly advanced. Its path led towards the best residential parts of
the city through portions of the mission section containing a dense
population of poor people. The dwellings in this latter section
consisted of frame houses, through which the flames rapidly spread.

There was but one way to save the city from total destruction--a free
use of dynamite! This was intelligently employed until the supply gave
out, when it seemed that the city was doomed to utter destruction.
But at the last moment, as it were, came a lucky change in the
direction of the wind. Instead of blowing from the northeast, the
steady southwest winds set in, and beat back the fire on itself, so by
Friday, the 18th being Wednesday, it was under complete control and
the rest of the city was saved.

[Illustration: A SAN FRANCISCO PAVEMENT TORN BY THE
EARTHQUAKE _From a Stereograph, Copyright, 1906, by Underwood &
Underwood_]

The extent of the fire is thus described in an article in the
"Outlook," for Saturday, April 28th, 1906, as follows:

      "The turn in the direction of the fire endangered for a
      time the great Ferry House, at the foot of Market Street.
      While the section actually destroyed is not, geographically
      speaking, much more than one-third of the city limits,
      yet it is in the heart of San Francisco, and includes the
      chief business streets and the Mission District, inhabited
      by poor people, and a large part of the so-called Nob Hill
      Quarter, where were the finest and costliest residences of
      the city. Another fine residence section, Civic Heights,
      escaped, together with that known as the Western District.

      "The unburned district, though large in extent, was in
      the nature of suburbs, and was not closely built up, so
      that estimates made, as late as Saturday, declared that
      three-fourths of San Francisco's improvements in real
      estate had been destroyed."

The burnt district was about two miles from east to west and from two
to four miles from north to south, with, of course, very irregular
outlines.

Naturally, the great destruction wrought by the earthquake of April
18th, 1906, attracted the almost universal attention of scientific men
especially interested in earthquake phenomena. We are, therefore, able
to speak authoritatively about the probable causes.

The great San Francisco earthquake of April 18th, 1906, appears to
have been a _tectonic_ quake. Ransome, in an article entitled, "The
Probable Cause of the San Francisco Earthquake," says:

      "The region thus amply fulfils the conditions under which
      tectonic earthquakes arise. It is in unstable equilibrium,
      and it is cut by long northwest faults into narrow blocks
      which are in turn traversed by many minor dislocations.
      Under the operation of the unknown forces of elevation and
      subsidence, stresses are set up which finally overcome the
      adhesion of the opposing walls of one or more of the fault
      fissures; an abrupt slip of a few inches, or a few feet,
      takes place and an earthquake results. The region extending
      for some hundreds of miles north and south of the Bay of
      San Francisco may be considered as particularly susceptible
      to shocks on account of the number and magnitude of the
      faults and the evidences that these furnish of very recent
      slippings and the marked subsidence in the vicinity of the
      Golden Gate."




CHAPTER XXIX

SOME OTHER NOTABLE EARTHQUAKES


It would, of course, be impossible within the limits of this book to
attempt a description of all the remarkable earthquakes in the annals
of science; but before leaving this part of the theme a brief account
of a few more among the many may be worth while.

Jamaica, one of the West Indian Islands, about ninety miles south of
Cuba, suffered a very destructive earthquake in 1692. During this
earthquake the ground was agitated like the waves of the sea. These
movements were so violent that numerous fissures were made in the
ground, as many as 300 being formed at the same time, rapidly opening
and closing. Many of the inhabitants were swallowed up in these
fissures. In some cases, however, their bodies were afterward thrown
out of the fissures, along with quantities of water.

The Jamaican earthquake was characterized by marked sinkings of the
ground. At the city of Port Royal, which was then the capital, many
houses on the harbor side sank in from twenty-four to forty-eight
feet of water. As in the case of the earthquake at Cutch, many of
these houses were left standing, the chimney tops of some being seen
above the water, with their foundations and other parts apparently
uninjured, and some of them were standing at a date as late as 1780.
At a little later date, 1793, they were mostly ruins.

During the Jamaican quake a tract of land containing at least 1,000
acres near the town was sunk, and a wave of the sea rolled over it.
This wave is said by Lyell to have carried a frigate over the roofs of
the houses and left it stranded on one roof. When the wave rolled back
to the sea, the weight of the frigate made it fall through the roof.

Perhaps one of the most remarkable things about the Jamaican
earthquake was the swallowing up of several plantations, which
disappeared, together with all their inhabitants, their former place
becoming a lake. But the lake soon disappeared, leaving a mass of sand
and gravel which obliterated any least sign that dwellings and trees
had once adorned the spot.

The forces developed during this earthquake were sufficiently powerful
to make several rents in the Blue Mountains, and the shock of blows on
the waters of the sea killed fish by the hundred thousands so that the
silver shine of their dead bodies stretched for miles and was beheld
for days "on the face of the deep."

Portions of the world that have been frequently visited by mighty
earthquakes, are the coasts of Chile. On the 24th of May, 1751, a part
of the Chilian coast near the ancient town of Concepcion, sometimes
called Penco, was destroyed by an earthquake, and the powerful
earthquake waves that afterwards rushed in from the sea. So complete
was this destruction that the ancient harbor was rendered useless and
the people had to build another town about ten miles from the coast,
so as to be beyond the reach of earthquake waves from the sea.

Another great earthquake occurred on the coast of Chile on the
19th of November, 1822. This shock was felt simultaneously over a
distance of 1,200 miles from north to south. It reached its greatest
intensity about 100 miles north of Valparaiso. This earthquake caused
a rising of the coast to a height of from three to five feet. From
careful examinations it appears that the area over which a permanent
elevation of the country took place must have been equal to 100,000
square miles, an area equal to about half of the area of France, and
five-sixths that of Great Britain and Ireland.

      "If we suppose," says Dana, "the elevation to have been
      only three feet on an average, it will be seen that the
      mass of rock added to the continent of America by the
      movement, or, in other words, the mass previously below the
      level of the sea, and after the shock, permanently above
      it, must have contained fifty-seven cubic miles in bulk;
      which would be sufficient to form a conical mountain two
      miles high (or about as high as Etna) with a circumference
      at the base of nearly thirty-three miles.... Assuming the
      Great Pyramid of Egypt, if solid, to weigh in accordance
      with the estimate before given 6,000,000 tons, we may
      state that the rock added to the continent by the Chilian
      earthquake would have equalled more than 100,000 pyramids.

      "But it must always be borne in mind that the weight of
      rock here alluded to constituted but an insignificant
      part of the whole amount which the volcanic forces had to
      overcome. The thickness of rock between the surface of
      Chile and the subterranean foci of volcanic action may be
      many miles or leagues deep. Say that the thickness was only
      two miles, even then the mass which changed place and rose
      three feet, being 200,000 cubic miles in volume, must have
      exceeded in weight 363,000,000 pyramids."

The shocks of this earthquake continued from the time of its
occurrence, on November 19th, 1822, to the end of September, 1823, and
even then there were scarcely two days that passed without a shock.

On the 20th of February, 1835, the same part of the world was in the
throes of an earthquake that was felt nearly 1,000 miles from north to
south, or from near the town of Concepcion to the Isle of Chiloe, and
from east to west a distance of about 500 miles, from Mendoza to the
island of Juan Fernandez, which you probably know better as Robinson
Crusoe's Island. By this earthquake the new town of Concepcion and
several other towns were partly destroyed.

There were the same phenomena connected with great sea waves that are
common in earthquakes of this character. Both this and the preceding
earthquakes probably began on the bed of the ocean at some distance
from the coast; for, in the last earthquake, the sea retired from the
Bay of Concepcion and vessels were grounded that had been anchored
in seven fathoms of water. Shortly afterwards waves from sixteen to
twenty feet in height rushed in from the ocean and swept over the land.

It is interesting in this connection to note that the volcanoes of the
Chilian Andes were in an unusual state of activity before, during, and
after the earthquake.

Another characteristic of this quake was the great number of severe
shocks. Between the day of the first great shock; i. e., on February
20th, 1835, and March 4th, there were more than 300 severe shocks.

In this as in the preceding quake a notable elevation of the land near
the coast occurred, amounting to from four to five feet, and a part of
the bed of the ocean near the coast was raised permanently above the
level of the sea.

In the description of the explosive eruption of Krakatoa in 1883, the
fact was noted that the island of Java is very frequently visited by
earthquakes. Here a terribly severe earthquake occurred on the 5th of
January, 1699. There were no less than 208 shocks of great intensity.
Considerable property in the city of Batavia was destroyed, and a
neighboring river, that has its head waters by a volcano near the
city, ran high and muddy and brought down multitudes of fishes that
had been killed, together with many buffaloes, tigers, rhinoceroses,
deer, and other wild beasts. Seven hills bordering on the river sank
down, damming up the streams of the region and thereby causing wide
destruction from floods.

During portions of the years 1811 and 1812 an earthquake occurred
in the United States, in the Mississippi Valley near the town of
New Madrid, Missouri, at the mouth of the Ohio River. These shocks
continued almost incessantly for several months, and were accompanied
by a sinking of the ground over large areas. This depressed area,
known in the neighborhood as _The Sunk Country_, extended along the
course of the White Water River and its tributaries for a distance of
about eighty miles from north to south, and several miles from east
to west. Most of it was converted into a marshy lake characterized by
thousands of submerged trees. The area was covered for the greater
part with water to a depth of about three to four feet.

As the earthquake shocks continued at intervals for several months
there was an ample opportunity for studying the peculiarities of the
earth waves. The ground rose and fell like large waves in the sea, and
after the crest of the waves had reached great heights, the ground
burst, and threw large quantities of water, sand, and earth into the
air.

[Illustration: FIG. 48. NEW ZEALAND]

Throughout the disturbed district there were numerous depressions
known as _sink-holes_, or irregularly shaped pits, varying from ten to
thirty yards across, and having a depth of about twenty feet. These
were formed by the forcible ejection of large quantities of water
mixed with sand.

New Zealand has been subject to earthquake shocks for a long time, the
years 1826, 1841, 1843, 1848, and 1855 being especially marked by such
visitations. It is a characteristic of the New Zealand earthquakes
that they have produced a marked change in the coast line. This was
particularly the case with those of 1848 and 1855.

The 23d of January, 1855, an earthquake occurred that was most violent
in the narrowest part of Cook's Strait, a body of water separating
the two principal islands that constitute New Zealand; or, as they
are called, the North Island and the South Island. These shocks were
felt at sea by ships 150 miles from the coast. The entire area shaken,
including the water, has been estimated at three times the area of
the British Isles. In the vicinity of the southern shores of the
North Island a tract of land having an area of 4,600 square miles is
believed to have been permanently raised from one to nine feet.

The earthquakes in New Zealand are evidently of the tectonic type.
During that of 1848 a rent or fissure was formed, which, though but
eighteen inches in average width, yet extended for a distance of sixty
miles in a direction parallel to one of the mountain chains.

On the 31st of August, 1886, an earthquake of considerable intensity
occurred in the United States in the neighborhood of the city of
Charleston, South Carolina. The details of this earthquake were
carefully studied by Major Dutton of the U. S. A., and published in
the Ninth Annual Report of the United States Geological Survey of 1888.

Charleston is situated on a narrow tongue of land between the Ashley
and the Cooper Rivers, about seven miles from the Atlantic Ocean.
There are in this area numerous creeks connected with the drainage of
these rivers. As the city limits extended, the creeks were filled in,
forming "made land," all buildings or structures erected on this land
being supported by pilings.

It appears that the point at which the earthquakes started was
situated sixteen or seventeen miles from Charleston.

The earthquake shock affected a large area of the United States. Fig.
49 shows curved lines called isoseismal connecting places, having the
same degree of seismic intensity. This map shows that these isoseimals
are marked by figures or numbers from two to ten. These numbers are
the numbers of the Rossi-Forel earthquake scale. They indicate varying
degrees of intensity, beginning from the least intense shock which
is marked as two and ending with the severest shock marked as ten.
There is one degree not marked on this map, the least, called the
micro-seismic shock.

The shocks then increase in intensity as follows: II. Extremely
feeble shocks; III. Very feeble shocks; IV. Feeble shocks; V. Shocks
of moderate intensity; VI. Fairly strong shocks; VII. Strong shocks;
VIII. Very strong shocks; IX. Extremely strong shocks; X. Shocks of
extreme intensity.

The meaning of the map presented in the accompanying figure will now
become more apparent in several ways. That portion numbered ten,
denoting where shocks of greatest intensity have been experienced,
clearly indicates the region just above the point where the earthquake
originated.

Beyond this is a region marked nine where the earthquake shock has
decreased in intensity to the next figure on the Rossi-Forel scale,
and then to eight and a half, seven, six, five, four, three, and two.

[Illustration: FIG. 49. MAP SHOWING REGION AFFECTED BY THE
CHARLESTON EARTHQUAKE OF 1886]

The Charleston earthquake damaged property to a considerable extent;
for, although comparatively few buildings were completely destroyed, a
considerable number were partially injured, and many, not thrown down
by the shock, had to be torn down in order to insure public safety.
The loss of life, fortunately, was comparatively small. During this
earthquake a number of openings called _craterlets_ were made in the
ground by the forcible ejection of large quantities of water and sand.

The empire of Japan is another part of the world particularly subject
to great as well as frequent earthquake shocks. Although Japan is also
especially noted for its volcanic activity, its earthquakes are almost
entirely of the tectonic type, or are due to the slipping of the land
at faults in the earth's crust. Most of these quakes occur on the bed
of the ocean on the sides of a steep slope that extends down to a very
deep part of the Pacific known as the _Tuscarora Deep_.

On the 28th of October, 1891, Japan was visited by a great quake,
generally known as the Mino-Owaro earthquake, from the name of the two
provinces of Mino and Owaro in which it occurred.

This earthquake is correctly regarded as one of the most severe in
Japanese records. Originating, as it did, in a densely populated
section, it caused a great loss of life and property. The deaths
reached about 7,000, while the number of houses entirely destroyed
reached about 80,000 and those partly destroyed nearly 200,000. The
total area markedly affected reached 250,000 square kilometres, while
the area sensibly affected reached 900,000 square kilometres, or a
little more than one-half the Empire.

The place at which this earthquake started was situated, not as usual
on the bed of the ocean, but on the surface of the land. The first
shock was the strongest and wrought the greatest havoc. Besides the
loss of life and property, the damage to the system of dikes or levees
on the river where it passed through the delta plain near the river's
mouth was heavy, and singular in some of its features. In one case,
near the city of Nagoya, on the Bay near the southern coast of Niphon,
one of these levees was lifted and shifted bodily more than sixty feet
from its original position.

That this quake was of the tectonic type was evident from the great
fault that was formed. According to Davison this fault was seventy
miles in length and in places had a breadth of from two to five feet.
It extended from east to west, crossing the entire width of the island.

Another great earthquake was that which hit northeastern Bengal and
Assam in India on the 12th of June, 1897. According to the India
Geological Survey, by whom a careful examination of the effects
produced by this quake was made, it was, perhaps, the greatest quake
that ever happened, not even excepting the Lisbon earthquake.

The place where the quake started appears to have been of unusual size
and irregularity of outline. Its southern boundary was almost in the
shape of a straight line extending from east to west about 200 miles,
and covering a total area of nearly 6,000 square miles. Over all this
vast area the intensity of the shock was exceedingly severe. The total
area perceptibly shaken by the quake was about equal to 1,750,000
square miles.

That this quake was of the tectonic type became evident, when several
faults were found in the ground afterwards. Some of these extended
twelve miles, with a breadth at places as great as thirty feet.

Valparaiso, or, as the name means, Vale of Paradise, the second
largest city of Chile and its chief seaport, lies about ninety
miles east of Santiago, the capital, with which it is connected by a
railroad.

This beautiful sea city is built at the base of a cluster of hills
about 1,600 feet above sea level. On August 16th, 1906, it was visited
by an earthquake. There were two distinct shocks. Contrary to general
rule it was not the first, but the second shock that did the most
damage, coming about ten minutes after the first. As you will see from
the above date the earthquake of Valparaiso occurred shortly after
the catastrophe of San Francisco. In a general way, its coming was
predicted by Dr. G. F. Becker of the United States Geological Survey,
on April 19th, 1906, one day after the San Francisco disaster. Becker
published an article in the "New York Tribune," in which he argued
that the severe shock at San Francisco, having occurred on one part
of the earthquake region extending around the Pacific, would probably
soon affect other portions of this region along the Pacific coast line
of this hemisphere.

As at San Francisco fierce fires immediately started in the ruins of
the houses, but the Valparaisans were more fortunate in having a water
supply available.

There were very many shocks following the first two of this
earthquake. Indeed, during August 16th, 17th, 18th, and 19th, no less
than 380 were noted.

Santiago, situated at the foot of the Andes, was also considerably
damaged by the same earthquake. Estimates, probably conservative, put
the total of dead in both cities at 1,000 and the number of people
rendered homeless temporarily, at 100,000.




CHAPTER XXX

SODOM AND GOMORRAH AND THE CITIES OF THE PLAIN


The eastern border of the Mediterranean Sea or Syria, with that part
of Arabia forming the Sinai Peninsula and which lies between the two
northern arms of the Red Sea, is a region formerly characterized by
extreme volcanic activity. This region includes the greater part of
the land promised, according to the Old Testament, to the Children
of Israel. Through a large part of this region flows that historic
river, the Jordan, until it empties into the Dead Sea, also called the
Salt Sea, the Sea of the Plain, and by some Lake Asphaltites because
of asphalt or bitumen so abundant on its shores. This river has its
source in the Mountains of Lebanon, some distance north of the Sea of
Chinnerth, Tiberius, or the Sea of Galilee, which empties into the
River Jordan.

As the map in Fig. 50 shows, this famous, though small river, flows
between ranges of high hills, or low mountains, that lie on both its
eastern and western boundaries; and these parallel ranges extend
down to the Gulf of Akaba, which forms the eastern boundary of the
Sinai Peninsula. The Sea of Galilee, the valley of the Jordan and the
country between the Dead Sea and the Gulf of Akaba, are all, for the
most part, considerably below the level of the Mediterranean or the
Red Sea; the Sea of Galilee being about 626 feet and the Dead Sea 1312
feet below that line.

[Illustration: FIG. 50. SYRIA]

That this country has been the scene of great volcanic activities is
evident from the volcanic rocks found over different portions of its
surface. Moreover, the remains of several craters are still visible.
On the western banks of the Jordan numerous dikes and streaks of
basalt occur in the limestone that covers parts of the region. Besides
there are thermal springs whose waters are at a temperature, according
to Daubeny, of 114° F. Then, too, in the neighborhood of the Dead
Sea, as well as in the neighborhood of the adjoining mountain ranges,
there are quantities of sulphur and asphaltum or bitumen, while on the
Dead Sea asphaltum is found floating in sufficient quantity to be a
source of considerable revenue to the boatmen who collect it. It was
in this region that Sodom, Gomorrah, and other cities of the plain
were situated; cities so wicked that God utterly destroyed them by
volcanoes and earthquakes.

Volcanic activity was evidently common in this land of the Bible
during the times of the prophets of Israel; for in their poetic
writings are frequent references to such phenomena--beautiful and
majestic similes and metaphors derived from contemplation of live
volcanoes.

Jeremiah says:

      "Behold, I am against thee, O devouring mountain, saith the
      Lord, which destroyeth all the earth; and I will stretch
      out mine hand upon thee, and roll thee down from the rocks,
      and will make thee a burnt[4] mountain.

      "And they shall not take of thee a stone for a corner,
      nor a stone for foundations; but thou shalt be desolate
      forever, saith the Lord." (Jer. li, 25-26.)

So, too, the prophet Isaiah says:

      "Oh that thou wouldst rend the heavens, that thou wouldst
      come down, that the mountains might flow down at thy
      presence!

      "As when the melting fire burneth, the fire causeth the
      water to boil, to make thy name known to thine adversaries,
      that the nations may tremble at thy presence!

      "When thou didst terrible things which we look not for,
      thou cameth down, the mountains flowed down at thy
      presence." (Is. lxiv, 1-2.)

So, too, the prophet Nahum says:

      "The mountains quake at him, and the hills melt, and the
      earth is burned at his presence, yea, the world, and all
      that dwell therein.

      "Who can stand before his indignation? And who can abide in
      the fierceness of his anger? His fury is poured down like
      fire, and the rocks are thrown down by him." (Nahum, i,
      5-6.)

Let us now examine briefly the description Moses gives of the
destruction of Sodom, Gomorrah, and other cities of the plain. This
destruction occurred during the life time of Abraham and his nephew
Lot. The record says that God told Abraham He intended to destroy
them because of their wickedness. Then follows in the 18th chapter
of Genesis the eloquent pleading of Abraham for one of the doomed
cities. At Abraham's earnest plea God promises to spare Sodom if
fifty righteous men can be found therein. Obtaining this respite,
Abraham repeatedly asks further mercy for the city, and at last
receives the sacred promise that the city shall not be destroyed, if
but ten righteous people can be found there. An evidence of the great
wickedness of the city is seen in the fact that not even ten could be
found. Whereupon the Lord gives notice to Lot that the cities were
doomed and commands Lot to leave at once with his family.

      "Escape for thy life; look not behind thee, neither stay
      thou in all the plain; escape to the mountain, lest thou be
      consumed!"

Moses describes what happened as follows:

      "The sun was risen upon the earth, when Lot entered into
      Zoar.

      "Then the Lord rained upon Sodom and upon Gomorrah
      brimstone and fire from the Lord out of heaven;

      "And he overthrew those cities and all the plain, and all
      the inhabitants of the cities, and that which grew upon the
      ground.

      "But his wife looked back from behind him, and she became a
      pillar of salt.

      "And Abraham gat up early in the morning to the place where
      he stood before the Lord:

      "And he looked toward Sodom and Gomorrah, and toward all
      the land of the plain, and beheld, and lo, the smoke of
      the country went up as the smoke of a furnace." (Gen. xix,
      23-28).

This is clearly the description of a volcanic eruption, for throughout
the Bible things are described as they appear to be. When Moses speaks
of brimstone and fire being rained upon Sodom and Gomorrah out of
heaven, he is describing the phenomenon as it would appear to one
looking at it. Of course, we know that in volcanic eruptions such
things come to the earth through the crater of the volcano. The lava
is thrown high into the air, and the hardening, but still red hot,
ashes, rain down on the earth from the ash cloud that forms over the
mountain. But, looked at from a distance they appear to fall or be
rained down from the skies. In exactly the same way, Livy, the Roman
historian, tells about showers of stones that fell from heaven on
Mt. Albano near Rome for two whole days during the second Punic War.
So, too, even Pliny, who had some pretensions to be considered a
naturalist, in describing the appearance of Mt. Vesuvius during the
terrible eruption of A. D. 79, when Herculaneum and Pompeii
were destroyed, speaks of the red hot stones and ashes as falling
from above. So, in reality, they did, although, as in the case of the
cities of the plain, the materials forming the cloud came from the
crater of the volcano below.

As to brimstone falling from the sky, this is by no means an unusual
occurrence during many volcanic eruptions, since sulphur is a common
material, often thrown out of the craters of some volcanoes.

Note also the statement that, when Abraham rose early in the morning
and looked toward the place where Sodom and Gomorrah stood, he saw
the smoke of the country go up like the smoke of a furnace. This was,
probably, the smoke caused by the burning of the city, or even by the
destruction of the crops in their fields, when ignited by the falling
red hot ashes. It might also have been partly due to the burning of
asphalt thrown out from the fissures in the ground, or to the showers
of volcanic ashes that fell from the cloud formed during the eruption.

That the cities there were destroyed by a volcano far in the past
appears from things outside of the Bible proper; for Strabo,
the Greek geographer, refers to Jewish traditions that thirteen
flourishing cities were swallowed up by a volcano, and this finds fair
corroboration in the ruins along the western borders of the Dead Sea.

A writer referring to these eruptions says:

      "The eruptions themselves have ceased long since, but the
      effects, which usually succeed them, still continue to be
      felt at intervals in this country. The coast in general is
      subject to earthquakes, and history notes several which
      have changed the face of Antioch, Laodicea, Tripoli,
      Berytus, Tyre, and Sidon. In 1793 there happened one which
      spread the greatest ravages. It is said to have destroyed
      in the valley of Balbec upwards of 20,000 persons."

Attention has already been called to the fact that the valley of the
Jordan occupies a depressed or sunken region far below the level
of the Mediterranean and the Red Seas. It is the belief of some
geologists that this depression was caused by an earthquake which
accompanied the volcanic eruption that destroyed Sodom and Gomorrah
and the cities of the plain. Indeed, some contend that the present
site of the valley of the Jordan, including the Sea of Tiberius and
the Dead Sea, is a great fissure that was made in the limestone of the
valley during the time of that earthquake.

It would appear from the peculiar geography of this section of country
that the Jordan River has not always emptied into the Dead Sea, but
that before the time of the destruction of the Cities of the Plain the
greater part of the country now occupied by the Dead Sea was a fertile
valley, and the Jordan emptied directly into the Red Sea at the Gulf
of Akaba; that during the disturbance through changes in the valley,
or possibly by a lava stream flowing across a portion of the bed of
the lower Jordan, or even by a huge accumulation of stones or ashes
thrown out from a neighboring volcano, the discharge of the river into
the Red Sea was cut off, and that in this way the waters of the rivers
began to accumulate and to flow over the plain, thus forming the basin
of the Dead Sea.

There is no difficulty in accounting for the saltness of the Dead
Sea. There are large quantities of salt, and salty matters generally,
in the volcanic rocks of the region, but, even if this were not so,
when a river empties into a lake with no outlet to the sea, and
which therefore loses its water by evaporation only, the water will
gradually become very salt, since the remaining waters of such a lake
contain more or less salt, while the water they lose by evaporation
contains none.

The waters of the Dead Sea are very salt, but not the saltest in
the world. In every 100 pounds of Dead Sea water twenty-four pounds
consist of salty matters. The waters of the Great Salt Lake, in Utah,
contain eighteen per cent of salty matters. Lake Van, in eastern
Turkey, is, perhaps, the saltest lake on earth, it containing no less
than thirty-three pounds of salty substances in every 100 pounds of
water.

Daubeny, an authority on volcanoes, and quite competent to give an
opinion concerning what is possible in this line, describes what he
believes took place, as follows:

      "Briefly then to recapitulate the train of phenomena by
      which the destruction of the cities might have been brought
      about, I would suppose that the River Jordan, prior to
      that event, continued its course tranquilly through the
      great longitudinal valley, called El Arabah, into the
      Gulf of Akaba; that a shower of stones and sand from some
      neighboring volcano first overwhelmed these places; and
      that its eruption was followed by a depression of the whole
      of the region, from some point apparently intermediate
      between the lake of Tiberius and the mountains of Lebanon,
      to the watershed in the parallel of 30°, which occurs in
      the valley of El Arabah above-mentioned. I would thence
      infer that the waters of the Jordan, pent-up within the
      valley by a range of mountains to the east and west, and a
      barrier of elevated table-land to the south, could find no
      outlet, and consequently by degrees formed a lake in its
      most depressed portion, which, however, did not occur at
      once, and therefore is not recorded by Scripture as a part
      of the catastrophe, though reference is made in another
      passage of its existence _in what was before the valley of
      Siddim_."

As regards the turning of Lot's wife into a pillar of salt, Henderson,
who has carefully studied this part of the country, remarks: "How
natural is the incrustation of his wife on this hypothesis! Remaining
in a lower part of the valley, and looking with a wistful eye towards
Sodom, she was surrounded, ere she was aware, by the lava, which
rising and swelling, at length reached her, and (whilst the volcanic
effluvia deprived her of life) incrusted her where she stood, so that
being, as it were, embalmed by the salso-bituminous mass, she became a
conspicuous beacon and admonitory example of future generations."




CHAPTER XXXI

INSTRUMENTS FOR RECORDING AND MEASURING EARTHQUAKE SHOCKS


To attempt by the unaided senses a determination of the direction in
which earthquake shocks reach any certain spot, the velocity with
which they are travelling, their degree of intensity, their general
character, whether horizontal or vertical, or any peculiarities which
might show them to be exceptional would be futile for more reasons
than one. Even a skilled scientific observer, familiar with what has
already been discovered and eager to discover more, might in the
excitement of an earthquake become so excited himself as to make him
unable to take reliable observations.

But human ingenuity has succeeded in devising delicate instruments
capable of recording not only the exact time of the arrival of an
earthquake shock, but also of measuring the different parts of what
may seem to be a single shock, the direction in which the shocks reach
the place, as well as the variations of intensity in all the shocks.

Crude instruments to do some of these things have been in use from
very early times. According to Mallet among the more important
of these early instruments was the following: the instrument of
Cacciatore of Palmero. This consisted of a circular wooden dish, about
ten inches in diameter, placed horizontally, and filled with mercury
to the brim of eight notches at equal distances apart. Beneath each
notch was placed a small cup. On the passage of the earthquake waves
the vessel, being tilted in a direction dependent on the direction in
which the waves were travelling, would cause some of the mercury to
spill over into one or more of the cups, thus indicating by its amount
the intensity of the wave, and by the particular cup or cups that were
filled, the direction in which the waves reached the place.

Somewhat similar contrivances were of a vessel partly filled with
molasses, or other sticky liquid; or a cylindrical tub, the sides of
which were chalked or whitewashed and filled with some colored liquid.
In either of these cases, on the passage of the earthquake waves,
the vessels were tilted and showed by the height of the marks the
intensity of the waves, and by the position of the marks the direction
in which the waves first reached the instrument.

These instruments, though satisfactory for the study of earthquake
shocks a long time ago, when an earthquake was regarded as practically
consisting of but a single shock, or, at the most, of a very few
shocks, would be worthless for the study of earthquakes now, for it is
finally known that an earthquake consists of a series of many hundreds
of vibrations, differing greatly in their rapidity and intensity, and
following one another in a definite order.

The old forms of earthquake instruments were known as _seismoscopes_.
The word seismoscope is a compound word from Greek consisting of
the two words, seism and scope. It means literally any instrument
capable of seeing, or calling attention to, a seism, or _earth-shake_.
In other words, a seismoscope is any instrument capable of calling
attention only to an earth-shake.

Of course, neither of the rude seismoscopes just mentioned would be
able to give any valuable indications of the successive shakings to
which the vessel containing the viscid liquid had been subjected,
since the liquid would simply be splashed a number of times over the
same parts of the vessel. In order to get a record of the successive
shocks another form of apparatus must be employed, a form known as a
_seismograph_.

Concerning the complex character of the apparently single earthquake
shock, Professor Milne makes this highly interesting and picturesque
statement:

      "An earthquake disturbance at a station far removed from
      its origin shows that the main movement has two attendants,
      one which precedes and the other which follows. The first
      of these by its characteristics indicates what is to
      follow, whilst the latter, in a very much more pronounced
      manner, will often repeat at definite intervals, but with
      decreasing intensity, the prominent features of what
      has passed. Inasmuch as these latter rhythmical, but
      decreasing, impulses of the dying earthquake are more
      likely to result from reflection than from interference, I
      have provisionally called them Echoes."

There are many different forms of instruments known as seismographs
that are capable of recording all of these vibrations, but there is
this objection to their use: that the records appear in so tangled a
form that it is practically impossible to decipher or untangle them.
This fact can be grasped by examining Fig. 51, which represents a
record of this kind.

[Illustration: FIG. 51. COMPLEX RECORD OF SEISMOGRAPH]

It is necessary, therefore, to employ a modified form of instrument
called a _seismometer_, able not only to record all the different
vibrations, but to record them in such a manner that they can be
easily recognized. Fig. 52, for example, shows results obtained by the
use of a seismometer, in which the different vibrations are separated,
and so recorded on a sheet of paper, as to be readily understood. Such
a record is called a _seismogram_, and represents a _long distance
seismogram_. Here the large arrow indicates the beginning of the
record. And herein, as can be clearly seen, what would appear to an
observer without an instrument only a single shock, lasting but the
fraction of a minute, in reality consists of the _preliminary shake_
as represented in ab and bc, the _principal shake_, as represented
at c, d1, d2, and d3, and the _final portions of the shake_ or the
"echoes" of Professor Milne, as represented from d3 to e.

[Illustration: FIG. 52. LONG DISTANCE SEISMOGRAM]

Except in a very general way there is for present purposes no need
of explaining the construction and operation of the seismometer
and seismograph. Suffice it to say, there are many forms of these
instruments, any of which are capable of recording the details of a
passing shock. The most important thing in either a seismograph or a
seismometer is to obtain what is known as a _steady point_; that is, a
point consisting of some object or mass that will remain practically
at rest, while everything around it, even the support which holds it,
is affected by the earthquake.

It is, of course, not very easy to obtain a steady point, but it can
be done; and it will be at once comprehended that if a plate or piece
of paper were attached to such a steady point or mass, and a pencil
or tracer had one of its ends resting on the plate, and its other end
attached to the support that vibrates with the earth, a tracing or
record would be drawn on the plate from which the character of the
motion of the end of the tracer, and, therefore, of the earth, would
be marked on the plate.

[Illustration: FIG. 53. VICENTINI VERTICAL PENDULUM]

Various devices have been employed for the steady points. The most
successful consists of a heavy mass of lead.

Fig. 53 represents a form of instrument invented by Professor
Vicentini of Italy. Here the steady point consists of a heavy leaden
bob, of 200, 400, or even 500 kilograms, suspended by three metallic
rods united above by a brass cap, hung on a steel wire to a bracket
fixed on the wall. This wire may have a length as great as fifty feet.

[Illustration: FIG. 54. VICENTINI PENDULUM AND RECORDER]

Fig. 54 represents the recording instrument. Here a tracer is provided
that is capable of multiplying the motion fifty times, or even eighty
times. A record is traced on a sheet of paper passing over a roller
which imparts a rapid motion to a sheet so as to make sure that the
different parts of the shock or vibration will be recorded on separate
portions of the paper.




CHAPTER XXXII

SEAQUAKES


As earthquakes are shakings of the earth's crust in places where it is
uncovered by the waters of the ocean, so _seaquakes_ are the shakings
of those portions that lie on the bed of the ocean.

Mallet points out that the earthquake wave may start either in the
interior of the continent, or on the bed of the ocean; that the latter
place is the more common, since on the land vents--rude safety-valves,
as it were,--are provided by the craters of the volcanoes; that, when
earthquakes start on the ocean bed, the impulses are conveyed in
different forms of waves, i. e., those through the solid earth, those
through the water, and those through the air, with varying sounds like
bellowings and explosions, or like the rolling of wagons over rough
roads.

To learn when quakes occur on the sea is a much harder task, since on
the land we can use seismoscopes, seismographs, or seismometers to
indicate, record, or measure the shakings of the crust, while on the
sea, where the water is always in more or less motion and the surface
so far from the ocean's bed this is impossible, or, rather shall it
be said, has hitherto been found so; for that the mind of man may
surmount this obstacle is not impossible to conceive.

To detect the wave produced by the quaking of the bed of the ocean
is exceedingly difficult, since those in very deep water are flat or
possess but a small height. Indeed, in the deepest parts of the ocean
this height is probably to be measured only by inches instead of feet.
When, however, the waves advance towards the shore they increase in
height, and when they reach the shallows near the coast, they begin
to curl over and break, thus creating the enormous waves mentioned so
often as attending great earthquakes in the ocean.

During the great earthquake of Simoda in Japan, 1854, the waters of
the bay were first greatly agitated, and then retreated, leaving the
bottom bare in places where the water was formerly thirty feet deep. A
wave, thirty feet high, then rushed in from the bay and, climbing the
land, swept away everything in its path, covering the town with water
to the tops of the houses. This monster wave then receded, but rushed
back five times.

In 1751, an earthquake wave suddenly entered Callao, the port of Lima,
Peru, sinking twenty-three vessels and driving a frigate inland, where
it was left high and dry. This wave extended across the Pacific to the
Hawaiian Islands, a distance of 6,000 miles.

On the 13th of August, 1866, an earthquake wave, that started a short
distance from shore, produced a number of earthquake waves sixty feet
high that reached the coast of Peru half an hour after the principal
earthquake shock. These waves reached Coquimbo, 800 miles distant,
in about three hours, and Honolulu, on the Sandwich Islands, 5,520
miles distant, in twelve hours, and the coast of Japan, more than
10,000 miles distant, on the next day. Le Conte remarks that these
waves would have encircled the earth, had it not been for the barrier
interposed by the Andes.

Another great seaquake, known as the Iquiqui seaquake, during 1868 in
the same neighborhood damaged severely the towns of north Chile and
southern Peru.

While, however, there is difficulty in readily observing the
earthquake waves that form in the deep ocean, yet such is at times the
violence of an earthquake that there is no difficulty in detecting its
presence, even in deep water. Dr. Rudolph has made a careful study of
the evidences of earthquakes produced in the deep sea, from a careful
examination of a great number of the logs of ships. Logs, as everybody
knows, are books in which the captain or commanding officer makes
careful entries of all important happenings to the vessel, conditions
of the weather and of the sea. From this source Dr. Rudolph obtained
considerable information of much value concerning these phenomena.

I have already called your attention to portion of the Atlantic Ocean
lying near the Equator, in the warmest part of the ocean, between
Africa and South America, as being a region especially liable to
submarine volcanic showers. While, generally speaking, there is
nothing in this region to indicate the probability of submarine
disturbance, yet suddenly, if a vessel happens to pass directly over
the point of origin of the quake, there ensues a great quaking or
quivering. Loose objects on the ship begin to shake and clatter.
Noises arise from some invisible point deep down in the ocean. The
disturbance grows, the noises begin to resemble distant thunder, the
ship trembles and staggers as though it had struck rocks, and many
believe she is about to go down; when, as suddenly as it began, the
commotion ceases, the noises stop, and the ship shapes her course as
calmly, and as gallantly, as before.

Rudolph gives two excellent examples of seaquakes in this region, both
of which were, doubtless, due to submarine eruptions.

On the 25th of January, 1859, as the ship _Florence_ was in lat.
0° 48' N., long. 29° 16' W., about ten miles N. W. by N. from St.
Paul's Rock, the people on board felt a sudden shock that began with a
rumbling sound like distant thunder. This lasted only forty seconds.
The glass and dishes of the vessel rattled so violently that it was
feared they would be broken. The shakings were so strong that several
objects on the vessel were thrown down. Everyone believed the ship
had struck on rocks. The captain leaned over the taffrail in order to
see the position of the reef, but soon saw that the vessel had struck
nothing, and informed his crew "it was only an earthquake shock."

Another of the log books examined by Rudolph was that of a ship in the
same part of the Atlantic Ocean. This record showed that suddenly on
a morning, in 1883, strange noises were heard that soon increased and
became not unlike the firing of great guns or the peals of distant
thunder. The ship vibrated as if its anchor had been suddenly let go,
and at the same time a feeling came over all the crew, as if they had
been electrified.

In some cases the vibrations were sufficiently severe to throw heavy
objects from the deck, as appears in an account given by a French
geologist of a quake in the Mediterranean off the shores of Asia Minor.

"Our ship was over the epicentre,"[5] he says, "and was so severely
shaken that at first the Admiral feared the complete destruction of
the corvette." He then makes the statement that the shocks which were
directly upwards were so strong as to throw heavy objects in the air;
for example, a heavy gun and its carriage. While it is possible, as
Dutton remarks, that this incident of the heavy gun and carriage was
grossly exaggerated, yet it should not be forgotten that in the case
of submarine eruptions such as that which resulted in the production
of the island of Sabrina, an immense column of water, weighing
probably many times more than a gun and its carriage, was observed to
be shot high into the air.

Where the seaquake is produced by a strong submarine volcanic
eruption, there is a violent commotion of the water itself, so that a
vessel passing over such a point may be greatly injured, and, indeed,
even destroyed. Such disasters, however, are fortunately exceedingly
rare.

Among other common effects of seaquakes is the destruction of fish
already mentioned by the sudden blow to the water stunning and killing
them, just as the explosion of dynamite or other high explosives does
in a lake or pond.

The most marked effect, however, of seaquakes is the starting of the
great wave on the coasts of continents and islands.

There are certain parts of the ocean that are especially liable to
seaquakes. Some of the more important of these, as shown by Rudolph's
researches, are:

The region already referred to in the narrowest parts of the Atlantic
Ocean between Africa and South America almost immediately under the
equator. Here there are two well marked regions. One is in lat. 1°
N., long. 30° W., where there is a submarine ridge, the tops of which
form what are known as St. Paul's Rock. The ocean here is very deep,
the slopes of the ridge descending rapidly. It is on these slopes
that earthquakes are very apt to occur just as they do on the steep
slopes of mountain ranges. The other region, called by Rudolph the
_Equatorial District_, lies a little further to the east on both sides
of the equator in long. 20° W.

It appears from Rudolph's researches that between 1845 and 1893 no
less than thirty-seven seaquakes were reported in the logs of ships
in the neighborhood of St. Paul's Rock, and between 1747 and 1890, in
the equatorial district, there were forty-nine seaquakes. It must not
be supposed, however, that these were all the quakes in the regions
during these times, since, of course, many shocks must have happened
that were not felt even by vessels in the neighborhood and many more,
when this portion of the ocean was free from any craft.

In the North Atlantic there is a portion of the ocean's bed known as
the _West Indies Deep_. Here the bed is marked by great depths and by
many irregularities and is, therefore, a region where seaquakes are
common.

Still another district is found in the North Atlantic in the
neighborhood of the Azores. This is the region in which the Lisbon
earthquake is believed to have started.

Another region where seaquakes are common is in the Pacific along the
coast of South America from the equator to 45° S. lat. "Here," says
Dutton, "especially in the vicinity of the angle where the Peruvian
and Chilian coasts meet have they been most numerous and formidable.
The harbors of Pisco, Arica, Tacua, Iquiqui, and Pisago have been
repeatedly subject to these destructive invasions."

There has been considerable discussion as to the exact manner in which
the earthquake waves are set up. Whatever be the cause or causes,
the action must be sudden, such as an upheaval of the bottom, or a
collapse of a large section of the ocean's bed, with a dropping of a
vast body of water. Or, possibly, a submarine volcanic eruption causes
the water to lift suddenly under pressure of steam generated by escape
of the lava and other hot volcanic products.

Dr. Rudolph attributes earthquake waves to submarine volcanic
eruptions alone. It would seem, however, as if each one of the other
things above referred to might at times be the direct cause.




CHAPTER XXXIII

THE DISTRIBUTION OF EARTHQUAKES


Earthquakes may occur at any part of the earth's surface, at any time
of the day, or at any season of the year, yet they are more frequent
at certain parts, certain hours, certain seasons.

Since some earthquakes are unquestionably connected with volcanic
eruptions, a map or chart of the volcanoes of the earth would also,
to a certain extent, show the parts of the earth that are likely to
be visited by earthquakes. Since, however, by far the most severe
earthquakes are not directly connected with volcanoes, but are due to
sudden slips of faulted strata, a volcanic chart would necessarily
fail to indicate accurately the principal earthquake regions.

In the preparation of a map showing the distribution of earthquakes
over the earth's surface, Mallet adopted the plan of colorings or
tintings in such a manner that the depth of the colors would represent
not only the parts shaken, but also the relative number of times
shaken, as well as the intensity of the shocks. In order to determine
the depth of tint to be employed, Mallet divided earthquakes into the
following classes according to their intensity:

_Great earthquakes_, or earthquakes of the first class; or those in
which the area affected is of great size, in which many cities have
been overthrown, and many people killed, and parts of the surface
greatly altered.

_Intermediate earthquakes_, or those in which, although the area
affected is great, yet the destruction of buildings, or loss of life,
has been comparatively small.

_Minor earthquakes_, or those which, although capable of producing
small fissures in the crust, generally leave but few or no traces of
their occurrence.

The greatest distance to which earthquake waves of the first class
extend is taken by Mallet as being over a diameter of 1,080 miles;
those of the second class over a diameter of about 360 miles, and
those of the third class over a diameter of about 120 miles.

According to the Rossi Forel scale already given, earthquake shocks
are divided according to their relative intensity into ten separate
classes, viz.: I. The micro-seismic; II. The extremely feeble; III.
The very feeble; IV. The feeble; V. The moderately intense; VI.
The fairly strong; VII. The strong; VIII. The very strong; IX. The
extremely strong; X. Shocks of extreme intensity.

An earthquake map prepared according to Mallet's scale would show a
greater depth of color or tint in the neighborhood of the volcanic
districts of the earth and especially in the neighborhood of the
mountain regions, where tectonic quakes are most frequent. Oceanic
areas would be left almost untinted, not because earthquakes do not
occur on the bed of the ocean, but because of the difficulty of
observing such earthquakes at great distances from the land. So far
from earthquakes being absent on the bed of the ocean it is most
probable that they are more frequent there than elsewhere.

Prepared in this way, Mallet's map would show a preponderance of
earthquakes along the borders of the continents, especially along the
"Great Circle of Fire" on the borders of the Pacific Ocean.

Dutton as well as some others assert that the "Great Circle of Fire"
on the shores of the Pacific has in reality no existence; that,
instead of there being a continuous region of volcanoes, there is in
reality nothing more than a considerable number of volcanoes arranged
in groups along the borders of this ocean, but separated by spaces
containing no marked volcanic activity. We do not think this a tenable
position, since it is well known that volcanoes lie along great lines
of fissures at different points or openings which are kept open
by subsequent volcanic activity, while the remaining portions are
closed soon afterwards; and, moreover, in parts of these so-called
non-volcanic regions, there are probably extended regions of extinct
volcanoes.

Since the time of Mallet many maps have been made to show the
distribution of earthquakes. Among the best of such is that by M. de
Montessus de Ballore.

Some idea of the great amount of work required for the preparation of
Montessus' map may be formed when one learns that the catalogue of
earthquakes collected by him for this purpose included for the years
1880 to 1900, 131,292 quakes.

De Montessus' earthquake map divides the grand divisions of the earth
into numerous sub-divisions, too numerous, indeed, for even brief
description in a work of this kind. From the map he thus laboriously
prepared De Montessus drew the following general conclusions:

1. The parts of the earth that are most apt to be shaken by
earthquakes are those which possess the greatest differences of relief
between their highlands and lowlands, and that in such regions the
most pronounced earthquakes are found on the steepest slopes.

2. Earthquakes are most common along those parts of the crust that are
thrown up in huge wrinkles, or mountain ranges, whether these masses
be above the level of the sea or are covered by it.

[Illustration: FIG. 55. DAVISON'S EARTHQUAKE MAP OF JAPAN]

3. Earthquakes are more common in mountainous districts than in
plains. But not all mountains are characterized by earthquakes nor
are all plains free from them. Sometimes the plain at the base of
the mountain appears to be especially liable to shocks, probably by
reason of slips along faults at these points.

The great mountain ranges of the world are generally characterized
by unequal slopes, the long gentle slope facing the interior of the
continents, and the short, abrupt slopes being turned towards the
coast. Now, Montessus points out that volcanoes are the most frequent
on the short, abrupt slopes. In some cases, however, where the long
slopes are the roughest, it is these slopes that are most frequently
shaken.

The beds of the ocean that lie along rapidly descending lines,
especially when they lie on the borders of large mountain ranges, are
especially liable to earthquakes.

Dr. Charles Davison has made a map of the earthquakes of Japan in
which he had adopted the plan of representing the origin or centres
of earthquakes by a series of contour lines like those employed on
topographical maps. The advantage of this type of map over that
employed by Mallet is just this: Davison's earthquake map of Japan in
which the active volcanoes are marked by dots, and the earthquakes
by contour lines surrounding the points of origin, discloses the
interesting fact that here the positions of the volcanoes and the
earthquake centres coincide, since the mountainous districts where the
active volcanoes are numerous are singularly free from earthquakes.
This can be seen from an inspection of Fig. 55.




CHAPTER XXXIV

THE CAUSES OF EARTHQUAKES


Earthquakes occurred long before man appeared on earth. It is natural,
therefore, that our early ancestors, experiencing these unwelcome
phenomena, vaguely endeavored to explain their causes. These early
attempts at explanation have in many cases been of an exceedingly
fanciful character.

The ancient Mongolians and Hindoos declared that earthquakes are due
to our earth resting on a huge frog and that they occur whenever the
frog scratches its head.

In Japan, where earthquakes are very common, the ignorant people even
at a much later day declared that there exists in the depth of the sea
an immense fish which, when angry, dashes its head violently against
the coast of the island, thus making the earth tremble. This is,
doubtless, the biggest fish-story extant.

Another folk-lore explanation in Japan attributes the cause of the
tremblings of the earth to a subterranean monster whose head lies in
the north of the island of Hondo, while his tail lies between the two
principal cities. The shaking of his tail causes earthquakes.

Fantastic and foolish as these explanations are, it is worthy of
note that the first of the Japanese explanations shows no little
observation on the part of the people, since it locates the
starting-points of earthquakes as being not on the land, but on the
bottom of the sea. In point of fact, nearly all the great earthquakes
in Japan seem to start somewhere between the coasts of the islands
on the sea-bottom that leads down to a very deep part of the Pacific
known as the Tuscarora Deep.

Many years ago nearly everyone believed that earthquakes were caused
solely by the forces that produce volcanic eruptions; that all
earthquakes, whether in the neighborhood of active volcanoes, or at
great distances therefrom, were to be regarded solely as volcanic in
their origin.

It is now recognized that the most severe and far-reaching earthquakes
have no immediate connection with volcanic explosions, but are due to
the sudden slippings of the earth's strata over lines of faults; or,
in other words, earthquakes are most frequently of the tectonic type.

At the present time there is unfortunately much difference in
opinion as to the exact cause of earthquakes. By this is not meant
the immediate cause, but the ultimate cause. As to the immediate
cause, practically all are agreed that quakes of volcanic origin are
to be traced to the same forces that produce volcanic eruptions,
while quakes of tectonic origin are due directly to the slipping of
the strata along the faults. But when inquiry is instituted as to
the nature of the forces that cause the volcanic eruptions, or that
produce such an alteration of the strata as permits them afterwards to
slip and thus jar the earth, there is much difference of opinion.

As can be seen from a few quotations of well-known authorities, only
two kinds of earthquakes exist; namely, volcanic earthquakes and
tectonic earthquakes.

Dana, for example, while acknowledging that small earthquakes may be
caused by the sudden falling of large rock masses into cavities in the
crust of the earth, says:

      "But true earthquakes come, for the most part at least,
      from one or the other of the following sources of
      disturbance.

      "1. Vapors suddenly produced, causing ruptures and friction.

      "2. Sudden movements or slips along old or new fractures.

      "Earthquakes due to the former of these methods are common
      about volcanoes, and at the Hawaiian islands shakings that
      are destructive over the island of Hawaii at the moment of
      some of the more violent eruptions, do not often affect the
      island of Oahu, a depth of 500 fathoms of water, the least
      depth between the two islands, being sufficient to stop off
      the vibrations....

      "Earthquakes of the second mode of origin may occur in all
      regions, volcanic or not. They have their origin mostly in
      the vicinity of mountain regions, where old fractures most
      abound. The vibrations may begin in a slip of a few inches,
      in fact; but where there has been a succession of slips,
      up and up from 10,000 feet or more, as in the Appalachian,
      earthquakes of inconceivable volcanic activity must have
      resulted."

Dana points out that volcanoes stand on lines of fractures in the
openings of which their existence began and that, during geological
time, slips up or down these fractures have occurred, producing
earthquakes and possibly starting eruptions.

Prestwich, a well-known English geologist, speaks very decidedly
concerning the causes of earthquakes:

      "For my own part, I am disposed to share the belief
      expressed by Dana that the tension or pressure, by which
      the great oscillations or plications of the earth's crust
      have been produced, have not entirely ceased; and that
      this is generally the most probable cause of earthquakes.
      The uplifting of the great continental tracts and mountain
      ranges must have always left the interior of the crust in
      a state of unstable equilibrium, and any slight slide or
      settling along an old fracture, or in highly disturbed and
      distorted strata, would be attended by an earthquake shock.

      "In volcanic areas the removal of the large volumes of
      molten rock from the interior to the surface must produce
      settlements and strains which might also result in some of
      these minor earthquakes to which volcanic districts are
      so subject. Where we have the two conditions combined, as
      they are in the Andes in South America, these earthquake
      phenomena are, as we should expect, developed on the
      grandest and widest scale."

Geikie, the Scotch geologist, says:

      "Various conceivable causes may, at different times
      and under different conditions, communicate a shock to
      the subterranean regions. Such as the sudden flashing
      into steam of water in the spherodial state, the sudden
      condensation of steam, the explosion of a volcanic outpour,
      the falling in of the roof of a subterranean cavity, or the
      sudden snap of deep-seated rocks subjected to prolonged and
      intense stress."

Sir Charles Lyell, the great English geologist, holds the following
views concerning the origin of earthquakes. He speaks as follows in
his "Principles of Geology":

      "1. The primary cause of the volcanoes and the earthquakes
      are to a great extent the same, and connected with the
      development of heat and chemical action at various depths
      in the interior of the globe.

      "2. Volcanic heat has been supposed by many to be the
      result of the high temperature which belonged to the
      whole planet when it was in a state of igneous fusion,
      a temperature which they suppose to have been always
      diminishing and still to continue to diminish by radiation
      into space....

      "The powerful agency of steam or aqueous vapor in volcanic
      eruptions leads us to compare its power of propelling lava
      to the surface with that which it exerts in driving up
      water in the pipe of an Icelandic geyser. Various gases
      also, rendered liquid by pressure at great depths, may
      aid in causing volcanic outbursts and in fissuring and
      convulsing the rocks during earthquakes."

Major Clarence Edward Dutton, U. S. A., an acknowledged authority on
seismology, speaks as follows:

      "Thus far, then, we have two causes of earthquakes which
      are apparently well sustained: (1) the downthrows, which
      have often been observed to be accompanied by earthquakes,
      and (2) volcanic action. But neither of them have been
      shown to be connected with more than a comparatively small
      number. Much the greater part of the earthquakes still
      require explanation, and the indications are manifold that
      some of them are produced by some cause yet to be stated."

He acknowledges, however, this unknown cause may be traceable to
volcanic agency. To quote him in full:

      "It remains now to refer to the possibility that many
      quakes whose origin is unknown, or extremely doubtful, may,
      after all, be volcanic. This must be fully admitted, and,
      indeed, it is in many cases highly probable. Evidences
      that volcanic action has taken place in the depths of the
      earth without visible, permanent results on the surface
      abound in ancient rock exposures. Formations of great
      geological age, once deeply buried and brought to daylight
      by secular denudations, show that lavas have penetrated
      surrounding rock-masses in many astonishing ways. Sometimes
      they have intruded between strata, lifting or floating up
      the overlying beds without any indication of escaping to
      the surface. Sometimes the lava breaks across a series of
      strata and finds its way into the partings between higher
      beds. Or it forces its way into a fissure to form a dike
      which may never reach the surface. In one place a long arm
      or sheet of lava has in a most surprising and inexplicable
      manner thrust itself into the enveloping rock-mass, and in
      the older or metamorphic rocks these offshoots or apophyses
      cross each other in great numbers and form a tangled
      network of intrusive dikes. In other places the intruded
      lava has formed immense lenticular (lense shaped) masses
      (laccolites), which have domed up the overlying strata
      into mountain masses. These intrusions, almost infinitely
      varied in form and condition, are often, in fact usually,
      inexplicable as mechanical problems, but their reality is
      vouched for by the evidence of our senses. What concerns
      us here is the great energy which they suggest and their
      adequacy to generate in the rocks those sudden, elastic
      displacements which are the real initiatory impulses of an
      earthquake. They assure us that a great deal of volcanic
      action has transpired in past ages far under ground, which
      makes no other sign at the surface than those vibrations
      which we call an earthquake."

Koto, the celebrated Japanese student of earthquakes, and a member
of the Earthquake Investigation Committee appointed by the Japanese
Government for studying the great Mino-Owaro earthquake, in Japan,
1891, is properly regarded as an authority on earthquakes. Living, as
he does, in a country where earthquakes and volcanic eruptions are of
almost daily occurrence, he has had abundant opportunity for studying
these phenomena, especially in connection with the Seismological
Institute of Japan. He speaks as follows:

      "To make clear once for all my own standpoint, I may say
      plainly that the chain of volcanoes and the system of
      mountains of the non-volcanic earthquake, appear to me
      to have very intimate and fundamental relations with the
      so-called tectonic line."

Mallet regards earthquakes that can be directly traceable to volcanic
origin as unsuccessful efforts on the part of nature to establish
volcanoes. He speaks concerning this matter as follows:

      "An earthquake in a non-volcanic region may, in fact, be
      viewed as an uncompleted effort to establish a volcano.
      The forces of explosion and impulse are the same in both;
      they differ only in degree of energy, or in the varying
      sorts and degrees of resistance opposed to them. There is
      more than a mere vaguely admitted connection between them,
      as heretofore commonly acknowledged--one so vague that the
      earthquake has been often stated to be the cause of the
      volcano (Johnson, 'Phy. Atlas,' Geology, page 21), and more
      commonly the volcano the cause of the earthquake, neither
      view being the expression of the truth of nature. They are
      not in the relation to each other of cause and effect, but
      are both unequal manifestations of a common force under
      different conditions."

Before closing this chapter on the causes of earthquakes it may be
well to state briefly the explanations that have been suggested by
those who hold that the earth is solid and cold throughout its entire
mass, except that in the neighborhood of volcanic districts there
are limited areas situated only a comparatively few miles below the
surface where the rocks are highly heated.

Professor Mallet suggested that the source of heat for these local
areas of melted rocks was to be found in the enormous mechanical force
that is developed by the crushing of the strata in the earth's crust.
The principal objection to Mallet's theory is to be found in the
fact that, for this heat to be available for the melting of rocks,
it must be produced rapidly, and not spread out over long periods of
time. Moreover, there would appear to be no other way to account for
the production of the great force required to effect the crushing of
the earth's strata save on the assumption of a highly heated interior
still cooling and contracting.

In his "Aspects of the Earth" Shaler has suggested an hypothesis
that may be regarded to a certain extent as explaining how heat,
slowly generated, might be blanketed, or prevented from escaping and
so possibly reaching a temperature sufficiently high to melt the
materials in portions of the interior not far below the surface of the
earth.

      "We thus see that in the water imprisoned in the deposits
      of the early geological ages and brought to a high
      temperature by the blanketing action of the more recently
      deposited beds, we have a sufficient cause for the great
      generation of steam at high temperatures, and this is the
      sole essential phenomenon of volcanic eruptions. We see
      also by this hypothesis why volcanoes do not occur at
      points remote from the sea, and why they cease to be in
      action soon after the sea leaves their neighborhood....

      "The foregoing considerations make it tolerably clear that
      volcanoes are fed from deposits of water contained in
      ancient rocks which have become greatly heated through the
      blanketing effects of the strata which have been laid down
      upon them. The gas which is the only invariable element
      of volcanic eruptions is steam; moreover, it is the steam
      of sea-water, as is proven by analysis of the ejections.
      It breaks its way to the surface only on those parts of
      the earth which are near to where the deposition of strata
      is lifting the temperature of water contained in rocks by
      preventing, in fact, the escape of the earth's heat."

Another very common theory is that of chemical action, or the heat
produced by the oxidation of various substances inside the earth,
such, for example, as iron pyrites, a compound of iron and sulphur.

When Sir Humphrey Davy discovered metallic sodium and it was found
that this material, when thrown on water, possessed the power of
liberating intense heat, the discovery was welcomed by geologists
as affording a possible explanation of the cause of volcanoes and
earthquakes.

It may be said generally concerning chemical action as the source
of the earth's interior heat, that the chief objection against it
is the fact that such heat is liberated too slowly to result in the
production of a very high temperature. This objection does not exist
in the case of such substances as metallic sodium, since here the
heat is rapidly developed and is sufficient in amount to fuse the
substances produced. But in the lava produced in such great quantities
as it is in volcanic districts there must be liberated at the same
time large quantities of gaseous hydrogen. Now, although hydrogen
is, as we have already seen, sometimes given off with the gases that
escape from volcanic craters, yet the quantity which escapes is so
small that this theory of volcanic activity has been practically
abandoned.

Quite recently, however, among the various chemical substances that
are produced under the extremely high temperatures of the electric
furnace have been found, or formed, a number of curious substances
such as _calcium carbide_, _calcium silicide_, _barium silicide_,
etc., that possess the property of becoming highly heated on coming in
contact with water.

Now it is an interesting fact that the hydrogen and other gases
which are given off by the action of water on these substances are
absorbed in large quantities by the materials themselves, so that the
objection of the absence of hydrogen and similar gases in the craters
of the volcanoes would not be quite as objectionable as in the case of
such substances.

Of course, it is impossible to say whether such substances as calcium
carbide, etc., actually exist inside the earth's crust, yet, as
has been pointed out, the principal condition necessary for their
formation, i. e., a high temperature, existed at times long after
the earth, assuming the correctness of the nebular hypothesis, was
separated from the nebulous sun.

There still remains to be discussed the most curious of all possible
causes that have been suggested for the presence of the local heated
areas at comparatively short distances below the earth's crust;
namely, radio-activity.

In 1896, Henri Becquerel, a Frenchman, while investigating the power
of the X-rays, when passing through certain substances, to produce
phosphorescence, or causing the substances to shine in the dark,
made the extraordinary discovery that some of the salts of uranium
possess the power of emitting a peculiar radiation closely resembling
the X-rays, that is able to pass through substances opaque to
ordinary light as well as to affect photographic plates. But the most
extraordinary part of this discovery was that the salts of uranium
apparently possess the power of giving out this radiation continuously
without being exposed to the sun's rays.

This peculiar property was called _radio-activity_, and was shortly
afterwards found to be present in many other substances besides
uranium, and notably so in two newly discovered elements known as
polonium and radium.

Now it has been suggested that if there existed somewhere beneath the
earth's crust in these locally heated areas, large quantities of
radio-active substances, these regions would at last become highly
heated, and in this way likely to produce volcanoes and earthquakes.
It would not, however, seem that this is probably their true cause.

From what has just been said it is clear how exceedingly difficult it
has become to explain the source of the earth's interior heat when
the fact of the earth's original highly heated condition is denied.
We are, therefore, disposed with Russell to believe, as stated in the
first part of this volume, that the ultimate cause of both volcanoes
and earthquakes is to be found in the gradual cooling of an originally
highly heated globe, and that the greater part of the interior is
still in a highly heated condition, hot enough to be melted but yet
in a solid condition by reason of the great pressure to which it is
subjected.




CHAPTER XXXV

EARTHQUAKES OF THE GEOLOGICAL PAST--CATACLYSMS


There were numerous volcanoes in the geological past; therefore, since
volcanic eruptions are generally attended by earthquake shocks, it
follows that during that remote past the earth has been violently
shaken by earthquakes. Indeed, if we assume, as we believe to be the
case, that the cause of earthquakes is correctly to be traced to an
originally heated globe which is gradually cooling, it follows that
the earth was necessarily subject to great earthquakes almost from the
time when it began to cool.

But to establish as a fact the occurrence of an earthquake at so
remote a time in the earth's history is far more difficult than to
detect the occurrence of a volcano at that time. While the earthquake
shocks may produce fissures in the earth's crust, and may be
accompanied by great changes of level, yet the great time that has
elapsed between such occurrences and the present would permit the
various geological agencies that are at work either to cover these
fissures completely, or completely to remove by erosion, or in other
similar ways, the rocks in which they occurred. It is different in
the case of a volcano; for the volcanic craters are in many cases
still left standing, and then there are the voluminous sheets of lava
that have spread over great areas of the earth, as well as numerous
volcanic cones. Besides, there are thousands of square miles of
surface that have been covered, often to great depths, by deposits of
volcanic dust thrown out at one time or another from the craters of
the then active volcanoes.

I am sure you will acknowledge that any force capable of causing great
cracks or fissures in the earth's crust, must, while doing this, have
produced violent shakings of the earth. Great cracks or fissures are
to be found in the rocks of all the geological formations. These are a
record of the earthquakes that must have attended these convulsions.
And there is plenty of evidence to show that the earth's crust has
been torn into these fissures in places deep down below the present
surface; for, by the action of water, many of these portions have
been uncovered so that these great cracks or fissures which have been
afterwards filled with a molten rock that has hardened can be seen in
the great dikes that still remain.

But there are still other evidences of the existence of earthquakes
during the geological past. There are found in the different strata
of the earth's crust fossil remains of the plants and animals that
lived on the earth long before the creation of man. By a careful study
of these fossils we know positively the kinds of animals and plants
that lived on the earth, in its waters, or in its atmosphere, when
these strata were being deposited. It is in this way possible for a
geologist to trace the life of the earth and its development as it
is written on the great book of which the earth's different strata
form the separate pages. Now, a careful study of the earth's fauna
and flora during the geological past, shows, beyond any question,
that occasionally great changes have occurred in the earth; for, here
and there, during different times, we find that certain species of
animals and plants have completely disappeared, to be followed, after
certain intervals, by entirely different species. It is evident,
therefore, that changes have occurred that have made it impossible for
the animals and plants that formerly lived on the earth to exist under
the changed conditions. These occurrences are known to geologists
as _exterminations_, _catastrophes_, or _cataclysms_. They are also
sometimes called _revolutions_, for they mark a more or less complete
wiping-out of the animals living at the time they occurred.

If you will try to think you will readily understand how great a
catastrophe must be, that would be able to wipe out or completely
destroy an entire race of animals.

You have doubtless read with astonishment the terrible catastrophe
that accompanied the eruption of Krakatoa, especially at the loss of
life and property caused by the great waves that were set up in the
ocean, but far reaching as these losses were they have nevertheless
affected but a limited portion of the earth. The plain truth is even
more stupendous, for catastrophes of the geological past appear to
have been so far-reaching and powerful as to affect the whole surface
of the earth, and to have annihilated entire races of animals and
plants as if they had never existed.

Geologists are all practically agreed that there are only two ways in
which such exterminations of the earth's life could have been caused,
and these are changes in the earth's climate, or the starting of waves
in the sea by great earthquakes. In the sea; for it must be borne
in mind that in the geological past the greater part of the earth's
surface was covered by water, and the land areas were comparatively
small and low, so that waves created by earthquakes might easily have
overwhelmed the entire land surface.

Of course, it is fair to suppose that in many cases these
exterminations may have been caused by sudden changes of climate, such
as would naturally have resulted from any change in the direction
of hot ocean currents which formerly flowed from the equator to the
poles. The appearance of a fairly large mass of land in the central
parts of the ocean might readily have turned aside the hot ocean
currents that formerly swept over the polar regions, thus greatly
lowering the earth's average temperature in these regions.

But it seems probable that the principal cause of the destruction of
life in the geological past was produced by earthquake waves in the
sea, sweeping over the continents. Let us, therefore, examine two of
the earth's principal geological revolutions or cataclysms; namely,
that which occurred at the close of an early geological time known as
the Palaeozoic, and that which occurred at the end of a geological
time intermediate between the Palaeozoic time or the time of ancient
life, called the Mesozoic time, and the Cenozoic time, or the time
immediately preceding the present time. These two revolutions are
called by Dana, _the Post-Palaeozoic_, or _Appalachian Revolution_,
and the _Post-Mesozoic Revolution_. Both were characterized by the
making of great mountain systems, and were, therefore, especially
liable to repetitions of tremendous earthquakes that must have
produced enormous waves in the ocean.

"Palaeozoic time," says Dana, "closed with the making of one of the
great mountain ranges of North America--the Appalachian, besides
ranges in other lands, and in producing one of the most universal and
abrupt disappearances of life in geological history. So great an event
is properly styled a revolution."

Towards the close of the Palaeozoic time immense disturbances of
the earth's crust occurred during the uplifting of the Appalachian
Mountain System. One may, perhaps, form some faint idea of the
immensity of the forces at work, from the fact that there were
great faults produced by the uplifting of the lands attended with
displacement amounting to 10,000 or 20,000 feet or more; that in parts
of southwestern Virginia there were flexure faults 100 miles in length.

As to the probability of the extensive exterminations that have
occurred during these times being produced by earthquake waves, Dana
speaks thus:

      "The causes of the extermination are two.... (1) a colder
      climate.... (2) earthquake waves produced by orogenic
      movements (movements producing mountain ranges). If North
      America from the west of the Carolinas to the Mississippi
      Valley can be shaken in consequence of a little slip along
      a fracture in times of perfect quiet (the allusion here
      to the Charleston earthquake, in 1886), and ruin mark its
      movements, incalculable violence and great surgings of
      the ocean should have occurred and been often repeated
      during the progress of flexures, miles in height and
      space, and slips along newly opened fractures that kept up
      their interrupted progress through thousands of feet of
      displacements....

      "Under such circumstances the devastation of the sea-border
      and the low-lying land of the period, the destruction of
      their animals and plants, would have been a sure result.
      The survivors within a long distance of the coastline
      would have been few. The same waves would have swept over
      European land and seas, and there found coadjutors for new
      strife in earthquake waves of European origin. These times
      of catastrophe may have continued in America through half
      of the following Triassic period; for fully two thirds of
      the Triassic period are unrepresented by rocks and fossils
      on the Atlantic border."

Coming now to the Post-Mesozoic revolution this period was marked by
the making of the greatest of the North American mountain systems.

Dana points out that this revolution affected the summit region of the
Rocky Mountains over a broad belt probably as long as the western side
of the continent.

This great belt of mountain-making extended from the Arctic regions
through North America, probably paralleled by like work, of equal
extent, in South America, but on a more eastern line.

"The disappearance of species," says Dana, "at the close of Mesozoic
time was one of the two most noted in all geological history. Probably
not a tenth part of the animal species of the world disappeared
at the time, and far less of the vegetable life and terrestrial
Invertebrates; yet the change was so comprehensive that no Cretaceous
species of Vertebrate is yet known to occur in the rocks of the
American Tertiary, and not even a marine Invertebrate."

In tracing the causes of these disappearances, Dana points out that,
perhaps, the principal cause was a decrease in the temperature of the
ocean, since the destructions were limited in large measure to marine
life. He regards, however, the other most probable cause as traceable
to earthquake waves; for the making of a great mountain range along
the entire length of the continent resulted in displacements of
the rock formations along lines hundreds of miles in length. Such
displacements must have been attended by a succession of earthquakes
of unusual violence, causing the destruction by sudden shocks beneath,
and resulting, directly and indirectly, in waves sweeping over the
continent. Since at this time the land was still low for the greater
part, the huge waves must have repeatedly swept over the greater part
of the land, leaving only the smaller species of animals and the
vegetation.

It is evident, therefore, that during the geological past earthquakes
occurred that were probably vastly greater than any that have occurred
on the earth during more recent times.




CHAPTER XXXVI

THE KIMBERLY DIAMOND FIELDS AND THEIR VOLCANIC ORIGIN


The elementary substance carbon occurs in three forms, i. e.,
_charcoal_, _graphite_, and the _diamond_. The commonest form of
carbon is to be found in charcoal, as well as in bituminous coal,
anthracite coal, and _lignite_. Graphite, also known as _plumbago_,
or _black lead_, is the substance you have seen so often in the lead
of pencils. The diamond, as every one knows, is the highly prized
precious stone that sparkles so brightly in the light, and is so hard
that it is capable of scratching almost any other substance.

Diamonds are found in various parts of the world. We are now
interested in them, however, only as they occur in certain parts of
the world, as in the great Kimberly diamond fields in Southern Africa.

Dr. Max Bauer in his book on precious stones says that the discovery
of diamonds in South Africa was made by a traveller named O'Reilly,
who, in 1867, saw a child sitting in the house of a Boer named Jacobs,
playing with a shining stone. Jacob's farm was a short distance south
of the Orange River near Hopetown. This stone proved to be a diamond
weighing some twenty-one and three-tenths carats and was afterwards
sold for $2,500. The incident led to the discovery and consequent
development of the Kimberly diamond fields.

Without going into a description of the different deposits in which
diamonds are found, it will suffice to say that in the Kimberly
district the diamonds occur distributed through the materials that
fill peculiar funnel-shaped depressions called _pipes_ which extend
vertically downward to unknown depths. The rock that fills a pipe
consists of an entirely different material from that in which the pipe
occurs. The upper extremity of the pipe is generally slightly elevated
above the general surface for a few yards. The pipes vary in diameter
from twenty to 750 yards, diameters of from 200 to 300 yards being
quiet common.

In 1892, the diamond-bearing material found in the pipes of the
Kimberly mines had been excavated vertically downwards a distance of
1,261 feet, without any signs of its being exhausted.

Now, the materials which fill the pipe of the great Kimberly mine are
practically the same in all the mines in the neighborhood. At the
upper part of the pipe the materials show the action of weathering by
exposure to the air. Here the ground is of a yellowish color. Below,
the materials have a blue color.

According to Bauer the diamond-bearing material that fills the upper
part of the pipe consists of a soft, sandy material of a light yellow
color, known to diamond miners as _yellow ground_, or _yellow stuff_.

In the case of the Kimberly mine, the yellow ground has a thickness of
about sixty feet. Below it the material has a blue color and is known
as the _blue ground_. This latter material possesses the character
of a volcanic _tuff_, which is a hardened clay. It is of a green or
bluish green color and has the appearance of dried mud that holds
or binds together numerous irregular, tough, and sometimes rounded
fragments of a green or bluish black serpentine.

The diamonds are found near the surface in the yellow ground, as
well as downwards through the blue ground. It was at one time thought
that most of the diamonds existed in the yellow ground, and that they
would soon disappear entirely at short distances below where the blue
ground began. Under this belief some of the most valuable claims
changed hands at prices far below their true value. It was soon found,
however, that large and valuable stones existed in the blue ground,
and, indeed, this ground has never been mined to a depth below where
valuable diamonds appear.

The diamonds occur in very small quantities spread through the yellow
and blue grounds. The following statement by Bauer will show this:

      "A striking illustration of their sparing occurrence is
      furnished by the fact that in the richest part of the
      richest mine, namely, in the Kimberly mine, they constitute
      only one part in 2,000,000, or 0.00005% of the blue ground.
      In other mines the proportion is still lower, namely, one
      part in 40,000,000, a yield which corresponds to five
      carats per cubic yard of rock."

Of course, you will desire by this time to know the manner in which
the pipes of the diamond mines of South Africa have become filled with
the diamond-bearing rocks, and particularly what diamonds have to do
with a book on volcanoes and earthquakes.

Dr. Emil Cohen, who has made a study of these regions, regards the
pipes as volcanic vents or chimneys, and that the materials filling
the pipes have been brought up from below by volcanic forces. He says:

      "I consider that the diamantiferous ground is a product
      of volcanic action, and was probably erupted at a
      comparatively low temperature in the form of an ash
      saturated with water and comparable to the materials
      ejected by a mud volcano. Subsequently new minerals were
      formed in the mass, consequent on alterations induced in
      the upper part by exposure to atmospheric agencies, and in
      the lower by the presence of water. Each of the crater-like
      basins, or, perhaps, more correctly, funnels, in which
      alone diamonds are now found, was at one time the outlet
      of an active volcano which became filled up, partly with
      the products of eruption and partly with ejected material
      which fell back from the sides of the crater intermingled
      with various foreign substances, such as small pebbles,
      or organic remains of local origin, all of which became
      imbedded in the volcanic tuff. The substance of the tuff
      was probably mainly derived from deep-seated crystalline
      rocks, of which isolated remains are now to be found,
      and which are similar to those which now crop out at the
      surface, only at a considerable distance from the diamond
      fields. These crystalline rocks from which the diamonds
      probably took their origin, were pulverized and forced
      up into the pipes by the action of volcanic forces, and
      imbedded in this eruptive material, these diamonds either
      in perfect crystals or in fragments are now found."

So far as the volcanic origin of the diamonds of the Kimberly diamond
fields is concerned, Cohen's theory has been generally accepted with
the following modifications: that the pipes were not filled by a
single volcanic eruption, but by successive eruptions, and that in
the case of the Kimberly mine, the pipes contain the results of as
many as fifteen successive eruptions. There has, however, been another
and more important modification proposed to Cohen's theory, which is
far more probable. It will be noticed that Cohen's theory regards the
action of the volcanic eruption as only serving to bring fragments
of a deep-seated mother rock that contained the diamonds up from
below with the material that fills the pipe. Now, Prof. Carvill Lewis
proposes the following very important change in Cohen's theory: that
the blue ground does not consist of fragmentary material or tuff, but
was forced up from below in the pipe in a molten mass and consolidated
on cooling. In other words, the blue ground is filled with an ordinary
igneous rock that was solidified in place in the vent or pipe.

In the great Kimberly mines the surface of the pipe is divided into
numerous separate claims, each consisting of a small square lot. There
are so many of these claims in the Kimberly mine that its surface is
honey-combed by numerous square pits. The work is done largely by
native Kaffirs employed there since the '70's. As the material was
removed from the pit, the adjoining claims were separated from each
other by high vertical walls.

At a later date, in order to remove the material and separate the
lots, high staging provided with ropes and hauling machinery was
erected. The number of these ropes is now so great that the mine has
the appearance of a huge cobweb.

A very extensive series of investigations has been made at a
comparatively recent date by Prof. Henri Moissan of France on various
chemical products that are obtained under the influence of the high
temperatures of the electric furnace. When a powerful electric current
is caused to pass through a highly refractory material, that is to
say, a material difficult to fuse, such as carbon, it raises it to an
extremely high temperature. A still higher temperature can be obtained
by causing a powerful current to flow between two carbon rods that
are first brought into contact, and then gradually separated from
each other, just as they are in the ordinary arc lights employed for
lighting the streets of our cities. In the latter way a temperature
that is estimated as high as 3,500° C. (6,332° F.), can be readily
obtained. Under these very high temperatures some very curious
chemical products have been obtained in electric furnaces. These
furnaces consist of small chambers made of highly refractory materials
closely surrounding the incandescent carbon, or the carbon voltaic
arc. Among some of the most curious of these products are artificially
produced diamonds.

Moissan, however, was not the first to produce diamonds artificially.
As soon as Lavoisier had experimentally shown that the chemical
composition of the diamond and carbon are the same, efforts were made
to convert charcoal into diamonds, and Despretz, as early as 1849,
by means of the combined influence of a powerful burning glass, the
oxyhydrogen blowpipe, and the carbon voltaic arc obtained a very high
temperature. He claims by this temperature to have been able to change
carbon into a few microscopic diamonds. It is quite possible, in the
light of later investigations, that Despretz may have been mistaken
in his belief that he had actually produced diamonds; but whether
this be so or not, he was certainly one of the pioneers in this early
transformation of charcoal.

Theoretically, all that would be required in order to change the
non-crystalline form of carbon into the diamond, would be to
subject the carbon to a temperature sufficiently high to fuse it
and then permit it slowly to crystallize. Could this be done, there
should be no trouble in transforming any amount of coal into any
equal amount of diamonds. But the transformation is by no means as
simple as might be supposed. It is not that the temperature of the
carbon cannot be raised to its point of fusion, but that as soon
as a certain temperature has been reached, the carbon, instead of
fusing or melting, is suddenly volatilized or turned into vapor.
There is no doubt that this is done. Thousands of feet of carbon
rods are volatilized every night in the arc lamps of our cities,
but the trouble is that this carbon vapor so formed, when cooled,
or condensed, is not converted into the exceedingly hard, clear,
crystalline diamond, but into the soft, dull black graphite or
plumbago.

Now the process adopted by Moissan in order to cause volatilized
carbon, or carbon vapor, to condense in the form of crystalline
diamonds was practically as follows: he placed pieces of pure carbon
inside a very strong steel tube, such, for example, as would be formed
by boring a short cylindrical hole in a piece of strong thick steel,
and placing a small quantity of carbon inside the tube so formed.
Closing the open end of the tube by means of a tightly fitting screw
plug, he volatilized the carbon inside the tube. The steel, tube, and
plug formed an electric furnace, for, as soon as he passed an electric
current through it, the temperature at once became high enough to
volatilize the carbon.

Under these circumstances the carbon vapor was subjected to great
pressure owing to the limited space in which it was liberated. As soon
as this mass of dense vapor had been formed, he seized the steel tube
with a pair of furnace tongs, and plunged it below the surface of cold
water in a bucket.

Of course, as the hot tube suddenly chilled, there was a great
shrinking in the walls of the furnace, so that the already compressed
carbon vapor was subjected to a still greater pressure which possibly
liquified it. Of that, however, we cannot speak definitely. This,
however, can safely be asserted, that when the tube was broken open
a confused mass of small crystals was found inside, some of which,
on examination with the microscope, were found to consist of small
crystals of two forms of diamonds, namely, the black diamond, or
carbonado, and the regular crystallized diamond.

Moissan made a great number of experiments for producing diamonds
in this way, and succeeded in forming some very beautiful, though
microscopic, diamonds.

What may be said to characterize especially Moissan's experiments was
the comparatively great number of diamonds, so small as to be scarcely
distinguishable under the microscope. The high temperature to which
the materials inside the tube were exposed resulted in the production
of numerous minute crystals of different minerals. In order to get rid
of as many of these as possible Moissan adopted the plan of subjecting
the material to the action of powerful solvents, such as sulphuric
acid, aqua regia, or a mixture of sulphuric and nitric acid, and
hydrofluoric acid. These acids destroyed most of the minute crystals
of other minerals, but left the minute crystals of diamonds unaffected.

Now it will be observed that the theory proposed by Prof. Carvill
Lewis as to the probable origin of the diamonds of the Kimberly mines
bears a wonderfully close resemblance to the method adopted by Moissan
for the production of artificial diamonds, since it supposes the
diamonds to have been formed by the sudden cooling or chilling within
the pipe of various molten materials brought up from great depths by
the volcanic forces. If this be true, then besides the comparatively
large crystallized and perfect diamonds found in the blue ground
of the Kimberly mines, there should also be found large quantities
of microscopic diamonds, just as are found in Moissan's electric
furnaces, in which he produced artificial diamonds.

Moissan, considering this, obtained a specimen of the blue ground
from the Kimberly diamond pipe and on subjecting it to the action of
the different solvents before named, found in the mass that was left
undissolved a great number of microscopic diamonds. It would seem,
therefore, that there is no reasonable doubt but that the Kimberly
diamond fields had their diamonds produced by the sudden chilling in
the volcanic pipes of molten materials brought from great depths by
the force of volcanic eruption.




CHAPTER XXXVII

THE FABLED CONTINENT OF ATLANTIS


Besides the sudden changes of level that frequently occur during
earthquake shocks there are gradual changes of level that take place
very slowly throughout long periods of time.

These are believed to be due to the warpings produced by the cooling
of an originally highly heated globe.

It is not true, therefore, that the earth's surface is fixed, or that
its land and water areas remain always the same. On the contrary, what
is land at one time is water at another time, and so, too, water areas
may become changed into land areas.

For the most part these changes go on so slowly as not to be
noticeable in an ordinary lifetime. Indeed, in some cases, they are so
extremely gradual that Methuselah himself might have gone to his grave
in ignorance of their progress.

Let us briefly note a few well-known gradual changes of level.

One of the most extensive of these is the sinking of an immense area,
over 6,000 miles in diameter, that covers a large part of the bed or
floor of the Pacific Ocean.

It is an easy matter to observe the gradual changes of level on the
coasts, since the old water line can be at once found, but it is very
difficult to detect such changes in the bed of the ocean, hidden as
it is by a covering of water. Yet many things that seem impossible to
the uninitiated are readily solved by those familiar with physical
science. Little signs, meaningless to others, are easily read, and
these prove beyond doubt the gradual sinking of the ocean's bed.

It was once believed that the coral polyps or animalculæ from the
hard, bony skeletons of which coral reefs are formed, could live
at the greatest depths of the ocean. These minute animals were,
therefore, generally credited with filling up the deep ocean,
in certain places, and converting it into dry land, and poetic
philosophers were pleased to point to their indefatigable labors as an
object lesson to the slothful.

But these charming, though fallacious, ideas were rudely overthrown by
the sounding line and the drag-net. It had long been known that pieces
of coral rock were brought up by dredging apparatus from the bottom of
the ocean at all depths, but it was eventually shown that such pieces
of coral rock never contained living animalculæ, when brought from
water at greater depths than from 100 to 120 feet.

It puzzled scientific men no little at first to explain this apparent
inconsistency. If the coral polyp could not live in water at greater
depths than from 100 to 120 feet, how could the presence of coral rock
at a depth of thousands of feet be explained? Happily, however, this
problem was solved by the great naturalist, Charles Darwin, who showed
that coral islands can only be formed in parts of the ocean whose beds
are sinking at the same gradual rate at which the coral rock is being
deposited. The presence, therefore, of coral islands on the bed of the
Pacific, as well as along parts of its coasts, are, to scientific men,
as good indications of its gradual sinking as if such facts had been
written in the clearest language.

But there are other instances of gradual changes of level besides
the bed of the Pacific. About 600 miles along the coast of Greenland,
from Disco Bay, near lat. 69° N., south to the Firth of Igaliko, lat.
60° 43' N., the bed of the ocean has been slowly sinking through 400
years. Old buildings and islands have been covered by the waters, so
that fishermen have been compelled to provide new poles for their
boats. As Sir Charles Lyell remarks:

      "In one place the Moravian settlers have been obliged more
      than once to move inland the poles upon which their large
      boats are set, and the old poles still remain beneath the
      water as silent witnesses of the change."

Besides these gradual changes of level there are many others, but
only one more need be cited: the gradual movements of the coasts of
North America between Labrador and New Jersey that are rising in some
places, and sinking in other places.

The evidences of these gradual changes of level are sometimes of
such a character that he who runs may read them. One of the most
interesting is, perhaps, that of the old Roman temple of Jupiter
Serapis, at Pozzuli, on the borders of the Mediterranean. This temple,
when completed, was 124 feet in length and 115 feet in width. Its roof
was supported by forty-six columns, each forty-two feet in height, and
five feet in diameter. Only three of these columns are now standing.
They give, however, unquestionable evidence of having been submerged
for about half their height. Nor, indeed, is the evidence wanting that
this submergence continued a considerable time; for, while the lower
twelve feet of the columns remain smooth and unaffected, yet, for a
distance of nine feet above this portion, they have been perforated
by various stone-boring mollusks of a species still living in the
Mediterranean. This witnesses that the columns, when submerged, were
buried in mud for twelve feet, and surrounded by water nine feet
deep. According to Dana, the pavement of the temple is still under
water. The fact that another pavement exists below it shows that these
changes of level had occurred before the temple was deserted by the
Romans. It appears, that, prior to 1845, a gradual sinking of this
part of the coast had been going on, but that since then there has
ensued a gradual rising.

The evidences of these gradual changes of level in the land and water
surfaces of the earth cannot be doubted by even the most skeptical.
Again and again has the dry land disappeared below the surface of the
waters of the ocean. Again and again, the ocean's bed has been raised
to the surface and been converted into dry land. Suppose we attempt to
follow one of the latter movements.

We will imagine an extensive area to have slowly appeared above the
ocean. In due process of time this land surface, which we will assume
to have continental dimensions, gradually becomes covered with plant
and animal life. If it remains above the water for a sufficient
length of time, its simple plants and animals acquire more and more
complex forms, so as to make it difficult to detect any traces of the
original species from which they have descended, or, more correctly,
ascended. Moreover, where favorable conditions exist, the continent
becomes peopled with men, who gradually advance from barbarism to
semi-barbarism and eventually become a most highly civilized nation,
sending to different parts of the world colonies, who carry with them
the language and religious customs of the land of their birth.

But, a sudden or paroxysmal change of level occurs. The highly
developed and densely populated region is suddenly swept out of
existence and completely covered by the waters of the ocean until, in
a few thousand years, all traces of its existence have so completely
disappeared that but few, if any, can be found willing to acknowledge
it ever had an existence.

Such, it is claimed, was the fate of the fabled Continent of Atlantis.
It will, therefore, be interesting to endeavor briefly to review its
past history and to read some of the things that have been written
about this part of the world, which appears in the opinion of some of
the ancients to have actually existed.

References to Atlantis have been made by various early writers. Solon,
the great Athenian lawgiver, who flourished 600 years B. C.,
began a description of this place in verse. This description was never
completed. At a later date one of Solon's descendants, Plato, who
lived about 400 B. C., prepared a description of Atlantis,
giving in detail its location, the general character of its surface,
a description of its principal city, and the civilization of its
inhabitants, as well as a brief reference to its sudden destruction.
In another place this record of Plato will be given in full. It will
suffice now to quote briefly what he says concerning its location.

      "There was an island situated in front of the straits which
      you call the Columns of Heracles (Straits of Gibraltar).
      The island was larger than Libya and Asia put together,
      and was the way to other islands, and from the island you
      might pass through the whole in the opposite continent,
      for this sea which is within the Straits of Heracles is
      only a harbor, having a narrow entrance, but that other is
      the real sea, and the surrounding land may most truly be
      called a continent. Now, in the island of Atlantis, there
      was a great and wonderful empire, which had ruled over the
      whole island and several others, as well as over part of
      the continents; and, besides these, they subjected the
      parts of Libya within the Columns of Heracles as far as
      Egypt, and of Europe as far as Tyrrhenia. The vast power,
      thus gathered into one, endeavored to subdue at one blow
      our country and yours, and the whole of the land which was
      within the straits, and then, Solon, your country shone
      forth, in the excellence of her virtues and strength, among
      all mankind, for she was the first in courage and military
      skill, and was the leader of the Hellenes. And when the
      rest fell off from her, being compelled to stand alone,
      after having undergone the very extremity of danger, she
      defeated and triumphed over the invaders, and preserved
      from slavery those who were not yet subjected, and freely
      liberated all the others who dwelt within the limits of
      Heracles.

      "But afterwards, there occurred violent earthquakes and
      floods, and in a single day and night of rain, all your
      warlike men in a body sunk into the earth, and the island
      of Atlantis in a like manner disappeared, and was sunk
      beneath the sea. And that is the reason why the sea in
      those parts is impassable and impenetrable, because there
      is such a quantity of shallow mud in the way; and this
      was caused by the subsidence of the island." ("Plato's
      Dialogues," ii, 517, Timæus).

But besides Solon and Plato there are other ancient writers who refer
to the lost island of Atlantis.

Ælian, in his "Varia Historia," lib. iii, chap. xvii, states that
Theopompos, who flourished 400 B. C., refers to an interview
between Midas, King of Phrygia, and Sielus, in which the latter speaks
of a great continent larger than Asia, Europe, and Libya together that
existed in the Atlantic.

Proclus quotes a statement from an ancient writer, who speaks about
the islands of the sea beyond the Pillars of Hercules (Straits of
Gibraltar).

Marcellus, in a book on the Ethiopians, refers to seven islands in
the Atlantic whose inhabitants preserve legends of a greater island
(possibly Atlantis), that had dominion over the small islands.

Diodorus Siculus asserts that the Phoenicians discovered a large
island in the Atlantic beyond the Pillars of Hercules several days'
sail from the coast of Africa.

Homer, Plutarch, and other ancient writers, refer to several islands
in the Atlantic situated several thousand stadia from the Pillars of
Hercules. (A stadium was a Greek measure of length equal to 600 feet.
It was equal to one-eighth of a Roman mile, or 625 Roman feet.)

Ignatius Donnelly, in his book, called "Atlantis, the Ante-Diluvian
World," claims that Plato's description of Atlantis which has
generally been regarded as imaginary, was, on the contrary, historic;
that the prehistoric continent of Atlantis was the cradle of the human
race; that here man reached his highest civilization; that Atlantis
was the site of the Garden of Eden, the Gardens of the Hesperides, the
Elysian Fields, as well as Olympus; that, under the forms of the gods
and goddesses of the ancient Greeks, the Phoenicians, the Hindoos,
and the Scandinavians, are related the stories of the kings, queens,
and heroes of Atlantis.

Much that has been claimed for the lost continent can hardly be
regarded in any other light save that of imagination. For example, it
has been asserted that it was from Atlantis that the colonies were
sent out that peopled the coast countries of the Gulf of Mexico, of
parts of the valley of the Mississippi, the basin of the Amazon, the
western coasts of South America, parts of Europe, the shore lands of
the Mediterranean Sea, the coasts of Europe, including the Caspian and
the Black Seas, and even of parts of Africa.

It has also been asserted that this mighty nation of Atlantis carried
the worship of the sun to Egypt, which was one of its first colonies,
and, therefore, the civilization of Egypt was but an offshoot of
prehistoric Atlantis.

But it will be reasonably objected that, if such a mass of land ever
existed in the North Atlantic, some evidences should still be found
on the bed of the ocean. Even though great periods of time have
elapsed since the disappearance of Atlantis, some traces of its former
existence should still remain on the floor of the ocean. Are there
any evidences of an old land mass on this part of the floor of the
Atlantic? The answer is unmistakable.

Deep-sea soundings show beyond question that there still exists in
the North Atlantic in the region where Atlantis is said to have been
located a submarine island, the summits of which appear above the
waters in the Azores and the Canary Islands. This submarine island
has been traced southwest over the bed of the ocean for a distance of
several thousand miles with a breadth of fully 1,000 miles. Toward the
south there is connected with it another submarine island, the summits
of which reach above the surface in the islands of Ascension, St.
Helena, and Tristan d'Acunha.

But the testimony of the submarine islands extends further than this.
According to a number of careful soundings it appears that the bed
of these parts of the ocean, instead of being characterized by a
comparatively level surface due to the gradual accumulation of silt,
possesses, to a great extent, the peculiarly sculptured surfaces which
are only produced by exposure for a long time to the atmosphere.

Other facts might be adduced to show that some time during the first
appearance of man on the earth there was a large land mass connecting
the Eastern and Western Continents. These facts include the wonderful
resemblances existing between the plants and animals of the Eastern
and Western Continents, the close resemblances of the myths and
legends of the races of the Eastern and Western Continents, as well
as the identity of their religious ideas, and the close similarity of
their language so far as relates to certain fundamental ideas. These
facts all point unquestionably to the existence of some large land
mass between the two continents, and to this extent to throw light on
the probable existence of prehistoric Atlantis.




CHAPTER XXXVIII

PLATO'S ACCOUNT OF ATLANTIS


The following is a translation of Plato's record in full:

      Critias. Then listen, Socrates, to a strange tale, which
      is, however, certainly true, as Solon, who was the wisest
      of the seven sages, declared. He was a relative and great
      friend of my great-grandfather, Dropidas, as he himself
      says in several of his poems, and Dropidas told Critias, my
      grandfather, who remembered, and told us, that there were
      of old great and marvellous actions of the Athenians, which
      have passed into oblivion through time and the destruction
      of the human race--and one in particular, which was the
      greatest of them all, the recital of which will be a
      suitable testimony of our gratitude to you....

      Socrates. Very good; and what is this ancient famous
      action of which Critias spoke, not as a mere legend, but
      as a veritable action of the Athenian State, which Solon
      recounted?

      Critias. I will tell an old-world story which I heard from
      an aged man; for Critias was, as he said, at that time
      nearly ninety-years of age, and I was about ten years of
      age. Now the day was that day of the Apaturia which is
      called the registration of youth; at which, according to
      custom, our parents gave prizes for recitations, and the
      poems of several poets were recited by us boys, and many
      of us sung the poems of Solon, which were new at the time.
      One of our tribe, either because this was his real opinion,
      or because he thought that he would please Critias, said
      that, in his judgment, Solon was not only the wisest of men
      but the noblest of poets. The old man, I well remember,
      brightened up at this, and said smiling: "Yes, Amynander,
      if Solon had only, like other poets, made poetry the
      business of his life, and had completed the tale which he
      brought with him from Egypt, and had not been compelled, by
      reason of the factions and troubles which he found stirring
      in this country when he came home, to attend to other
      matters, in my opinion, he would have been as famous as
      Homer, or Hesiod, or any poet."

      "And what was that poem about, Critias?" said the person
      who addressed him.

      "About the greatest action which the Athenians ever did,
      and which ought to have been most famous, but which,
      through the lapse of time and the destruction of the
      actors, has not come down to us."

      "Tell us," said the other, "the whole story, and how and
      from whom Solon heard this veritable tradition."

      He replied: "At the head of the Egyptian Delta, where the
      river Nile divides, there is a certain district which is
      called the district of Sais, and the great city of the
      district is also called Sais, and is the city from which
      Amasis the king was sprung. And the citizens have a deity
      who is their foundress: she is called in the Egyptian
      tongue Neith, which is asserted by them to be the same
      whom the Hellenes called Athene. Now, the citizens of
      this city are great lovers of the Athenians, and say that
      they are in some way related to them. Thither came Solon,
      who was received by them with great honor; and he asked
      the priests, who were most skilful in such matters, about
      antiquity, and made the discovery that neither he nor any
      other Hellene knew anything worth mentioning about the
      times of old.

      "On one occasion, when he was drawing them on to speak of
      antiquity, he began to tell about the most ancient things
      in our part of the world--about Phoroneus, who is called
      'the first,' and about Niobe; and, after the Deluge, to
      tell of the lives of Deucalian and Pyrrha; and he traced
      the genealogy of their descendants, and attempted to
      reckon how many years old were the events of which he was
      speaking, and to give the dates. Thereupon, one of the
      priests, who was of very great age, said: 'O Solon, Solon,
      you Hellenes are but children, and there is never an old
      man who is an Hellene.' Solon, hearing this, said, 'What do
      you mean?' 'I mean to say,' he replied, 'that in mind you
      are all young; there is no old opinion handed down among
      you by ancient traditions, nor any science which is hoary
      with age. And I will tell you the reason of this: there
      have been, and there will be again, many destructions of
      mankind arising out of many causes.

      "'There is a story which even you have preserved, that
      once upon a time Phaëthon, the son of Helios, having yoked
      the steeds in his father's chariot, because he was not
      able to drive them in the path of his father, burnt up all
      that was upon the earth, and was himself destroyed by a
      thunder-bolt. Now, this has the form of a myth, but really
      signifies a declination of the bodies moving around the
      earth, and in the heavens, and a great conflagration of
      things upon the earth recurring at long intervals of time:
      when this happens, those who live upon the mountains and in
      dry and lofty places are more liable to destruction than
      those who dwell by rivers or on the sea-shore; and from
      this calamity the Nile, who is our never-failing savior,
      saves and delivers us.

      "'When, on the other hand, the gods purge the earth with a
      deluge of water, among you herdsmen and shepherds on the
      mountains are the survivors, whereas those of you who live
      in cities are carried by the rivers into the sea; but in
      this country neither at that time nor at any other does
      the water come up from below, for which reason the things
      preserved here are said to be the oldest. The fact is,
      that wherever the extremity of winter frost or of summer
      sun does not prevent, the human race is always increasing
      at times, and at other times diminishing in numbers. And
      whatever happened either in your country or in ours, or in
      any other regions of which we are informed--if any action
      which is noble or great, or in any other way remarkable has
      taken place, all that has been written down of old, and is
      preserved in our temples; whereas you and other nations are
      just being provided with letters and the other things which
      States require; and then, at the usual period, the stream
      from heaven descends like a pestilence, and leaves only
      those of you who are destitute of letters and education;
      and thus you have to begin all over again as children, and
      know nothing of what happened in ancient times, either
      among us or among yourselves.

      "'As for those genealogies of yours which you have
      recounted to us, Solon, they are no better than the tales
      of children; for, in the first place, you remember one
      deluge only, whereas there were many of them, and, in the
      next place, you do not know that there dwelt in your land
      the fairest and noblest race of men which ever lived, of
      whom you and your whole city are but a seed or remnant. And
      this was unknown to you, because for many generations the
      survivors of that destruction died and made no sign. For
      there was a time, Solon, before that great deluge of all,
      when the city which now is Athens, was first in war, and
      was preëminent for the excellence of her laws, and is said
      to have performed the noblest deeds, and to have had the
      fairest constitution of any of which tradition tells, under
      the face of heaven.'

      "Solon marvelled at this and earnestly requested the priest
      to inform him exactly and in order about these former
      citizens. 'You are welcome to hear about them, Solon,' said
      the priest, 'both for your own sake and for that of the
      city; and, above all, for the sake of the goddess who is
      the common patron and protector and educator of both our
      cities. She founded your city a thousand years before ours,
      receiving from the Earth and Hephæstus the seed of your
      race, and then she founded ours, the constitution of which
      is set down in our sacred registers as 8,000 years old. As
      touching the citizens of 9,000 years ago, I will briefly
      inform you of their laws and of the noblest of their
      actions; and the exact particulars of the whole we will
      hereafter go through at our leisure in the sacred registers
      themselves. If you compare these very laws with your own,
      you will find that many of ours are the counterpart of
      yours, as they were in the olden time.

      "'In the first place, there is the caste of priests,
      which is separated from all the others; next there are
      the artificers, who exercise their several crafts by
      themselves, and without admixture of any other, and also
      there is the class of shepherds and that of hunters, as
      well as that of husbandmen; and you will observe, too, that
      the warriors in Egypt are separated from all the other
      classes, and are commanded by the law only to engage in
      war. Moreover, the weapons with which they are equipped
      are shields and spears, and this the goddess taught first
      among you, and then in Asiatic countries, and we among the
      Asiatics first adopted.

      "'Then, as to wisdom, do you observe, what care the law
      took from the very first, searching out and comprehending
      the whole order of things down to prophecy and medicine
      (the latter with a view to health); and out of these divine
      elements drawing what was needful for human life, and
      adding every sort of knowledge which was connected with
      them. All this order and arrangement the goddess first
      imparted to you when establishing your city; and she chose
      the spot of earth in which you were born, because she saw
      that the happy temperament of the seasons in that land
      would produce the wisest of men.

      "'Wherefore the goddess, who was a lover both of war and
      of wisdom, selected, and first of all settled that spot
      which was the most likely to produce men likest herself.
      And there you dwelt, having such laws as these and still
      better ones, and excelled all mankind in all virtue,
      as became the children and disciples of the gods. Many
      great and wonderful deeds are recorded of your State in
      our histories; but one of them exceeds all the rest in
      greatness and valor; for these histories tell of a mighty
      power which was agressing wantonly against the whole of
      Europe and Asia, and to which your city put an end.

      "'This power came forth out of the Atlantic Ocean, for in
      those days the Atlantic was navigable; and there was an
      island situated in front of the straits which you call the
      Columns of Heracles: the island was larger than Libya and
      Asia put together, and was the way to other islands, and
      from the island you might pass through the whole of the
      opposite continent which surrounded the true ocean; for
      this sea which is within the Straits of Heracles is only
      a harbor, having a narrow entrance, but that other is a
      real sea, and the surrounding land may be most truly called
      a continent. Now, in the island of Atlantis there was a
      great and wonderful empire, which had rule over the whole
      island and several others, as well as over parts of the
      continent; and, besides these, they subjected the parts of
      Libya within the Columns of Heracles as far as Egypt, and
      of Europe as far as Tyrrhenia.

      "'That vast power, thus gathered into one, endeavored to
      subdue at one blow our country and yours, and the whole of
      the land which was within the straits; and then, Solon,
      your country shone forth, in the excellence of her virtue
      and strength, among all mankind, for she was the first
      in courage and military skill, and was the leader of the
      Hellenes. And when the rest fell off from her, being
      compelled to stand alone, after having undergone the very
      extremity of danger, she defeated and triumphed over the
      invaders, and preserved from slavery those who were not
      yet subjected, and freely liberated all the others who
      dwelt within the limits of Heracles. But afterward there
      occurred violent earthquakes and floods, and in a single
      day and night of rain all your warlike men in a body sunk
      into the earth, and the island of Atlantis in like manner
      disappeared, and was sunk beneath the sea. And that is
      the reason why the sea in those parts is impassable and
      impenetrable, because there is such a quantity of shallow
      mud in the way; and this was caused by the subsidence of
      the island.' ('Plato's Dialogues,' ii, 517, Timæus.)...

      "But in addition to the gods whom you have mentioned, I
      would specially invoke Mnemosyne; for all the important
      part of what I have to tell is dependent on her favor, and
      if I can recollect and recite enough of what was said by
      the priests, and brought hither by Solon, I doubt not that
      I shall satisfy the requirements of this theatre. To that
      task, then, I will at once address myself.

      "Let me begin by observing first of all that nine thousand
      was the sum of years which had elapsed since the war which
      was said to have taken place between all those who dwelt
      outside the Pillars of Heracles and those who dwelt within
      them. This war I am now to describe. Of the combatants on
      the one side the city of Athens was reported to have been
      the ruler, and to have directed the contest; the combatants
      on the other side were led by the kings of the islands
      of Atlantis, which, as I was saying, once had an extent
      greater than that of Libya and Asia; and, when afterwards
      sunk by an earthquake, became an impassable barrier of mud
      to voyagers sailing from hence to the ocean. The progress
      of the history will unfold the various tribes of barbarians
      and Hellenes which then existed, as they successively
      appear on the scene; but I must begin by describing, first
      of all, the Athenians as they were in that day, and their
      enemies who fought with them; and I shall have to tell of
      the power and form of government of both of them. Let us
      give the precedence to Athens....

      "Many great deluges have taken place during the nine
      thousand years, for that is the number of years which have
      elapsed since the time of which I am speaking; and in all
      the ages and changes of things there has never been any
      settlement of the earth flowing down from the mountains, as
      in other places, which is worth speaking of; it has always
      been carried round in a circle, and disappeared in the
      depths below. The consequence is that, in comparison with
      what then was, there are remaining in small islets only the
      bones of the wasted body, as they may be called, all the
      richer and softer parts of the soil having fallen away, and
      the mere skeleton of the country being left....

      "And next, if I have not forgotten what I heard when I was
      a child, I will impart to you the character and origin
      of their adversaries; for friends should not keep their
      stories to themselves, but have them in common. Yet, before
      proceeding further in the narrative, I ought to warn you
      that you must not be surprised, if you should hear Hellenic
      names given to foreigners. I will tell you the reason
      of this: Solon, who was intending to use the tale for
      his poem, made an investigation into the meaning of the
      names, and found that the early Egyptians, in writing them
      down, had translated them into their own language, and he
      recovered the meaning of the several names and retranslated
      them, and copied them out again in our language. My
      great-grandfather, Dropidas, had the original writing,
      which is still in my possession, and was carefully studied
      by me when I was a child. Therefore, if you hear names such
      as are used in this country, you must not be surprised, for
      I have told you the reason of them.

      "The tale, which was of great length, began as follows:
      I have before remarked, in speaking of the allotments
      of the gods, that they distributed the whole earth into
      portions differing in extent, and made themselves temples
      and sacrifices. And Poseidon, receiving for his lot the
      island of Atlantis, begat children by a mortal woman, and
      settled them in a part of the island which I will proceed
      to describe. On the side toward the sea, and in the centre
      of the whole island, there was a plain which is said to
      have been the fairest of all plains, and very fertile.
      Near the plain, and also in the centre of the island, at a
      distance of about fifty stadia, there was a mountain, not
      very high on any side. In this mountain there dwelt one of
      the earth-born primeval men of that country, whose name was
      Evenor, and he had a wife named Leucippe, and they had an
      only daughter, who was named Cleito.

      "The maiden was growing up to womanhood when her father
      and mother died; Poseidon fell in love with her, and had
      intercourse with her; and, breaking the ground, enclosed
      the hill in which she lived all around, making alternate
      zones of sea and land, larger and smaller, encircling
      one another; there were two of land and three of water,
      which he turned as with a lathe out of the centre of the
      island, equidistant every way, so that no man could get
      to the island, for ships and voyagers were not yet heard
      of. He himself, as he was a god, found no difficulty in
      making special arrangements for the centre island, bringing
      two streams of water under the earth, which he caused to
      ascend as springs, one of warm water and the other of cold,
      and making every variety of food to spring up abundantly
      in the earth. He also begat and brought up five pairs of
      male children, dividing the island of Atlantis into ten
      portions; he gave to the first-born of the eldest pair his
      mother's dwelling and the surrounding allotment, which was
      the largest and best, and made him king over the rest; the
      others he made princes, and gave them rule over many men
      and a large territory.

      "He named them all: the eldest, who was king, he named
      Atlas, and from him the whole island and the ocean received
      the name of Atlantic. To his twin brother, who was born
      after him, and obtained as his lot the extremity of the
      island toward the Pillars of Heracles, as far as the
      country which is still called the region of Gades in that
      part of the world, he gave the name which in the Hellenic
      language is Eumelus, in the language of the country which
      is named after him, Gadeirus. Of the second pair of twins,
      he called one Ampheres and the other Evæmon. To the third
      pair of twins he gave the name Mneseus to the elder, and
      Autochthon to the one who followed him. Of the fourth pair
      of twins he called the elder Elasippus and the younger
      Mestor. And of the fifth pair he gave to the elder the name
      of Azaes, and to the younger Diaprepes.

      "All these and their descendants were the inhabitants
      and rulers of divers islands in the open sea; and also,
      as has been already said, they held sway in the other
      direction over the country within the Pillars as far as
      Egypt and Tyrrhenia. Now Atlas had a numerous and honorable
      family, and his eldest branch always retained the kingdom,
      which the eldest son handed on to his eldest for many
      generations; and they had such an amount of wealth as
      was never before possessed by kings and potentates, and
      is not likely ever to be again, and they were furnished
      with everything which they could desire both in city and
      country. For, because of the greatness of their empire,
      many things were brought to them from foreign countries,
      and the island itself provided much of what was required by
      them for the uses of life.

      "In the first place, they dug out of the earth whatever
      was to be found there, mineral as well as metal, and that
      which is now only a name, and was then something more
      than a name--orichalcum--was dug out of the earth in many
      parts of the island, and, with the exception of gold, was
      esteemed the most precious of metals among the men of those
      days. There was an abundance of wood for carpenters' work,
      and sufficient maintenance for tame and wild animals.
      Moreover, there were a great number of elephants in the
      island, and there was provision for animals of every kind,
      both for those who live in lakes and marshes and rivers,
      and also for those which live in mountains, and on plains,
      and therefore for the animal which is the largest and most
      voracious of them.

      "Also whatever fragrant things there are in the earth,
      whether roots, or herbage, or woods, or distilling drops
      of flowers, or fruits, grew and thrived in that land; and
      again, the cultivated fruit of the earth, both the dry
      edible fruit and other species of food, which we call by
      the general name of legumes, and the fruits having a hard
      rind, affording drinks, and meats, and ointments, and good
      store of chestnuts and the like, which may be used to play
      with, and are fruits which spoil with keeping--and the
      pleasant kinds of dessert which console us after dinner,
      when we are full and tired of eating--all these that
      sacred island lying beneath the sun brought forth fair and
      wondrous in infinite abundance.

      "All these things they received from the earth, and they
      employed themselves in constructing their temples, and
      palaces, and harbors and docks; and they arranged the
      whole country in the following manner: first of all they
      bridged over the zones of sea which surrounded the ancient
      metropolis, and made a passage into and out of the royal
      palace; and then they began to build the palace in the
      habitation of the god and of their ancestors. This they
      continued to ornament in successive generations, every king
      surpassing the one who came before him to the utmost of his
      power, until they made the building a marvel to behold for
      size and for beauty.

      "And, beginning from the sea, they dug a canal three
      hundred feet in width and one hundred feet in depth, and
      fifty stadia in length, which they carried through to the
      outermost zone, making a passage from the sea up to this,
      which became a harbor, and leaving an opening sufficient
      to enable the largest vessels to find ingress. Moreover,
      they divided the zones of land which parted the zones
      of sea, constructing bridges of such a width as would
      leave a passage for a single trireme to pass out of one
      into another, and roofed them over; and there was a way
      underneath for the ships, for the banks of the zones were
      raised considerably above the water.

      "Now the largest of the zones into which a passage was cut
      from the sea was three stadia in breadth, and the zone of
      land which came next of equal breadth; but the next two,
      as well a zone of water as of land, were two stadia, and
      the one which surrounded the central island was a stadium
      only in width. The island in which the palace was situated
      had a diameter of five stadia. This, and the zones and the
      bridge, which was the sixth part of a stadium in width,
      they surrounded by a stone wall, on either side placing
      towers, and gates on the bridges where the sea passed
      in. The stone which was used in the work they quarried
      from underneath the centre island and from underneath the
      zones, on the outer as well as the inner side. One kind of
      stone was white, another black, and a third red; as they
      quarried, they at the same time hollowed out decks, double
      within, having roofs formed out of the native rock.

      "Some of their buildings were simple, but in others they
      put together different stones, which they intermingled for
      the sake of ornament, to be a natural source of delight.
      The entire circuit of the wall which went around the
      outermost one they covered with a coating of brass, and
      the circuit of the next wall they coated with tin, and the
      third, which encompassed the citadel, flashed with the red
      light of orichalcum. The palace in the interior of the
      citadel was constructed in this wise: in the centre was
      a holy temple, dedicated to Cleito and Poseidon, which
      remained inaccessible, and was surrounded by an enclosure
      of gold; this was the spot in which was originally begotten
      the race of ten princes, and thither they annually brought
      the fruits of the earth in their season from all the ten
      portions, and performed sacrifices to each of them.

      "Here, too, was Poseidon's own temple, of a stadium in
      length and half a stadium in width, and of a proportionate
      height, having a sort of barbaric splendor. All the outside
      of the temple, with the exception of the pinnacles, they
      covered with silver, and the pinnacles with gold. In the
      interior of the temple the roof was of ivory, adorned
      everywhere with gold and silver and orichalcum; all the
      other parts of the walls and pillars and floor they lined
      with orichalcum. In the temple they placed statues of
      gold: there was the god himself standing in a chariot--the
      charioteer of six winged horses--and of such a size that
      he touched the roof of the building with his head; around
      him were a hundred Nereids riding on dolphins, for such was
      thought to be the number of them in that day.

      "There were also in the interior of the temple other images
      which had been dedicated by private individuals. And around
      the temple, on the outside, were placed statues of gold
      of all the ten kings and of their wives; and there were
      many other great offerings, both of kings and of private
      individuals, coming both from the city itself and the
      foreign cities over which they held sway. There was an
      altar, too, which in size and workmanship corresponded to
      the rest of the work, and there were palaces in like manner
      which answered to the greatness of the kingdom and the
      glory of the temple.

      "In the next place, they used fountains both of gold and
      hot springs. These were very abundant, and both kinds
      wonderfully adapted to use by reason of the sweetness and
      excellence of their waters. They constructed buildings
      about them, and planted suitable trees; also cisterns,
      some open to the heaven, others which they roofed over,
      to be used in winter as warm baths: there were the king's
      baths, and the baths of private persons, which were kept
      apart; also separate baths for women, and others again for
      horses and cattle, and to them they gave as much adornment
      as was suitable for them. The water which ran off they
      carried, some to the grove of Poseidon, where were growing
      all manner of trees of wonderful height and beauty, owing
      to the excellence of the soil; the remainder was conveyed
      by aqueducts which passed over the bridges to the outer
      circles: and there were many temples built and dedicated
      to many gods; also gardens and places of exercise, some
      for men, and some set apart for horses, in both of the
      two islands formed by the zones; and in the centre of the
      larger of the two, there was a racecourse of a stadium
      in width, and in length allowed to extend all round the
      island, for horses to race in.

      "Also there were guard-houses at intervals for the
      body-guard, the more trusted of whom had their duties
      appointed to them in the lesser zone, which was nearer the
      Acropolis; while the most trusted of all had houses given
      them within the citadel, and about the persons of the
      kings. The docks were full of triremes and naval stores,
      and all things were quite ready for use. Enough of the plan
      of the royal palace. Crossing the outer harbors, which were
      three in number, you would come to a wall which began at
      the sea and went all round; this was everywhere distant
      fifty stadia from the largest zone and harbor, and enclosed
      the whole, meeting at the mouth of the channel toward the
      sea.

      "The entire area was densely crowded with habitations;
      and the canal and the largest of the harbors were full
      of vessels, and merchants coming from all parts, who,
      from their numbers, kept up a multitudinous sound of
      human voices and din of all sorts, night and day. I have
      repeated his descriptions of the city and the parts about
      the ancient palace nearly as he gave them, and now I must
      endeavor to describe the nature and arrangement of the
      rest of the country. The whole country was described as
      being very lofty and precipitous on the side of the sea,
      but the country immediately about and surrounding the city
      was a level plain, itself surrounded by mountains which
      descended toward the sea; it was smooth and even, but of
      an oblong shape, extending in one direction three thousand
      stadia, and going up the country from the sea through the
      centre of the island two thousand stadia; the whole region
      of the island lies toward the south, and is sheltered from
      the north.

      "The surrounding mountains were celebrated for their number
      and size and beauty, in which they exceeded all that are
      now to be seen anywhere; having in them also many wealthy
      inhabited villages, and rivers and lakes, and meadows
      supplying food enough for every animal, wild or tame, and
      wood of various sorts, abundant for every kind of work.
      I will now describe the plain, which had been cultivated
      during many ages by many generations of kings. It was
      rectangular, and for the most part straight and oblong; and
      what it wanted of the straight line followed the line of
      the circular ditch. The depth and width and length of this
      ditch were incredible, and gave the impression that such a
      work, in addition to so many other works, could hardly have
      been wrought by the hand of man. But I must say what I have
      heard.

      "It was excavated to the depth of a hundred feet, and its
      breadth was a stadium everywhere; it was carried round the
      whole of the plain, and was ten thousand stadia in length.
      It received the streams which came down the mountains,
      and winding round the plain, and touching the city at
      various points, was there let off into the sea. From above,
      likewise, straight canals of a hundred feet in width were
      cut in the plain, and again let off into the ditch, toward
      the sea. These canals were at intervals of a hundred
      stadia, and by them they brought down the wood from the
      mountains to the city, and conveyed the fruits of the earth
      in ships, cutting transverse passages from one canal into
      another, and to the city. Twice in the year they gathered
      the fruits of the earth--in winter having the benefit of
      the rains, and in summer introducing the water of the
      canals. As to the population, each of the lots in the plain
      had an appointed chief of men who were fit for military
      service, and the size of the lot was to be a square of ten
      stadia each way, and the total number of all the lots was
      sixty thousand.

      "And of the inhabitants, of the mountains and of the rest
      of the country there was also a vast multitude having
      leaders, to whom they were assigned according to their
      dwellings and villages. The leader was required to furnish
      for the wars the sixth portion of a war-chariot, so as
      to make up a total of ten thousand chariots; also two
      horses and riders upon them, and a light chariot without
      a seat, accompanied by a fighting man on foot carrying a
      small shield, and having a charioteer mounted to guide the
      horses; also, he was bound to furnish two heavy-armed men,
      two archers, two slingers, three stone-shooters, and three
      javelin men, who were skirmishers, and four sailors, to
      make up a complement of twelve hundred ships. Such was the
      order of war in the royal city.

      "That of the other nine governments was different in each
      of them, and would be wearisome to narrate. As to offices
      and honors the following was the arrangement from the
      first: each of the ten kings, in his own division and in
      his own city, had the absolute control of the citizens,
      and in many cases, of the laws, punishing and slaying
      whomsoever he would.

      "Now the relations of their governments to one another
      were regulated by the injunctions of Poseidon as the law
      had handed them down. These were inscribed by the first
      men on a column of orichalcum, which was situated in the
      middle of the island, at the temple of Poseidon, whither
      the people were gathered together every fifth and sixth
      years alternately, thus giving equal honor to the odd and
      to the even number. And when they were gathered together
      they consulted about public affairs, and inquired if any
      one had transgressed in anything, and passed judgment on
      him accordingly--and before they passed judgment they gave
      their pledges to one another in this wise:

      "There were bulls who had the range of the temple of
      Poseidon; and the ten who were left alone in the temple,
      after they had offered prayers to the gods that they might
      take the sacrifices which were acceptable to them, hunted
      the bulls without weapons, but with staves and nooses; and
      the bull which they caught they led up to the column. The
      victim was then struck on the head by them, and slain over
      the sacred inscription. Now on the column, besides the law,
      there was inscribed an oath invoking mighty curses on the
      disobedient. When, therefore, after offering sacrifices
      according to their customs, they had burnt the limbs of the
      bull, they mingled a cup and cast in a clot of blood for
      each of them. The rest of the victim they took to the fire,
      after having made a purification of the column all round.

      "They then drew from the cup in golden vessels, and,
      pouring a libation on the fire, they swore that they would
      judge according to the laws on the column, and would punish
      any one who had previously transgressed, and that for the
      future they would not, if they could help, transgress any
      of the inscriptions, and would not command, or obey any
      ruler who commanded them, to act otherwise than according
      to the laws of their father Poseidon.

      "This was the prayer which each of them offered up for
      himself and for his family, at the same time drinking, and
      dedicating the vessel in the temple of the god; and, after
      spending some necessary time at supper, when darkness came
      on and the fire about the sacrifice was cool, all of them
      put on most beautiful azure robes, and, sitting on the
      ground at night near the embers of the sacrifices on which
      they had sworn, and extinguishing all the fires about the
      temple, they received and gave judgment, if any of them had
      any accusation to bring against any one; and, when they had
      given judgment, at daybreak they wrote down their sentences
      on a golden tablet, and deposited them as memorials with
      their robes.

      "There were many special laws which the several kings had
      inscribed about the temple, but the most important was the
      following: that they were not to take up arms against one
      another, and they were all to come to the rescue, if any
      one in any city attempted to overthrow the royal house.
      Like their ancestors, they were to deliberate in common
      about war and other matters, giving the supremacy to the
      family of Atlas; and the king was not to have the power of
      life or death over any of his kinsmen, unless he had the
      assent of the majority of the ten kings.

      "Such was the vast power which the god settled in the lost
      island of Atlantis; and this he afterward directed against
      our land on the following pretext, as traditions tell. For
      many generations, as long as the divine nature lasted in
      them, they were obedient to the laws, and well-affectioned
      toward the gods, who were their kinsmen, for they possessed
      true and in every way great spirits, practicing gentleness
      and wisdom in the various chances of life, and in their
      intercourse with one another.

      "They despised everything but virtue, not caring for
      their present state of life, and thinking lightly on the
      possession of gold, and other property, which seemed only a
      burden to them; neither were they intoxicated by luxury,
      nor did wealth deprive them of their self-control; but
      they were sober, and saw clearly that all these goods are
      increased by virtuous friendship with one another, and that
      by excessive zeal for them and honor of them, the good of
      them is lost, and friendship perishes with them.

      "By such reflections, and by the continuance in them of a
      divine nature, all that which we have described waxed and
      increased in them; but when this divine portion began to
      fade away in them, and became diluted too often, and with
      too much of the mortal admixture, and the human nature
      got the upper hand, then, they being unable to bear their
      fortune, became unseemly, and to him who had an eye to see,
      they began to appear base, and had lost the fairest of
      their precious gifts; but to those who had no eye to see
      the true happiness they still appeared glorious and blessed
      at the very time when they were filled with unrighteous
      avarice and power. Zeus, the god of gods, who rules with
      law, and is able to see into such things, perceiving that
      an honorable race was in a most wretched state, and wanting
      to inflict punishment on them, that they might be chastened
      and improved, collected all the gods into his most holy
      habitation, which, being placed in the centre of the world,
      sees all things that partake of generations. And when he
      had called them together, he spake as follows:"

The story abruptly ends here, for Plato left no further record.




CHAPTER XXXIX

NATURE'S WARNING OF COMING EARTHQUAKES


That there are signs of coming earthquakes which might be read by
man, had he sufficient knowledge, there would seem to be but little
doubt. These phenomena follow natural laws so that the approach of an
earthquake must necessarily be in a definite order both as regards
the phenomena which precede as well as those which follow it. There
should, therefore, be signs that would enable one to predict its
coming, although it must be acknowledged that these signs, so far as
we actually know, are indistinct.

It may seem to the unthinking and unobservant that the awful
catastrophe of an earthquake comes entirely unheralded; that,
apparently, it is not until the earth's surface begins to rock to
and fro under the mighty forces that are causing destruction that
its presence can be known. There are, however, many reasons for
believing that in, perhaps, the greatest number of cases, it might
have been foreseen, if greater attention had been given to the
slight indications of its probable approach a short time before its
occurrence.

It is evident that the conditions of great pressure or stress in the
earth's crust which finally result in a disastrous earthquake have
been slowly accumulating for a long time, and that when the pressure
at last reaches a point where the crust has to yield or slip, the
ground is suddenly crushed and tossed to and fro while vast fissures
and chasms are produced in the subterranean regions. At those points
of the earth immediately above or in the neighborhood of such regions
it is possible that there are many signs of the coming quake;
and, although indistinguishable by our duller senses, are readily
appreciated by the more highly developed senses of the lower animals.
Indeed, had we accustomed ourselves to reading the various indications
of nature as the lower animals have, we, too, might be able to read
these warnings of the coming earthquake.

At great distances from the place where the earthquake starts there
would necessarily be a better opportunity for predicting its approach.
As already stated, what is called an earthquake does not consist
of a single shaking of the ground, but of a highly complex series
of shakings. According to Mallet, the following waves start at the
same time from the place of origin of an earthquake, when located
on the bed of an ocean; i. e., an earth sound wave and a earth wave
constituting the earth's shake; a sound wave through the ocean,
another through the air; a sea wave called by him a forced sea wave,
and finally the great sea wave.

These waves reach a distant point in the following order: the sound
wave through the earth and the great earthquake or shake which
produces the damage. Then a smaller sea wave called the forced sea
wave. This is followed almost immediately by the sound wave through
the sea. Next come the air sound wave and finally the great sea wave;
which, rushing in on the shore, sweeps nearly everything before it.

In other words, the disturbances produced by the great earthquake
follow in this order of sequence. If, therefore, the great earthquake
wave proper transmitted through the earth should for any reason be
delayed in reaching a distant place, the great sound waves should be
able to give warning of the coming disturbances.

Again, as we have already seen, the earthquake wave is preceded by a
number of preliminary tremors, and is followed by a number of after
tremors or _earthquake echoes_. Since, therefore, the preliminary
waves reach a place first, it would seem that the approach of an
earthquake must be heralded by the preliminary tremors. These,
perhaps, at least in part, enable the lower animals to detect its
coming.

Again, in almost all instances there are a number of preliminary
shocks that precede the great earthquake shock. Some of these
preliminary shocks continue at intervals for several days or even
longer. Sometimes, indeed, these subterranean sounds fail to be
followed by earthquakes. Milne thinks that these sounds are caused
by the preliminary tremors which precede the principal shock of the
earthquake and that they reach the place first. Here again then it
is evident that, were we able to interpret properly these sounds, we
would probably be able to foretell the coming quake with a fair degree
of certainty.

There would appear to be no reasonable doubt that in some manner
which we have not yet been able to discover, but probably along some
of the lines indicated above, animals are capable of recognizing a
coming earthquake. Long before the coming of the catastrophe they are
said to exhibit extreme terror, and in many cases appear to seek the
companionship of man, as if for protection.

That the senses of smell and hearing are far more acute in the lower
animals than in man no one can reasonably doubt. The manner in which
a trained dog can follow a scent, for a long time after the animal
or thing producing it has passed, far exceeds the power of scent
possessed by man, and it is more than likely that this same power is
possessed by all animals who live upon or prey upon other animals. It
is probable that faintly odorous vapors or gases escape from the crust
shortly before the great shock occurs, and that these faint odors are
warnings to the animals of the approaching calamity. The sense of
hearing also is much more acute in the lower animals.

Daubeny is evidently of this belief, as will be seen from the
following:

      "These gases and vapors (alluding to emanations given off
      from the ground during earthquakes) exert an influence
      on the barometer, which does appear to be indirectly
      affected by the earthquake. Then, similar properties
      also may occasion that uneasiness which animals are said
      to evince before any such event. Thus, according to the
      accounts of some writers, rats and mice leave their holes,
      alligators seek the dry land, quadrupeds snuff the ground,
      and manifest such signs of the impending calamity that in
      countries where earthquakes are common, the inhabitants
      take the alarm in consequence, and escape from their
      houses. It is right, however, to add, that more recent
      authorities dispute altogether the correctness of these
      statements."

Dutton doubts the ability of animals to foretell coming earthquake
shocks.

But that the lower animals do exhibit signs of fear at the approach of
an earthquake has been repeatedly asserted by good observers.

Hamilton, who made a careful examination of the neighboring country
during the great earthquake at Calabria, asserts that horses and oxen
during the shocks extended their legs widely in order to avoid being
thrown down, "and that hogs, oxen, horses, and mules, and also geese,
appeared to be painfully aware of the approach of the earthquake of
Calabria; and the neighing of a horse, the braying of an ass, or the
cackling of a goose, even when he (Hamilton) was making his survey
(after the occurrence of the great earthquake shock), drove the people
out of their temporary sheds in expectation of a shock."

It is asserted that birds appear to be especially sensible to a coming
earthquake shock. That geese will quit the water in which they were
swimming before the earthquake and will not return to it. It is quite
possible that these birds with their heads immersed in the water can
hear the distant murmurings long before they become audible in the air.

Von Hoff makes the following statement:

      "It has been remarked that at such times (immediately
      before the coming of an earthquake shock), domestic animals
      showed a decided uneasiness, dogs howled mournfully, horses
      neighed in an unusual manner, and poultry flew restlessly
      about. These latter phenomena might easily be produced by
      mephitic vapours, which often ascend to the surface of the
      earth before the breaking out of an earthquake."

Mallet states that there is abundant evidence that earthquake shocks,
even when not of very great intensity, produce nausea in both men and
women. This would seem natural, since, as everyone knows, until one
is accustomed to sea-voyages, merely to be tossed to and fro by the
motion of the waves results in the production of sea-sickness.

It has been also noticed that during earthquakes fish which under
ordinary circumstances live in the mud at the bottom of bodies of
water come near to the surface and at such times can be caught in
great numbers.

Mallet cites the following effects produced by earthquakes:

      "Amongst the effects supposed to be produced by the
      earthquake on the atmosphere were reckoned tempestuous
      winds, thunder-storms, meteors, coldness of the air,
      severe winters, heavy rains, miasmata, producing diseases
      and affecting vegetation. A very remarkable instance of
      the latter is quoted, namely, that in Peru, after the
      earthquake of 1687, wheat and barley would not thrive at
      all, though formerly the country was remarkably favourable
      for them."

Sir Charles Lyell notes the following phenomena attending earthquakes:

      "Irregularities in the seasons preceding or following the
      shocks; sudden gusts of wind, interrupted by dead calms;
      violent rains at unusual seasons, or in countries where,
      as a rule, they are almost unknown; a reddening of the
      sun's disk, and haziness in the air, often continued for
      months; an evolution of electric matter, or of inflammable
      gas from the soil, with sulphurous and mephitic vapours;
      noises underground, like the running of carriages, or
      the discharge of artillery, or distant thunder; animals
      uttering cries of distress, and evincing extraordinary
      alarm, being more sensitive than men to the slightest
      movement; a sensation like sea-sickness, and a dizziness in
      the head, experienced by men. These, and other phenomena,
      less connected with our present subject as geologists, have
      recurred again and again at distant ages, and in all parts
      of the globe."


THE END




FOOTNOTES:

[Footnote 1: A point on the other side of the earth directly opposite
a given point.]

[Footnote 2: A fracture of a stratum, or a general rock mass, with a
relative displacement of the opposite sides of the break.

The plane or fracture of a fault, known as the fault-plane, is seldom
vertical. The higher side is called the heaved or upthrow side; the
opposite side the thrown or downthrow side.]

[Footnote 3: _Tectonic Earthquake_. An earthquake due to the sudden
slip of faulted strata.]

[Footnote 4: _I. e._, burnt out mountain, extinct volcano.]

[Footnote 5: _Epicentre._ A point on the surface of the earth
vertically above the point of origin of an earthquake, or the place
where it starts.]




Transcriber's Notes


Obvious printer errors have been silently corrected.

Some illustrations have been moved to paragraph breaks.

Page 43: Kamehamoha could be a typo for Kamehameha.

Page 68: Changed "salter" to "saltier."
  (Orig: another with water salter than the sea,)

Page 76: Changed "Ena" to "Etna."
  (Orig: during his time Mt. Ena had lost so much of its height)

Page 115: "eruption during the winter of 1841-43," could be a typo for
1841-42 or 1842-43.

Page 122: "Mont Pelée" could be a typo for "Mount Pelée."

Page 136: 43° C." (109° 4' F.). could be a typo for (109.4° F.).

Page 341: Changed one-eight to one-eighth.
  (Orig: It was equal to one-eight of a Roman mile)

Retained the following spelling variations:

  Page 49: The largest volcano in Iceland, the Dyngjufköll,
  Page 57: The largest volcano in Iceland is Dyngjufjoll.

  Pages 52, 193, 311: Geikie
  Page 181: Geicke

  Pages 17, 156, 257: Hindostan
  Page 165: Hindustan

  Page 63: Lucullis
  Page 76: Lucullus